Sangamo_Sabre_III_3600_Magnetic_Tape_Recorder_Reproducer_Technical_Manual_Aug73 Sangamo Sabre III 3600 Magnetic Tape Recorder Reproducer Technical Manual Aug73
User Manual: Sangamo_Sabre_III_3600_Magnetic_Tape_Recorder_Reproducer_Technical_Manual_Aug73
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 316
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
lJ I. SAB E iU 3600 ft;\ ETIC TAPE: ., e f' @ Ii! ." <" ~ IIIIII co SA'''G S ri :=============----=.----~~ NY TABLE OF CONTENTS AND LIST OF EFFECTIVE BULLETINS OPERATOR'S SECTION BULLETIN PAGE NUMBER OPERATOR'S TAB GENERAL INFORMATION TAB GENERAL INFORMATION Scope Description General Specifications General. . . Tape Transport . Magnetic Heads . Direct Record/Reproduce . FM RecordlReproduce . PCM Write/Read . . . . 3602-3 x 1 4 4 4 5 5 6 8 3603-3 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 4 4' 4 5 OPERATOR'S DATA TAB OPERATOR'S DATA General. . . Description of Controls and Indicators General. . . . . . . . " . AC to DC Power Supp!v (optional) . Tape Transport . . . . . . . RIR Signal Chassis and Signal Boards Chassis . . . . Direct RIR Boards • Direct Record. . Direct Reproduce Bias Oscillator Board FM R/R Boards . . EFFECTIVE BULLETIN 2 INSTALLATION TAB Ij\lST ALLATION General. • Site Selection Installation Requirements. Power Requirements General. . . . . Power Connections . Signal Cable Connections Record . . Reproduce. Inspection . . General. . Cable Assemblies. Installation Summary BULLETIN NUMBER 3601-1 1 1 1 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 _ X PAGE NUMBERS FM Record. . . . FM Reproduc.e PCM VVrite/Read Boards PCM v\%'ite . PCM Read. . . . PCM Clock. . . . Encoder (high density) . Voice/Edge AlB R/R Boards Voice Record. . . . Edge AlB Record Voice-Edge AlB Reproduce Tape Threading . . Operating Procedures Power Appl.ication Tape Tr~nsport Recording . . . Chassis . . . Direct Record . FM Record. Reproducing . . Chassis . . . Direct Reproduce FM Reproduce FM 4- 7 Speed Expander Tape Synchronous Speed Control Reference Recording Reference Reproducing Tape Sensing . Remote Control Operator's Theory General. . . Power Supply . Tape Transport General. . Mode Control Speed Control . Capstan Sync Tape Sync. Reel Drive. . Signal Electronics Chassis . . . Record Electronics Rzpmduce Electronics Operator's Maintenance General. . . . . . Inspection. . . . . Preventive Maintenance Tape Path . R/R Heads. . . . 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 BULLETIN NUMBER EFFECTIVE BULLETIN BULLETIN PAGE NUMBERS Magnetized Head . Head Degaussing Tape Splicing. . . . ~hecks and Adjustments DC Transport Power DC to DC Converter. Mode Control Circuits Speed Control. . . Reference Frequency Checks. Capstan T athometer Capstan Servo Control Tape Sync Control Reel Drive. . . . . Tension. . • . • Pinch Roller Pressure Record/Reproduce Chassis Record Chassis Reproduce Chassis . . Signal Electr~mics System Performance Measurements . Wow and Flutter. . . Direct R/R. . . . • Frequency Response Signal to Noise Ratio FM R/R. . . . . • Frequency Response Signal to Noise Ratio DC Linearity BULLETIN NUMBER EFFECTIVE BULLETIN 21 21 22 23 23 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 29 29 31 31 31 32 32 32 34 34 34 34 34 35 35 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS FIGURE NUMBER PAGE NUMBER TITLE .. GENERAL INFORMATION BULLETIN 3602-1 1. Overall Functional Block Diagram 3 2. 3. 4. Typical Sabre III. 9 • . . . . SABRE III with Front Operator Access Doors Open SABRE III, Cabinet Removed, Assembly Orientation. 10 11 INSTALLATION BULLE::rIN 3603-3 1. Mounting and Outline Dimensions 2 2. Typical Installation Cable Connections 6 OPERATOR'S DATA BULLETIN 3601·1 1. Transport Control Panel 2. Tape Threading Diagram 3. System Functional Block Diagram 3 .. v 9 17 (JUliE NUMBER TITLE PAGE NUMBER 4. Speed Control System Basic Block Diagram 19 5. Tape Splicing Procedure 23 6. Capstan Board, Location of Testpoints and Adjustments. 28 7. 8. Pinch Roller Pressure Threading . 29 Pinch Roller Pressure Adjustment 31 LIST OF TABLES TITLE TABLE NUMBER PAGE NUrlilBE F1 INSTALLATION BULLETIN 3603-3 1. Fuse Information 4 2. Cables R€'wired and Supplied 4 3. Cables Required But Not Supplied 5 OPERATOR'S DATA BULLETIN 3601-1 ,. 2. 3. 4. Tape Record Time With Footage Index Fuse Functions . 20 . Reference Frequencies 26 Record/Reproduce Speed Lines 31 ~~il~~.c~~~=========-~~ vi (:==============~:::~ TABLE OF CONTENTS AND LIST OF EFFECTIVE BULLETINS MAINTENANCE SECTION PAGE NUMBER BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER MAINTENANCE TAB TAPE TRANSPORT TAB TAPE TRANSPORT TAB General. . . . . Theory of Operation General. . . . DC Power Distribution . System Mode Control Logic Sequencies (ie Stop to Forward) . Speed Control SYstem . . . Reference Oscillator Circuits Tachometer Signal Circuits Tape Signal Circuits. . . Frequency Preparation Circuits Phase Comparison Circuits Frequency Comparison Circuits . Acceleration Amplification Circuits Reel Drive. . . . . . . . . . Maintenance - Each of the following headings contain Circuit Description, Test Data, Parts List and Diagrams pertaining to that heading . General. . . , Mode Control . Logic Board Speed Control. Capstan Board Tape Sync Board. Capstan Power Amplifier " Reel Drive. . . . Photocell Assembly Microswitch Pinch Rollers . . Reel Drive Board . Parts Removal/Replacement Data Cabinet Removal. . . Board Replacement. . Capstan Motor Assembly Motor Replacement . Brush Replacement . Tach Lamp Replacement Pinch Roller Assembly. . Roller and Bearing Replacement. Solenoid Replacement . ~ . • . ,~' C==================::.:::J:J 3604-4 11 2 2 thru 8 9 10 11 11 11 12 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 20 20 32 36 38 38 38 38 39 43 43 43 43 43 45 45 46 46 47 vii EFFECTIVE BULLETIN BULLETIN PAGE NUMBER Reel Drive Assembly Tension Arm Spring Replacement Photbceil Replacement. . . . Microswitch Replacement. . . • inertia Dampening Roller and Bearing Replacement Record and Reproduce Head Replacement . . Record Head Replacement and Alignment Reproduce Head Replacement and Alignment Tape V~jdth Change . 1 inch to 1/2 inch . . . . . . . . . 1/2 inch to 1 inch Assy. Reference Designations and Mech. Parts List. BULLETIN NUMBER EFFECTIVE BULLETIN 48 48 48 48 49 50 50 52 53 53 54 54 Diagrams Remote Shorting Plug WIring Record Head Wiring Reproduce Head Wiring Transport Wiring Transport Overall Schematic RECORD TAB - Any bulletin behind this tab contains the following: Gemral, Operating Data, Theory, Maintenance, Parts list, and Diagrams. RECORD CHASSIS DIRECT RECORD FM RECORD BIAS PCM WRiTE ENCODER 3653-1 3609·' 3643-' 3613-1 3644-1 3650·' X X X /"X.. REPRODUCE TAB - Any bulletin behind the reproduce tab contains the following: General, -Operating Data, Theory, Maintenance, Parts List and Diagrams. REPRODUCE CHASSIS FM REPRODUCE DIRECT REPRODUCE PREAMPS AN D PREAMP POWER SUPPLY FM 4-7 SPEED EXPANDER PCM READ PCM CLOCK DECODER 3654-1 3647-1 3641-1 3639-1 3648-1 3645·1 3646-1 3655-1· X X )( X POWER SUPPLIES TAB - Any bulletin behind the power supplies tab contains the following: General, Operating Data, Theory, Maintenance, Parts List, and Diagrams. REGULATED AC TO DC POWER SUPPLY DC TO DC CONVERTER 3638-1 3637-1 x X =- ::J BULLETIN BULLETIN NUMBER PAGE NUMBER OPTIONAL ITEMS, KITS, ETC, TAB - Any bulletin behind• the optional items tab generally contains the following: General. Operating Data, Theory, Maintenance, Parts List, and Diagrams. VOICE R/R EDGE AlB R/R TAPE SHUTTLE FM DENSITY CHANGE CALIBRATION/MONITOR METER PHOTO END-OF-TAPE SENSE 3606-1 3633-1 3629-2 3634-1 3632·1 3642-1 3652-1 PLAYBACK MONITOR KIT FM CALIBRATOR 3656-1 EFFECTIVE BULLETIN X X X PARTS LIST TAB 3680-1 PARTS LIST x LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS TITLE ' FIGURE NUMBER TAPE TRANSPORT BULLETIN 3604-4 PAGE NUMBER 1. Speed Control System Basic Block Diagram . 10 2. Speed Control System Overall Block Diagram 13 3. Capstan Board, Component Location , , . 30 4. Capstan Board, Schematic Diagram. . '. 31 5. Tape Sync Board, Schematic and Component Location 6. Capstan Power Amp Schematic and 7. 8. 9. Reel Drive Overall Schematic and Board Component Location 45 Capstan Motor Wring Variations 48 10. Shaft and Pinch Roller Assembly 50 11. Pinch Roller Solenoid Mounting Details 51 12, Tensic'ln Arm and Photocell Assembly 53 13. Inertia Roller. 54 14. Typical Tape Head Mounting Details Remote Control Shorting Plug Wring Diagram Record Head Wiring Diagram Reproduce Head Wiring Diagram Transport Wiring Diagram Transport Schematic Diagram , V\~ring Diagram Capstan Motor Partially Disassembled . • . • • • • " 37 40 • 49 55 The remaining tab divided sections contain bulletins as listed and indicated in earlier portions of this table of contents. Each of these bulletins contain diagrams pertaining to the item covered by that bulletin. ix HI F~'[_,~ FM _ _'-f!L.':.~i&._ Digital _ _ _ __ J ~-~-=---===============-=-=-=--=--. -.-....,..I.I'..·---·--=l MAGNETIC HEAD CHARACTERISTiCS and SIGNAL ELECTRONICS BOARD SERIAL NUMBERS for TAPE TRANSPORT SERIAL NO . .-.:...7...,;..49.:;;,..8::..-_ __ HEAD PART NO. SERIAL NO. TAPE TYPE 3M---B.8.£Lor Equiv. TRACK NUMBERING FORMAT IRIG RECORD REPRODUCE Track Direct Record Serial No. No. Direct Repro Direct Record Serial No. Bias level (vdc) 1 ?4R~ 1r-l43 1.?0 2 2~2 1541 1468 1537 1f342 1536 1494 1539 1547 1545 1.80 1 40 1.90 1.20 1.80 1.20 1.80 1.20 1.85 1544 1538 1540 1546 1.10 -.3_.Lill4 4 2481 2427 5 6 2473 2441 7 8 2456 2490 ~ 10 2484 11 ,12 2451 2435 2397 [13 14 • 2236 Band w~.n , 1.15 V FM Repro Serial No. I. FM Expander Serial No. .. 0.17? 3125 .. 2202 :lj32 2263 0.166 0.172 0,168 I .I ..3168 3169 3170 4024 4025 4026 2204 2201 2206 2207 2214 2215 2216 4027 4028 4029 4030 2217 2218 2219 2220 peM Read, Decoder Seria: No. PCM \'kite, Encoder Serial No . FM Inl=>ut Band level Classification o/uDev. :!: (vrms) ??Of) ~..illiL ~167 1.85 1.80 FM Record Serial No. .. Clas~ification . BIAS BOARD SERIAL NO.~BIAS FREQ 8.4 MHz PCM CLOCK BOARD SERIAL NO: ___________ EDGE AlB OR VOICE RECORD BOARD SERIAL NO._.:..3.... 4.lo<.9_ __ EDGE AlB OR VOICE REPRODUCE BOARD SERIAL NO~S). 585 1-740% 586 7 - 1430% PCM Format Conversion WRI j Q....1l{L 0.1 fJ.f3 0.166 0.125 0.130 0.128 I . W.B.II 0.128 I 0.124 j' I I !I I I ! 0.127 0.128 'I / .,I ---1 , I I t- :l I NOTE: DIRECT NORMAL RECORD lEVEL=100 mvrms at TP2. This level is defined as the input level required to produce 1% third harmonic distortion. ~ FM input level measured at TP1 on FM record board. .. Refer to the applicable record bu!letin for characteristics of band classification. 3600 4900 Rev.3 3-12·73 BULLETIN NO. 3602-3 GENERAL INFORMATION SCOpE This technical manual has been prepared to provide the necessary information for installation, operation, and maintenance of the SABRE 111,3600, MAGNETIC TAPE RECORDER/REPRODUCER. The manual is divided into two tab identified sections; Operator's, and Maintenance. The Operator's section is further divided into three sections, generally containing the following information. GENERAL INFORMATION - This section contains a bulletin covering the use of the technical manual, general description of the system with photographs, general specifications, and optional features. INSTALLATION - This section contains a bulletin covering Sangamo "UTE-OFF", power requirements, site selection, power connections, inspection (fuses and installation connections), dimensional diagrams, installation summary, and possibly interfacing information. OPE RA TO R 'S - This section contains a bulletin covering a description of controls and indicators, tape . threading, operating procedures, operators theory, operator's maintenance (including checks and adjustments), and system performance measUrements. Additional bulletins may be included in any of these sections. The Maintenance section is further divided into six sections, generally containing the following information. TAPE TRANSPO RT - This section contains a bulletin covering overall basic theory, maintenance data for each transport related circuit board, assembly, etc., parts removal/replacement data, parts list, and diagrams for the basic tape transport and tape movement circu its. RECORD - This section contains bulletins covering the recording of signal data onto the moving magnetic tape. Separate bulletins for record chassis, FM record, direct record, bias, etc., each contain operating data, theory, maintenance, parts list, and diagrams. REPRODUCE - This section contains bulletins covering the recovery and reproduction of signal data recorded on magnetic tape. Separate bulletins for reproduce chassis, FM reproduce, direct reproduce, preamplifiers, etc., each contain operating data, theory, maintenance, parts list, and diagrams. POWER SUPPU ES - This section contains bulletins covering the optional AC to DC power supply and the DC to DC converter employed with the system. Each bulletin contains operating data, theory, maintenance, parts, and diagrams. OPTIONAL ITEMS - This section contains a bulletin for each particular option or addition to the recorder/reproducer system. Each bulletin may contain operating procedures, theory, maintenance, parts list, and diagrams. All voice or time code record/reproduce information is found here. « 1 t:::=::::::::==========::::::::J1 Ch. 1 8-73 ~t\\Q1~~~ (![Jl~~~~~~ BULLETIN NO. 3602-3 PARTS LIST -. This section contains a bulletin, listing and describing the electrical parts used in the ,corder/reproducer system. This listing, numerically by Sangamo part number, is provided for cross eferencing from a smaller parts list on or near the diagrams for each assembly or subassembly (bulletin). Q DESCRIPTION The SAB REI ~I, 3600, Recorder/Reproducer contains the capability of moving magnetic tape across the record and reproduce heads in either direction at a precise and uniform rate, during the record and/or reproduce process. To accomplish tape movement over the heads at the most precise speed a capstan drive system with inertia dampening roller and pinch rollers is employed, refer to figure 1. The capstan, which controls all tape movement, is controlled by the speed control and mode control circuits. The reel drive circuits are utilized to provide the proper feeding and taking up of tape to and from the capstan as it turns. In addition to these tape movement circuits are special circuits which provide added features to the standard tape movement capability (end-of-tape sense, etc.). To record signal data, time code signals, or voice the input signal must be conditioned, and possibly, combined with bias, by the record boards prior to being applied to the head for recording on tape. These record boards are normally capable of recording at any tape speed in various bandwidths. In reproducing signal data, time code signals, or voice, the reproduced signal must be applied through the preamps to the reproduce board complement of the type signal recorded (FM, direct, etc.). The reprorl.,uce board conditions the signal to present it at the system output in a form most like the input signal, . lior to recording. C An optional AC to DC regulated power supply is available to provide the necessary dc voltage required by the recorder/reproducer. A standard DC to DC converter assembly converts the input dc voltage to various voltages required by the tape movement circuits, record/reproduce circuits, and for the most part any other circuit or circuits which may be used in the system. The complete model number of the recorderlreproduceris dependent upon the family of speeds supplied, the type of signal electronics supplied, and the frequency response available as follows: MODEL 3612 DESCRIPTION IRIG FM low-band (20 kHz at 120 ips) with 120 through 1 7/8 ips speed range. OR IRIG intermediate-band (20 kHz at 60 ips) with 60 through 15/16 ips speed range. 3614 IRIG FM intermediate-band (40 kHz at 120 ips) with 120 through 1 7/8 ips speed range. OR I RIG wide-band group I (40 kHz at 60 ips) with 60 through 15/16 ips speed range. 2 BULLETIN NO. 3602-3 --r"l't.,r--] 'IAEELOA'_VE CIPCUIT$ INPUT :s1GNALS ---,,---, --------------------~ 'RECORD Et.EC1'RONICS speED LINES TO RECORD ELECTRONICS L SPEED CONTROL CIRCUITS SQUELCH AND SPEED LiNes TO REPRODUCE: :~;if;,';[ MODE CONTROL Oi?ERATOR .....>-----,-------i..'COMMANDS CIRCUITS . _ - . -_ _---J flEPROOUCE ELECTRONICS END·OF· TAPE $E~SE CIP.CU!T~ OUTPUT SIGNALS $'~STEM REGULATEO +29Vdc TO TRANSPORT AC roOCPOWER SUPPLY AC iNPUT REEL ORIVE SENSE Figure 1. Overall Functional Block Diagram c::==::=_,__,__ =..===:=::===:========::==:11 CIRCUITS BULLETIN NO. 3602-3 MODEL DESCRIPTION 3618 IRIG FM wide-band group I (80 kHz at'120 ips). 3621 ! RIG direct wide-band with 1.6 MHz equalizers with FM wideband group II capability. 3622 IRIG direct wide-band with 2.0 MHz equalizers with FM wideband group II capability. 3630 I RIG wide-band capability with mixed channel electronics (Le. 80 kHz FM and 2.0 MHz direct). GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF TYPICAL SYSTEM (See Specification bulletin at the rear of this bulletin) Figure 2. Typical SABRE III BU LLETI N NO. 3602·3 LEFT TAPE TENSION ARM HEAD AREA RECORD CHASSIS CONTROL PANEL RECORD, REPRODUCE AND POWER CONNECTOR PANELS r.·. " · · · f \ ~' RIGHT TAPE TENSION ARM Figure 3. SABRE III With Front Operator Access Doors Open cc====-=~=::=::=:==·=-==========:=:==:====:======~ 5 . BULLETIN NO. 3602-3 TAPE SYNC BOAR D (OPTIONAL, MOUNTED ON CAPSTAN BO ARD) SQUELCH SWITCH SQUELCH . SQUELCH DISABLE -of--~ ACTIVE LOGIC BOARD REEL DRIVE BOARD OCTO DC CONVERTER R EPR 0 DU CE ---'...-.-.:~ CHASSIS RANGE -";;";;""--SWITCH AIR ~---- FILTER Figure 4. SABRE III, Cabinet Removed, Assembly Orientation 28 Vdc . t 24 Vdc Bulletin 3?O"l A portable recorder/ reproducer specifications SAN GAM 0: THE INNOVATORS OF TAPE INSTRUMENTATION SANGAMO ELECTRIC COMPANY SABRE III RECORDER/REPRODUCER SPECIFICATIONS TAPE TRANSPORT Tape Speeds: 120,60,30, 15,7-1/2,3-3/4,1-7/8 ips or 60,30, 15,7-1/2,3-3/4, 1-7/8,15/16 ips. All speeds are electrically selectable and bi-directional. Reel Size: Precision or NAB, 10-1/2, 14,15 or 16 inch. Performances with precision reels. Reel Lock~: Non-detachable, 20° turn to lock. No removable parts. Tape Width: 1/2 or 1 inch. Field change kits available. Footage Counter: Linear 5 digit, bi-directional and resettable. Tape Thickness: 1.0 or 1.5 mil base may be used interchangeably. Performances measured with Sangamo recommended tapes, I RIG 50 mil tracks, and in capstan synchronous mode. Start and Stop Times: Less than 5 seconds for all record/reproduce speeds for 14 inch reels. SI ightly longer with 15 and 16 inch reels. Flutter: Tape Speeds (ips) Two Sigma Flutter % 120 60 30 15 7-1/2 3-3/4 1-7/8 15/16 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.60 Reference Oscillator Stability: 1 part in 105 per day. Speed Control Correction Rate: ±20% speed change per second without loss of synchronism. Speed Control Correction Range: ±25% nominal speed, minimum. Instantaneous Time Base Error (Observed over 10 second period): Tape Speeds (ips) TBE (Peak) (Microseconds) 120 60 30 lS 7-1/2 3--3/4 1-7/8 15/16 ± 0.50 ± 0.50 ± 0.60 ± 1.00 ± 2.00 ± 4.00 ± 8.00 ±12.00 Per IRIG 106-71 Bandwidth 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 kHz Hz- 10 kHz Hz- 10 kHz Hz- 5 Hz- 2.5 kHz Hz- 1.25 kHz Hz Hz - 625 Hz Hz - 313 Hz Hz - 156 Dynamic Interchannel Time Displacement Error {lTD E): Less than ±1.5 microseconds between outside even or odd tracks on one inch tape at 120 ips. Rewind/Fast Forward Speed: 750 feet per minute for standard system. Tape Loop Operation (Optional 117 V ac, 60 Hz only): 10 to 150 foot (60 through 15/16 ips) loops can be accommodated when rack mounted. Splice blanking available. Performances available for each application. Controls: Illuminated pushbuttons for control of: Power, Stop, Record, Forward, Reverse, and Fast. Capstan Sync and Tape Servo Indicator Light. Rotary Tape Speed selector. Tape Speed selector also selects Direct reproduce equalization, FM center frequencies and filters automatically, for any seven adjacent system tape speeds. Provision is included for remote operation except power and speeds. Optional photo end-of-reel sensing and shuttle. Tape Speed Accuracy: ±0.1% of selected tape speed. REPRODUCE TAPE SERVO SYSTEM (Optional) Reference Frequency: 400 kHz or 200 kHz selectable at 120 ips; submultiples at lower speeds. (Other frequencies on special order). (' Auto Lock: Capstan servo automatically reverts to capstan synchronous mode with loss of tape reference or in record mode. Long Term Speed Stability: ±O.OOl% referenced to record speed. Servo Correction Bandwidth: 200 Hz at 7-1/2 ips. Servo Sync Dropout Susceptibility: 6 dB dropouts will not cause loss of sync. MAGNETIC HEADS Track Geometry: PerlRIG 106-71. One-half inch head, 7 tracks interleaved with edge track A. One-inch head, 14 tracks interleaved with edge tracks A and B. Other formats available on special order. Configuration and Polarity: Per IRIG 106-71. Adjustable Reproduce Gap Azimuth: Within ±1 minute of arc standard with I RIG wideband channels. DIRECT RECORD/REPRODUCE CHANNEL Input Sensitivity: 0.2 to 10 V rms; adjustable in two ranges with vernier overlap to produce normal record level. Two position selector; 0.2 to 1.5 V, 1.5 to 10 V. Nominal Input Level: 1.0 V rms. Nominal Input Impedance: Two position selector; 10,000 ohms (high), 75 ohms (low), unbalanced to ground; shunted by less than 100 pF. Other values available. Third Harmonic Distortion: tRIG recommended 1% at 1()D..{, of upper band edge frequency. Frequency Response and Sigraaf/Noise (nns/rms): INTERMEDIAT'E BAND Tape Speeds (ips) .• 120 60 30 15 7-1/2 3-3/4 1-7/8 15/16 Bandwidth" SIN''''' (±3dBI (dB) 300 Hz - 600 200 Hz - 300 200 Hz --150 200 Hz- 75 200 Hz- 38 200 Hz- 19 200 Hz- 10 200 Hz- '5 kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz 38 38 37 35 34 34 34 31 WIDEBAND (Option I) 120 60 30 15 7-1/2 3-3/4 1-7/8 400 Hz-1.6 400 Hz- 0.8 400 Hz.- 0.4 400 Hz- 0.2 400 Hz- 0.1 400 Hz- 50.0 400 Hz- 25.0 MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz kHz kHz. 28 28 28 28 26 26 25 - WIDEBAND (Option II) 120 60 30 15 7-1/2 3-3/4 1-7/8 400 Hz- 2.0 400 Hz- 1.0 400 Hz- 0.5 400 Hz- 0.25 400 Hz - 125 400 Hz- 62.5 400Hz - 31.25 MHz MHz MHz MHz kHz kHz kHz 22 22 22 22 21 20 20 "All bands amplitude and phase equalized. "*With 18 dB/octave bandpass filter (per IRIG 106-71). Exclusive FM Density Selection (Optional): A two position switch electronically programs the center frequencies and FM filters to operate at the appropriate band and speed for any two adjacent bands. An X speed record/reproduce system in one band will be a (X-l) speed record/reproduce system in the adjacent band. Performances available for each application. IRIG lOW BAND Output Impedance: 50 ohms nominal, unbalanced to ground. Input Sensitivity: 0.2 to 10 V rms; adjustable in two ranges with vernier overlap for full deviation. Three position selector; 0.2 to 1.5 V; 1.5 to 10.0 V, or TEST. Nominal Input Level: 1.0 V rms. Nominal Input Impedances: 125,000 ohms resistive ( 1.5 to 10 V range). 20,000 ohms resistive (0.2 to 1.5 V range). All shunted by less than 100 pF, unbalanced to ground. Other loading values available on special order. 108 54 27 13.5 6.75 3.375 1.688 kHz DC - 20 kHz DC- 10 kHz DC- 5 DC- 2.5 kHz DC- 1.25 kHz DC- 0.625 kHz DC- 0.312 kHz 52 51 50 49 48 46 46 120 60 30 15 7-1/2 3-3/4 1-7/8 IRIG INTERMEDIATE BAND 120 60 30 15 7-1/2 3-3/4 1-7/8 15/16 216 108 54 27 13.5 6.75 3.375 1.688 kHz DC- 40 DC- 20 kHz kHz DC- 10 kHz DC- 5 DC- 2.5 kHz DC- 1.25 kHz DC.- 0.625 kHz DC- 0.312 kHz 51 51 49 48 47 46 45 41 IRIG WIDEBAND GROUP I 120 60 30 15 7-1/2 3-314 1-7/8 15/16 432 216 108 54 27 13.5 6.75 3.38 DCDCDCDCDCDCDCDC- 80 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 0_625 kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz 48 48 48 47 47 46 44 40 "Flat Amplitude (FA) within 1 dB; Linear Phase (lP) +1, -3 dB. ""1 dB less with LP filters. Group Delay Variation (120 ips): Less than ±250 nanoseconds from 100 kHz to 1.6 MHz. FREQUENCY MODULATION RECORD/REPRODUCE CHANNEL SIN (dB)"" (FA) Center Frequencies 'Optional Frequency Response~. Wideband(options I and II) at 15/16 ips available on special order. . Output Level: Adjustable to 1.0 V rms into 75 ohms at normal record level. (kHz) (FA or lP) Filter" Response Tape Speeds (ips) IRIG WIDEBAND GROUP II Filter Response + 120 60 30 15 7-1/2 3-3/4 1-7/8 900 450 225 112.5 56.25 28.125 14.06, DC - 500 DC -250 DC -125 DC - 62.5 DC- 31.25 DC- 15.6 D_C- 7.8 + DC to 400 kHz +1, -3 dB . DC to 500 kHz +1, -6 dB , , kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz' kHz kHz SIN (dB) 33 33 32 32 30 30 30 Transient Response (120 ips): Dropout Rate: Maximum of 1 in 10 6 with recommended tape at 5 KBPI (serial) and 2 KBPI (paraliel). R_i_se_T_im_e~._(M_a_x_lToverShoot (Max) t--_ _ _._ _-+__ 500 kHz 80 kHz (FA) 80 kHz (LP) 2 Microseconds 5 Microseconds 6 Microseconds -r"I I 15% 15~ 2O/~ DC Drift:, Less than ±O,5% of peak-to-peak deviation over an 8 hour period for 10°C after 15 minute warmup. Output Level: 0 to +6; 0 to - 6; or +6 to - 6 volts, adjustable downward in each case into 1000 ohm load. TTL compatible. Output Polarity: Logic "one" may be made either positive or negative with respect to logic "zero". DC Linearity: Less than ±0.5% of peak-to-peak deviation referenced to best straight line. Output Format: NRZ-L, NRZ-M, N RZ-S, RZ; B l¢-L, B l¢-M, B l1>-S (serial only). Total Harmonic Distortion (All Speeds): Less than 0.5% for frequencies lower than 0.1 Fco for all I RIG low, intermediate, and wideband Group I; less than 1.0% for wideband Group II. Output Rise and Fall Times: Less than 500 nanoseconds with 1000 ohm load shunted by 150 pF maximum. Output Level (Full Deviation): Adjustable to 1.0 V rms nominal into 75 ohms, with shortcircuit protection. (SCP). Output Impedance: 50 ohms nominal, unbalanced to ground with SCPo Output Squelch: Automatic for all speeds and activated from FM carrier detector or transport synchronous logic. DIGITAL (PCM) WRITE/READ CHANNEL Input Signal Level: 2 volts minimum, 50 volts maximu m, peak-to-peak. Input Formats Acceptable: NRZ-L, NRZ-M, NRZ-S, RZ; Bl¢.-L, B1¢-M,Bl¢-S (serial only). Input Signal Polarity: Positive, negative, or symmetrical about zero. Input Impedance: 20,000 ohms (maximum) unbalanced to ground; shunted by less that 100 pF. Output Impedance: Less than 100 ohms, unbalanced to ground. PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION Size: 26 inches high by 19 inches wide by 11-1/2 inches deep. Additional enclosure required (7 inches high) for a 14 channel-7 speed FM switchable record/reproduce system. DC Power: Switchable between 28±2 VDC and 24±2 VDC (15 and 16 inch reels not applicable on 24 VDC); optional DC power supply for operation from 47 to 440 Hz at 105 to 240 V ac. DC Power Supply Size: 7 inches high by 19 inches wide by 11-5/8 "inches deep. Weight: Approximately 100 pounds. Optional DC power supply weighs approximately 40 pounds. Record Mode: Non-bias recording. GENERAL Intermediate NRZ Bit Rates and Densities (Maximal"": Environment: Designed for laboratory, field van, shipboard, automotive and aircraft. SERIAL MODE Tape Speeds (ips) Bit Rate (KBPS) Density 600 300 150 75 38 19 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 120 60 30 15 7-1/2 3-3/4 1-7/8 15/16 (KBPI) PARALLEL MODE Bit Rate (KBPS) Density (KBPI) 240 120 60 30 15 7.50 3.75 1.88 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ""Optional Bit Rates. Higher serial and parallel bit rates for special applications with wideband heads optionally available. B11> & R Z formats at half densities. Bulletin 3207 A 0273 Printed in U.S.A. Temperature: Operating Range 5° to 50°C. Humidity: 5 to 95% relative, non-condensing. Altitude: 30,000 feet operating; 70,000 feet non-operating. Standard Colors: Front door and cabinet -- Olive. Front trim and card fronts - Beige. Other Optional Features: Monitor oscilioscopes, FM calibrators, edge voice annotation (local or rack mounted type with speaker), remote control (handheld) or rack mount type), edge track timing, FM re-recording, HDDR PCM encoder, sequential record/reproduce, peak reading monitor meters, head degausser, anti-vibration kits, rack mount kits, special paint, special cabinets, casters with anti-tilt platform, lifting eye bolts, protective covers. Specifications are as of February 15, 1973, and are subject to change without notice, SANGAMO ELECTRIC COMPANY DATA SYSTEMS Box 3347, Springfield, Illinois 62714 217-544-6411 BULLETIN NO. 3603-3 INSTALLATION GENtRAL Upon delivery of a system to a customers facility, Sangamo provides a "LITE-OFF" (startup) service performed by an authorized Sangamo service engineering representative. This is provided to ensure the system was not affected by shipment and that all contract requirements have been met; as well as familiarizing the customer with the equipment and instruction manuals. Upon receiving the system initially, as shipped from the factory, the Sangamo Service Engineering Department should be contacted concerning "L1TEOFF", unless prior arrangements have been made. For installation checkout ("L1TE-OFF") of systems delivered in the U.S.A. call collect to: Sangamo Electric Company P.O. Box 3347 Springfield, Illinois 62708 Tel. 217-544-6411 Ext. 352 Service Engineering SITE SELECTION Overall dimensions of the 3600,SABRE III, Recorder / Reproducer are shown in figure 1. If the auxiliary chassis and/or power supply are not supplied, ignore that information. When choosing a site for the installation, enslIre enough space is provided for adequate Clearance of front and back openings. Ensure the air vent openings are not obstructed, allowing the proper flow of air. Also ensure the unit will not be subjected to exceptionally strong magnetic fields, damaging vibrations, dirt or debris. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS The recorder/reproducer is ready to install as received. Place the main cabinet on top of the power supply unit (if supplied). The depressions in the black mounting feet fit over the metal projections on the top of the power supply. Place the auxiliary chassis (if supplied) on top of the main cabinet and secure it using the metal clasps fastened on both sides of the auxiliary chassis. POWER REQUI REMENTS a. GENERAL - The SABRE 111,3600, Recorder/Reproducer requires either 28 Vdc ± 2 Vdc or 24 Vdc ± 2 Vdc at a load of 480 to 840 watts. An optional power supply is available permitting operation from a variety of AC power sources. Refer to the configuration sheet (first page in this manual) to note the power supply supplied. Note,a range switch, located on the left side of the recorder/reproducer, must be changed when switching from 28 to 24 Vdc input or vice versa. =:= BULLETIN NO. 3603-3 28.50 rAIR EXHAUST - 11.5 -1 §~ .. ~::' ~~ ~~~ AIR INTAKE - - ,.--19.00---1 i···r·L~~L ,,",,4 I .I FITTING CARRYiNG HANDLES '8 ~.3: i..-75J 14-11.32 I J "j" 0.312 ~ ~ -.-- 17.8 -- \LUSH---FITTING CARRYING HANDLES ~ ..... ~ ~~~R~\ 90 LBS _~ -.J _I tJ] II '~D'~APPROX o MAX. WT 21. 5 LBS 0 1.7.5.J AUXILIARY CHASSIS r-11.32~ [iE} ~~ be l.-7.5-J r-- ----j 'L['--===----"11 0 011 ---==f 1900 AIR INTAKE 0312 6. 97 10 J l.--!7.e - - , . AIR EXHAUST ~ACIDC POWER §a RECEPTACLES . I -l'"~_ APPROX • MAX. WT 45 L8S AC/OC POWER SUPPLY UNIT NOTE' ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN INCHES. Figure 1. Mounting and Outline Dimensions ------~~ 2 Ct=.============:=_=================~j BULLETIN NO. 3603-3 b. . POWER CONNECTIONS (1) WITHOUT OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY - When no optional power supply is supplied, it is necessary for the cllstomer to connect the recorder/reproducer to the available DC supply. A power cable may be supplied if ordered by the customer, in which case simply connect it between the POWE R connector and the customers available supply observing correct polarity. If no power cabie is supplied, complete the following steps. Step 1. Locate the fOllr pin power connector (normally shipped with the accessories). Step 2. Remove the hood from this connector. Step 3. 'Using sufficient lengths of wire, slip the hood onto the wires and make the following connections: #14 gage wire #14 gage wire #14 gage wire #14 gage wire #18 gage wire to to to to to Pin B ( + 28 Vdc) ( special,for blower fan Pin u ( - 28 Vdc) ~ Pin A ( + 28 Vdc) Pin C ( - 28 Vdc) connector case. (earth ground) CAUTION Insure that proper connections are made with no possibility ~lf shorting. NOTE Use different colors of wire to distinguish polarity. Step 4. Slide the hood onto the connector and secure it. Step 5. Terminate the three wires to the available DC supply observing correct polarity. (2) WITH OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY Step 1. Locate the supplied power cable (normally shipped in the air filter cavity of the power supply). Step 2. Connect this power cable between the power supply and the main power panel, refer to figure 2. Step 3. Connect the power cord for the power supply to the available AC supply. SIGNAL CABLE CONNECTIONS s. RECORD - The data signals to be recorded are to be connected to the standard BNC connectors on the record connector panel. The reference signal should be connected to the proper channel if tape synchronous is to be utilized, refer to figure 2. b. REPRODUCE - The reproduce signals appear at the BNC connectors on the reproduce connector panel during the reproduce process. The tape synchronous signal must be applied to the TAPE BNC connector on the power connector pane!, refer to figure 2. BU LLETI N NO. 3603-3 INSPECTION a. GENERAL Step 1. Check the dust covers for dents or cracks in the glass. Step 2. Check the cabinet for dents or scratches. Step 3. Check the tape-tension arms for free movement. Step 4. Check that the fuses are in place and are of the proper value. Refer to table 1, fuse information. • TABLE 1. LOCATION DESIGNATION FUSE INFORMATION RATING - FUNCTION PART NO. Rear of Transport Fl ABC-20A Primary DC Power 859774·001 Rear of Transport F2 F02B-3A Capstan Motor Power 821926 Left Side of Transport F3 AGX-8A DC to DC Power 510279-004 Optional Power Supply Unit F1 ABC-lOA (110 V input) Primary AC Power 859774-008 ABC-5A (220 V input) Optional Power Supply Unit F2 ABC-20A 859774-005 +28 Vdc output 859774-011 -- b. CABLE ASSEMBLIES - When the system is installed ensure the following cable connections have been made properly. Refer to figure 2 ,.- TABLE 2. CABLES REQUIRED AND SUPPLIED * FUNCTION FROM TO AC Primary Power Customers AC Source DC Power Supply DC Power Supply or Transport Power & Control (using Optional DC power supply) DC Primary Power -- Remote Control** Customers DC source Connector Panel, Power Connector Optional Remote Control Unit Transport Power & Control Connector Panel, Remote Connector Record Tape Sync Ref Signal *** Reproduce Tape Sync Ref Sjgnal**~ Record Monitor*** Reproduce Monitor*** Record Connector Panel, Record Connector Panel, Ref REF Connector Channel Input (normally even channel) Reproduce Connector Panel, Transport Power & Control Ref Channel Output Connector Panel, TAPE Connector Record Connector Panel Monitor Device (calibration/monitor Monitor Output Connector meters, scope, etc.) Monitor Device Reproduce Connector Panel and/or Auxiliary Reproduce o Connector Panel, Monitor Connector Including all options *"*Optional _ (calibratio~/monitor meter, scope, etc.) ** If remote control panel is not used, the- remote jumper plug must be inserted into the REMOTE jack on the Power & Control ~anel befGre proper operation can be achieved. 4CI=========================~~ BULLETIN NO. '3603-3 NOTE For t'oice and edge track cable connections refer to the voice or edge track bulletin in the optional items section. ,------------._----------, --~~. TA BlE 3. CABLES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED --_. FUNCTION Record Signals Input Reproduce Signals Output TO FROM CuHomers Data Source Record Connector Panel Reproduce Connector Panel (normally BNC) Customers Analyzing Equip- and/or AuxJliary Reproduce Connector Panel (normally BNC) ment. INSTALLATiON SUMMARY Upon completion of the inspection procedures the user is strongly urged to thoroughly familiarize himself with the equipment, by using this technical manual. Refer to the configuration sheet and contents with list- of effective bulletins (front of manual) to determine what the system contains and what bulletins are applicabh~ for this particular configuration. c:: :::. ::::::: =-::J 5 c=·======== BULLETIN NO. 3603-3 ------------l REPRODUCE RECORD _-=.l (Optionall L-_ _ _ _ _..:...._C"-Ac.:Lc.:'.;;.;:.RP:TlONI~ONITOR MEr~_~~~~~_'_S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-_ _ _ _ I --1 I I I -0 I-- POVIIER & r __J ©==© MONITOR CONT~OL -[J (Optional) AUXILIARY REPRODUCE CHASSIS © © REF. EDGE TRACK IN MONITOR VOICE IN 0 0 J TO SELECTED REF. RECORD CH. I-________~ECORO CONNECTOR PAN,~E,-,L,-_ __ ©------© L I MONITOR VOICE OR EDGE TRACK DATA AUXILIARY _ REPRODUCE . fROM SELECTED REPAOO E CH. REF~ EOGe AO EOGE ( ) CHASSIS CABLING REPRODUCE CONNECTOR PANel ~~~~!:"'L---+-----iL,---:_ __ UNIT IOptloNlI) POWER FOR OPTIONA REMOTE POWER AUXILIAAY VOICE CHASSIS ~ 1-________-'PO.:;,w:..En .. CONTROL CONNECTOR PANEL RECORDER/REPRODUCER DC POVUER SUPPLY '(Option:-II 4 PRIMARV ACPOW Figure 2. Typical Installation Cable Connections (right side of cabinet) BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 OPERATOR'S DATA 1 GENERAL This bulletin contains the information required to sufficientiy operate this Sangamo recorder/reproducer. Information contained consists of description of controls and indicators, tape threading, operating procedures, operator's theory, operator's maintenance, and system performance measurements. Additional and/ or more detail operator information for certain subassemblies, optional features, etc., may be found in the appropriate bulletin in the maintenance section. Consult the contents and list of effective bulletins, and configuration sheet at the front of this manual for variable standard items and options present on this particular recorder/reproducer. TABLE 1. TAPE RECORD TIME WITH FOOTAGE INDEX* Reel Size (inches) I RIG Bandwidth H Base Thickness (mils) Length (feet) 120 60 Tape Speed 30 (ips) 15 7-1/2 3-3/4 1-7/8 15/16 10-1/2 1& 2 1.5 2500 4.2M 8.3M 16.6M 33.3M 66.6M 2.2H 4.4H 8.8H 10-1/2 1&2 1.0 3600 6M 12M 24M 48M 96M 3.2H 6.4H 12.8H 10-1/2 3 1.0 4600 7.65M 15.3M 30.6M 1.0H 2.0H 4..1H 8.2H 16.4H 14 1&2 1.5 5000 8.3M 16.6M 33.3M 66.6M 2.2H 4.4H 8.8H 17.6H 14 1& 2 1.0 7200 12M 24M A8M 96M 3.2H 6.4H 12.8H 25.6H 14 3 1.0 9200 15.3M 30.7M 61.3M 2.0H 4.1H 8.2H 16.4H 32.8H *To nearest 1/10 minute (M) or 1/10 hour (H), reel to reel ** 1. Low 2. Intermediate 3. Wideband DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS a. GENERAL - The operator controls and indicators are generally located in the following three areas; (1) AC to DC power supply control panel (optional) at the base of the unit, (2) tape transport control panel, at the right front of the unit, and (3) R/R signal boards. Optional or additional features mayor may not require additional operator controls or indicators. Refer to the optional items section, in the maintenance section, to ascertain this. When the calibration/monitor meter panel (optional) is supplied, it will normally be located above the tfansport in a separate enclosure. The calibration/monitor meter panel contains db meters which are con- • 1 BULLETIN f-JO. 3601,"1 nected to the monitor outputs of the record and reproduce chassis. Normally a db meter is suppl ied for eaCh channel of signal electronics and the voice channel (if supplied). Switches on the front panel provide for selection between FM RECORD, DIRECT RECORD, and REPRODUCE. Each db meter, for record, is calibrated to read 0 db for the optimum direct record level (.1 Vrms at REC LEV testpoint) and the proper FM deviation level (±40% or ±3001o). During reproduce the db meters are calibrated to read 0 db for 1 Vrms. b. AC to DC POWER SUPPLY (OPTIONAL) POWER on-off toggle switch (up-on, down-off) Controls the application of AC power to the power supply unit, thus controlling the +28 Vdc output of the supply. 28 VOLT INDICATE LAMP Indicates, when lit, +28 Vdc is present at the power supply output. 28 VOLT RESET SWITCH Provides for reestablishing +28 Vdc after an overload is sensed and the 28 VOLT INDICATE is not lit. c. TAPE TRANSPORT TAPE indicator lamp .I'''.''''}'!wa y s present but functional 't5nly with the tape sync option) Indicates, when lit, tape speed is being controlled by a tape reference signal recorded on tape (optional feature). SYNC indicator lamp When individually lit, indicates tape speed is being controlled by tachometer reference signal. Should always be lit when the TAPE indicator lamp is lit. POWE R indicating pushbutton Controls the application of primary power to the recorder/reproducer. When lit, 24-30 Vdc is applied to all primary power circuits. SHUTTLE indicating switch (optional) Used to activate the shuttle control circuitry. E.O.T. (end-of-tape sense) Used to activate the end-of-tape sense circuitry. FWD (forward) indicating pushbutton Initiates forward tape motion. (reels turning clockwise). Indicates forward tape motion when fit. QANGE switch (de to dcconve~er, left side of unit - up is 28 Vdc down IS 24 Vdc). Selects between accepting 28 V dc power input and 24 Vdcpower input. =:: BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 REV (reverse) indicating pushbutton Initiates reverse tape motion (reels turning counterclockwise). Indicates reverse tape motion when lit. FASTJ. indicating pushbutton initiates the fast mode after tape direction has been established. Indicates, when lit, tape is moving at the fast speed (faster than 120 ips). RECORD indicating pushbutton Initiates the record electronics when depressed and tape is moving at the selected speed. Indicates, when Iit, power is supplied to the record electronics. STOP indicating pushbutton Stops tape motion when. depressed or applies reset power to the reel drive servos. Indicates machine is ready for operation when lit. SQUELCH selector switch (from the rear of the unit, switch position to the left squelch is disabled and to the right is squelch active). Provides for disabling the servo squelch feature utilized by the FM reproduce boards. ~. ~ o TAPE SPEED SELECTOR [JQ BB BB Figure 1. Transport Control Panel 3 =============: ~Iii~~ C=! ==::JI BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 Tape Speed Selector Establ ishes the tape movement speed. DENSITY switch (transport connector panel)., Selects between HIGH or LOW density determining the frequency of the reference signal to be recorded on tape (optional tape sync). TAPE FOOTAGE COUNTER indicator Indicates the number of feet passing the capstan. d. RECORD/REPRODUCE SIGNAL CHASSIS AND SIGNAL BOARDS 1. CHASSIS (contains no operator controls) 2. DIRECT R/R BOARDS (front panel unless otherwise stated) (a) DIRECT RECORD BOARD (part no. 857033) RANGE switch Selects between two standard input level ranges (0.2 to 1.5 Vrms and 1.5 to 10 Vrms). - REC ADJ control Adjusts the input signal to the board providing the capability of obtaining the direct normal record level (optimum head current) at R EC LEV testpoint . ~switch Selects between two standard input impedance ranges (LO-75 ohms, HI 10K ohms). (b) DIRECT REPRODUCE BOARD (part no. 857218) OUTPUT LEVEL control Adjusts the output reproduce signal level from the board. (c) DIRECT REPRODUCE BOARD (part no. 836083, amp and phase equalization) OUT ADJ control Adjusts the output reproduce signal level from the board. 4 BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 3. BIAS OSCILLATOR BOARD (front panel) Interrupts the bias signal passing to any 01 all record electronics (including voice). BIAS OfF switch 4. FM R/R BOARDS (front panel unless otherwise stated) (a) FM RECORD BOARD (part no. 835326) ZERO control Adjusts the carrier frequency generated by the veo. RANGE switch Selects between two input level ranges {0.6 to 2.5 V peak and 2.5 to 12.5V peak} and the test position (shorted input). IN ADJ control Adjusts the input signal level to the board, providing the capability of obtaining the proper percent deviation (±400k or ±30%) from the carrier frequency. ~ Selects between two standard input impedance ranges (LO-75 ohms, HI-20K ohms). switcb (b) FM RECORD BOARD (part no. 836161) RANGE switch Selects between two input levels ranges (0.2-1.5Vrms and 1.5-10 Vrms) and the test position (shorted input). IN ADJ control Adjusts the input signal level to the board, providing the capability of obtaining the proper percent deviation (±40% or ±30%) from the carrier frequency. CF (carrier frequency) control Adjusts the corrier frequency geo- . erated by the VeQ, RE-REC (re-record) switch (optional) Provides-selection for type of signal to be recorded. ON provides capability of recording a modulated carrier signal reproduced from" another F M track. 5 BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 (FM reproduce board). OFF provides capability of recording a standard ac or de signal. (c) FM REPRODUCE BOARD (part no. 857215) • OUT LEV control Adjusts the output reproduce signal level from the board. (d) FM REPRODUCE BOARD (part no. 836154) OUT LEV control' Adjusts the output reproduce signal level from the board. RE REC (re-record) switch (optional) Provides selection of signa! form at the board output. ON provides a modulated carrier at the board out-. put (BNC) for re-recording purposes on another FM channel. OFF provides the standard output of a dec tected and filtered signal. SQUELCH indicator Indicates, when lit, the board output is squelched (output signal is not present) by lack of proper servo contro! speed or possibly lack of carrier. ZERO control (on filter unit) Adjusts the board output for 0 Vdc with onlv carrier input (no modulated carrier input). 5. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) VVRITE/READ BOARDS (front oanel unless otherwise stated) (a) PCM WRITE BOARD (part no. 835982) BAL control Adjusts the input to accept positive or negative theshold levels (de offsets of input data). DE LAY control Adjusts a delay to compensate for small "gap scatter" and "fixed skew" errors associated with the write head gaps and al ignment. R E CO R D control Adjusts the record current applied to the record head to obtain optimum record level. «l rr ITr0J "1\ [i' r' ~m!I~I)));7)tr))~)~J cc::::=.=======:=:=::====:::::J:J '-lllu(ill[ill ,)J 0, 6 CL=_===========:=_=_======::=:oJ BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 (b) PCM READ BOARD (part no. 835984) GAIN control Adjusts the input level to the board from the reproduce head and preampl ifiers. TR IG control Adjusts the plus and minus firing voltage levels of the Schmitt trigger, for symmetry. . DE LAY control Adjusts the static skew and gap scatter compensation delay. OUT control Adjusts the output level from the board. (e) PCM CLOCK BOARD (part no. 835988) GATE WIDTH control Adjusts the length of the system "SKEW GATE" pulse, (virtual clock). OUTPUT control Adjusts the clock board output amplitude. (d) ENCODER BOARD (high density, part no. 836277) DATA ADJUST Adjusts the input data reference level for the input trigger circu it. CLOCK ADJ UST Adjusts the input clock reference level for the input trigger circuit. RECORD LEVEL ADJUST Adjusts the record current applied to the record head to obtain optimum record level. 6. VOICE/EDGE AlB RECORD/REPRODUCE BOARDS (front panel unless otherwise stated;. (a) VOICE RECORD BOARD (part no. 856477) ON/OFF microphone switch Activates record board and appl ies bia!: signal (annotate feature). VOLUME microphone control Adjusts output signal level of microphone. VOICE/TIMING switch (side of board) Selects between either voice record (annotate feature) or timing record (no annotate feature, power on continuously with RECORD lit). 7 C::::::===============:::::J:=J ~i~~~~~ BULLETIN NO. 3601-" A/B TRACK SELECTION switch (side of board) Selects which track, A or B, voice is recorded on. (b) EDGE A/B RECORD BOARD (part no. 835661) ON/OFF microphone switch Activates record board and appl ies bias signal (annotate feature). VOLUME microphone control Adjusts output signal level of microphone. A/B TRACK SELECTION switch Selects either A-time code, B-voice, or A-voice, B-time code. TIME CODE REC ADJ Adjusts the input signal level to the time code record circuitry on the edge AlB record board. (e) VOICE/EDGE AlB REPRODUCE BOARD (part no. 856772) VO LUME control (front panel) Adjusts the output reproduce signal level from the board. VOLUME CONTROL (speaker amp enclosure) Adjusts the signal level to the speaker amp input. TAPE THREADING The following procedures, with fjgure 2, provide the necessary information to correctly thread the recorder/reproducer, in the reel to reel fashion. Refer to the loop adapter bulletin, maintenance section, for threading diagram and instructions concerning the optional loop adapter. - Step 1. With the power indicating lamp off (power supply unit) or the POWER indicating pushbutton off (control pane!), align all the guiding pins on the dual hub. This action will lock the two hubs so that they will not turn independently. Step 2. By aligning the slots ona full reel of tape with the guiding pinson the hub, place the full reel onto the inner hub. =rhe tape should feed off when the reel turns clockwise (in the forward mode). \/I.nlile holding the reel with one hand, turn the inner hub 20°clockwise until the hub locks the reel into position. Step 3. Step 4. To release the hubs from each other, turn the locking pin (the pin in the 1-1/4 inch slot) counterclockwise while holding the squared guiding pin which is located directly behind the locking pin. ~'I~~lC~=3==========~d8CI==============~ BULLETIN NO 3601-1 Step 5. Place an empty reel onto the outer hub and lock it in place by holding the reel and turning the hub 20°clockwise until secured. Step 6. Refer to the tape threading diagram and thread the tape over guide #1 and below the lower tape tension arm. Step 7. Continue with the tape over the right side of the footage counter and the tape sense post, over the right translation post, and under the left translation post. Step 8. Thread the tape up (to the left of guide #2) between the capstan and the right pinch roller, over the record head and around the inertia dampening roller, then down past the reproduce heads, between the capstan and left pinch roller, and to the right of guide #3. Step 9. Continue with the tape below the upper tape tension arm, over guide #4, and onto the empty outer ree: for several tu ms. Step 10. Inspect the entire tape path to ensure that the tape is threaded and aligned correctly. - - - - - . - - - - INERTIA LEFT PINCH ROLLER ---"-- GUIDE" 3 OM/Pf.NING POLLER - - - RiGHT PINCH ROLLER ----_+{ r - - - - RIGHT TRANSLATION POS: OXIDE 510£ TAPE SENSING POST GUIDE .# 4 uppeR TAPE TENSION ARM "" FOOTAGE COUNTER . TAPE ON OUTER REEL _ " TAPE ON INNER REEl- --_......\ , _.. _-_. OXIDE SIDE \ I I t - - lO'wER TAPE ' - "_ _;;;/ Figure 2. Tape Threading Diagram (reel to reel) TENS!O~ AR ... BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 OPERATING PROCEDURES a. POWER APPLICATION - Primary dc power (24-30 Vdc} is applied to the transport by depressing the POWE R pushbutton switch (alternate switch) on the transport control panel. If the optional AC to DC power supply is being used ensure the POWER toggle switch is placed to the ON position. CAUTiON Ensure that proper power connections are made to the recorder/reproducer as explained in the Installation Bulletin. If an optional power supply is being used, refer to the applicable bulletin for information. If remote control is not-being used, the remote connector MUST be inserted into the REMOTE jack on the Power Connector Panel. Always make certain the dc to dc converter's (left side of recorder/reploducer) range switch is positioned properly (24 Vdc or 28 Vdc) for the input dc voltage to the system. CAUTION Always remove POWER prior to switching input voltage ranges with the de to de converter range switch. b. TAPE TRANSPORT - The following information is provided to properly move tape in the standard modes. For optional or special modes (shuttle, tape sync, etc) refer to later paragraphs and possibly bul''tins in the maintenance section. Step 1. After initial application of power, or if a condition of loose tape exists, the STOP lamp will not be lit, in which case STOP should be depressed and held in untii it is lit. This action applies reset power to the reel drive servos and prepares the tape path for correct operation. With an extreme slack tape condition the STOP mode button should be pulsed (pressed numerous times in succession) to prevent tape breakage or misaligned tape while feeding to the reel. NOTE After application of power, a 20 second warm-up period (with STOP lamp lit) is suggested for stablization of the tape control logic. Step 2. 'IMlenever the POWER lamp is lit, power is applied to the reproduce electronics. Therefore, it isonly necessary to depress FORWARD or REVERSE (allow a few seconds to obtain a phase lock speed control condition to deactivate the F M squelch circuit) to reproduce data at the selected speed. See additional reproduce operating instructions in the Reproduce bulletins, maintenance section. Step 3. To record information, ensure STOP is lit and depress the RECORD and either FORWARD or REVERSE push buttons. The FORWARD or REVERSE pushbutton must be released before the RECORD pushbutton is released. See additional record operating instructions in the Record bulletins, maintenance section. BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 NOTE The machine is recording only when the RECORD .indicator is lit. Step 4. To move tape in the FAST mode, depress the direction pushbutton (FORWARD or REVERSE) and then depress the FAST pushbutton. To enter the FAST mode in the same direction as tape is moving, simply push FAST. Step 5. Vllhen in the FAST mode, and the operator wishes to enter the RECORD or REPRODUCE mode, simply push FORWARD or REVERSE as applicable (RECORD must also be depressed for recording). Step 6. To stop all tape motion, depress STQP. It is not necessary to depress STOP when switching from one mode to another. c. RECORDING - Recording information onto magnetic tape for storage may be performed in either direction at any available tape speed. Refer to the general information bulletin for record specification5. In order to record the following conditions must be met: ( 1) Tape must be threaded in accordance with the tape threading procedures (previous paragraph); (2) Proper signal electronics must be installed into the track numbers desired for use; (3) Proper input signal connections must be made in accordance with the installation section; and (4) Record electronics must be adjusted properly for the signal to be recorded. Refer to the maintenance section bulletins for more detail board calibration. NOTE If tape synchronous speed control is to be used during the reproduction of tapes being recorded, refer to the applicable paragraphs, found in later portions of this section, before attempting to record. "' CAUTION TAKE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID MAGNETIZING THE HEADS: (1) REMOVE OR REPLACE SIGNAL BOARDS ONLY 'MiEN POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED. (2) DO NOT MAKE OR BREAK SIGNAL INPUT OR RECORD HEAD LEAD CONNECTIONS WITH RECORD LAMP LIT; AND (3) DO NOT TEST CONTINUITY OF THE HEADS WITH AN OHMMETER OR ANY SIMILAR TESTER. 1. CHASSIS Step 1. Refer to the Record Chassis bulletin, in the maintenance section, typical board placement versus head channel. 2. 01 RECT RECORD Step 1. c Check that STOP is lit and depress RECORD. 11 BULLET!N NO. 3601-1 Step 2. If the Calibration/Monitor Meter panel (optional) is supplied set the proper channel selection switch to the DIRECT RECORD position and adjust the REC ADJ control, of the applicable direct record board, for a 0 db re?ding on the associated db meter. The calibration/monitor meter is calibrated to indicate 0 db for the direct normal record level (optimum). Step 3. If the Calibration/Monitor Meter option is not supplied, connect an AC VTVM between the red test point, R E C LEV, and the black testpoint, G R D, on the applicable direct record board. Adjust the R E C ADJ control for a .1 Vrms reading on the VTVM, producing the direct normal record level. Step 4. Select the desired tape speed. Step 5. Depress the desired direction pushbutton, FWD or REV, and REC, releasing the FWD or REV pushbutton before R EC. Ensure both lamps are lit. 3. FM RECORD Step 1. W1en the optional FM density change kit is supplied, refer to information in the optional items section. Step 2. Check that STOP is lit and depress RECORD. Step 3. If the Calibration/Monitor Meter panel (optional) is supplied set the proper channel selection switch to the FM R ECO R 0 position and adjust the IN ADJ control, of the applicable FM record board, for a 0 db reading on the associated db meter. The calibration/monitor meter is calibrated to indicate 0 db for the proper percent -deviation. Step 4. If the Calibration/Monitor Meter option is not supplied connect an AC VTVM between the red testpoint, IN and the black testpoint, GRD, on the applicable FM record board. Adjust the IN ADJ control for a Vrms reading corresponding to the value listed on the head char• acteristic sheet at the front of this manual. . - Step 5. Select the desired tape speed. Step 6. Depress the desired direction pushbutton FWD or REV, and REC, releasing the FWD or REV pushbutton before R EC. Ensure both lamps are lit. Step 7. If re-record is supplied (not applicable on early models) and to be used, set -the re-record switch to the ON position and ensure the pre-modulated signal is applied to the board input. d. REPRODUCING - Fleproducing information previously recorded on magnetic tape may be performed in either direction at any available tape speed. Refer to the general information bulletin for reproduce specifications. In order to reproduce information the following conditions must be met: (1) The proper tape (containing recorded information) must be threaded in accordance with the tape threading procedures (previous paragraph prior to operating procedures); (2) Proper signal electronics must be installed into the track numbers for use (ensure the proper reproduce board complement of the type signal ~. : corded is used); and (3) Proper output signal connections must be made in accordance with the installa\ji,:m section. Refer to the maintenance section for detail board calibration. 12 c: BULLETIN NO. 3601-'1 NOTE If tape synchrono'ls speed control is to be used during reproduction of recorded tapes, refer to the applicable paragraphs found in later portions of this section before attempting to reproduce, 1. CHASSIS Step 1. Wlen the optional F M density change kit is suppl ied, refer to information in the optional items section. Step 2· The squelch circuit must be functioning properly as determined by the speed control system adjustment, Particular emphasis is placed on the 45° phase angle. This must be exactly 4!3° to ensure proper operation of the squelch circuit (output reproduce signal shorted to ground during STOP, slewing speeds, or any period when the speed is not correct). Later models may contain a squelch selector switch (located on the capstan board). Step 3. Refer to the Reproduce Chassis bulletin, in the maintenance section, for standard single chassis board placement versus head channel and/or double chassis board placement versu~ head channel. 2. DIRECT REPRODUCE (7 speeds) Step 1. Remove all power and remove the reproduce board(s} intended for use. Step 2. Check the board{s) for correct speed equalizers as well as their correct location on the board. Refer to the maintenance section for board component location and information concerning equ a I izers. Step 3. Re-install the boards properly, depress POWER and STOP, and select the desired tape speed (keeping in mind the speed equalizers available). Step 4. If the Calibration/Monitor Meter panel (optional) is supplied set the proper channel selection switch to the reproduce position. The Calibration/Monitor Meter is calibrated to indicate 0 db with the presence of 1 Vrms. Step 5. Depress FWD or REV as desired and adjust the applicable reproduce board OUTPUT LEVEL for the desired output. Step 6. If the optional Calibration/Monitor Meter panel is not supplied, connect an AC VTVM to the proper output connector, or board output testpoint if applicable, and adjust the OUTPUT LEVEL as desired. 3. FM REPRODUCE (3speeds) Step 1. Remove ali power and remove the reproduce board(s) intended for use. BULLETIN NO. 3601-,,1 i Step 2. Check the board(s) for correct speed equalizers, timing capacitors, and filters, as well as their correct locations. Check also the speed matrix connections on the board. Refer to the main~enance section for board component locations, matrix connections, and information concerning equalizers, timing capacitors, and filters. Step 3. Re-fnstall the boards properly, depress POWER and STOP and select the desired tape speed (keeping in mind the speed equalizers, timing capacitors, and filters available). Step 4. If the Calibration/Monitor Meter panel (optional) is supplied set the proper channel selection switch to the reproduce position. The calibration/monitor meter is calibrated to indicate 0 db with the presence of l Vrms. Step 5. If the optional Calibration/Monitor Meter panel is not supplied, connect an AC VTVM to the proper output connector, or output testpoint if applicable, and adjust the OUT LEVE Las desired. 4. FM 4-7 SPEED EXPANDER (4 speeds) - This board is used in conjunction with FM reproduce (3 speed) board to provide more than three FM reproduce speeds. The only operator requirement is the proper placement of this board with the associated FM reproduce board. The FM reproduce board must be placed in the odd numbered chassis positions (odd board chassis positions) and the expander in the next even numbered chassis position (even board chassis position). The equalizers, timing capacitors, and filters must also be checked to ensure those speed dependent components are available for those speeds desired . .l1efer to the maintenance section for component locations and information concerning filters, equalizers, bing capacitors, and other speed dependent components. e. TAPE SYNCHRONOUS SPEED CONTROL (optional) - In order to utilize the optional tape sync method of speed control the reference signal must be recorded on an even numbered direct or FM re-record record data track (tracks 6 or 8 are suggested for 1 inch and 2 or 4 for 1/2 inch) at the same time of normal recording. The following procedures are to be followed in utilizing the tape sync option (tape sync board is optional). Refer to the maintenance paragraphs and maintenance section for tape sync board setup and calibration. 1. REFERENCE RECORDING Step 1. Ensure a BNC to BNC cable is connected from the REF connector (Power and Control Panel) to the input BNC connector of the proper direct or FM re-record record channel (6 or 8 - 1 inch, 2 or 4 - 1/2 inch). Place a jumper board in the associated reproduce board position. Step 2. Place the reference density switch (Power and Control Panel) to the desired position (HI - 400 kHz, LO - 200kHz at 120 ips with submultiples at lower speeds). LO is the recommended position. Step 3. With tape threaded properly, apply POWER and depress STOP, RECORD, and FORWARD. Monitor the reproduced output (BNC connector) with an oscilloscope. 14 .========================:::J CI BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 Step 4. .. Adjust REC ADJ on the direct record board or IN ADJ on the FM record board (note when using the F M record board for this feature the re-record switch must be ON, up position) for a maximum amplitude signal on the oscilloscope. Note the Vrms reading between direct record board testpoints REC LEV, TP 2, (hi) and GROt TP 1, (Io), or FM record board testpoints CAR, TP8, (hi) and GND, TP2 (10). Record this value for future reference, if desired . 2. REFERENCE REPRODUCING Step 1. Ensure a B NC to BNC cable is connected from the reference channel output to the TAPE connector (Power and Control Panel). Step 2. Place a jumper board in the proper reproduce chassis board position corresponding to the reference record channel. Step 3. Proceed wi1h normal reproduce procedures ensuring the TAPE and SYNC lamps are lit. f. TAPE SENSING Step 1. Place the EOT switch, on the Power Panet to the ON position. If the optionarphoto end-oftape feature is supplied, no further preparation is required to sense the end of tape. Step 2. For forward motion tape sensing, place a piece of metallic marker on the plastic side of the recording tape, centered on a line parallel to and 1/8 inch from the tape deck edge of the tape. NOTE Use W. H. Brady Co., Stock No. OCl-1 (Sangamo Part No. 846462). Step 3. For reverse motion tape sensing, place a piece of metallic marker on the plastic side of the recording tape, centered on a line parallel to and 3/8 inch from the tape deck edge of the tape. 6. REMOTE CONTROL (OPTIONAL) - When the Remote Control Panel is available, tape movement can be controlled remotely. If the operator desires to utilize remote control of the equipment, the same operational procedures described in the preceding paragraphs should be followed. The Remote Control Panel does not provide for remote power application. The POWE R lamp on the Remote Panel is an indicator only. The Remote Control Panel may be a hand held mode! or a chassis mounted-mode. The chassis mounted model mayor may not incorporate the voice speaker enclosure. To connect the Remote Control Panel, remove the remote-shot1ing-plug from the REMOTE jack on the Power Connector Panel and insert the remote control panel plug. NOTE If remote control is not being used, the remote-shorting-plug MUST be inserted into the REMOTE jack. The recorder/reproducer may be controlled remotely by external equipment other than the Sangamo Remote Control Panel. This is accomplished by providing proper contact closures to the transport logic. The remote-shorting-plug may be utilized for this purpose. Before beginning any remote set up of this nature, it is absolutely essential to acquire a thorough knowledge of the system logic. BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 NOTE Various options are listed and described in the Optional Items section, maintenance section, of this manual. OPERATOR'S THEORY a. GENERAL - This recorder/reproducer consists of two major assemblies (tape transport and signal electronics) which constitute a servo speed control system with signal electronics for handling the desired input and output data. Exact speed is maintained by continually comparing a signal derived from the rotational speed of the capstan with a known crystal oscillator reference. The resultant difference is converted to a proportional dc error signal that adds to or subtracts from the voltage supplied to the capstan motor, thus speeding up or slowing down the recorder/reproducer. For complete theory of any assembly, circuit board, etc., refer to the maintenance section of this manual. b. POWER - The transport requires 24 - 30 Vdc primary power for proper operation. A DC to DC converter assembly, converts the primary power, to +12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, and +5 Vdc required by the mode control, speed control, reel drive, signal electronics, and other circuits. The optional AC to DC power supply unit is capable of supplying 28 Vdc from a AC input of approxirnately 115/230 Vac at 47 to 440 Hz. c. TAPE TRANSPORT 1. GENERAL - The tape transport panel is the heart of the recorder/reproducer. AI! of the other assemblies are designed around this panel. The purpose of the transport panel is to move magnetic recording tape at an accurate desired speed. Signals to and from the tape via the record and reproduce heads, are routed from the transport panel to the signal bay for necessary amplification, modulation, or demodulation. 2. MODE CONTROL - The major operating modes of the recorder/reproducer may consist of RECORD-FORWARD, RECORD-REVERSE, FORWARD (reproduce) REVERSE (reproduce), FAST FORWARD, and FAST-REVERSE. Other portions of the control panel operate STOP, EOTS (end-of-tape sense), tape speed and particular optional items. The mode control circuits (primarily the logic board), when properly initiated by the operator control panel, control all modes of the recorder/reproducer. 3. SPEED CONTROL - The speed control speed system and all tape movement is centered around the capstan drive system. The capstan drive is a low mass, high torque, single unit dc motor with integral capstan which eliminates the need for belts, pulleys, or flywheels. The capstan controls the tape speed for all modes of operation. The magnetic tape is "pu lied" across the record and reproduce heads by pinching the tape between the rotating capstan and a pinch roller. To accurately control the tape travel, the rotational speed of the capstan must be carefully controlled. This is accomplished by one of the two following methods of servo speed !Control. BULLETIN NO. 361]1-1 T E N S I 0REEL 5 [ ) N- - - r [ F E L D R I V E SENSE CI RCUITS UI/PUT SIGNALS _ _ o_ _ --.J - - OJ RECORD elECTRONICS SPEED LINES TO RECORD ELECTRONICS SPEED CON mOL CiRCUlTS SQUElCH AND SPE£DUNN TO REPRODUCE: ELECTRONICS ro- RECORD ELECTRONICS MODE CONTROL OPERATOR ~~--------------------~MMANDS C!AClIll"S - _ODUCE ELI'Cn'ONles END-OF· TAPE SENSE CIRCUITS OUTPUT SJ!CHAlS -REGULATED +2BVdc TO TRANSPORT SYSTEM AC TO OCroW'ER StJI'1'lY N;INPUT REEL DRIVeSENSE Figure 3. System Functional Block Diagram c==-==================~===-=_~~ CIRCUITS BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 (a) CAPSTAN SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL - The primary method of controlling tape speed is called CAPSTAN SYNCH RONOUS control. During Capstan Synchronous control, the internally generated crystal oscillator reference signal is compared against a tachometer signal (from the capstan motor). Because the tachometer siqnal is developed within the capstan motor, the frequency of the tachometer signal is proportional to the rotational speed of the capstan. Any difference in frequency or phase between the crystal oscillator reference and the tachometer signal is converted into an error difference signal to regulate the capstan motor speed. During Capstan Sync the SYNC lamp on the operator's control panel should be lit. (b) TAPE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (OPTIONAL) - In order to achieve greater speed control accuracy from a recorded tape, a second method, called TAPE SYNCHRONOUS control, is available as an option. To use this method, a reference signal from a crystal oscillator is recorded on tape during the record process. During reproduce, this reference signal replaces the tachometer signal and is compared with the reference frequency of the crystal oscillator. Any difference in frequency or phase is converted into an error difference signal to increase of decrease the tape speed. I f the voltage level of the reproduced reference signal is insufficient or if the signal is lost due to tape dropouts, the recorder/reproducer will instanteously revert to Capstan Synchronous control. During tape sync the TAPE and SYNC lamps on the operator's control panel should be lit. NOTE The Tape Sync option consists of a small printed circuit board which plugs onto the capstan board. During the record time, the Capstan Synchronous method is used to control tape speed. The tape speed control circuits contain eight basic functional divisions as listed below with the circuit board or subassembly containing each. Refer to figure 4. 1. Reference Oscillator Circuits - Capstan Board 2. Tachometer (Tach) Signal Circuits - Capstan Board 3. Tape Signal Circuits (optional) - Tape Sync Board and Capstan Board 4. Frequency Preparation Circuits - Capstan Board 5. Phase Comparison Circuits - Capstan Board 6. Frequency Comparison - Capstan Board 7. Acceleration and Amplification Circuits - Capstan Board and Capstan Power Amplifier 8. Capstan Motor Circuits - Capstan Board and Capstan Power Amplifier 4. REEL DRIVE - This recorder/reproducer's coxial reel drive system incorporates dual control for inner and outer hub. Each hub is a part of a complete reel drive servo system including a dc motor driven "lindle, a tape tension sensing arm with a photocell assembly, a dc servo amplifier located ~n the reel drive ~ard, and a power ampl ifier. - BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 Also located on the reel drive board are special features including a dynamic brake in event of power failure, an acceleration control (routed to the speed control system) for forward and reverse, and an acceleration program power mode to stop mode. FRfO REF SIGNA FROM TAPE J l "l TAPO CII-TS '''i'AL (lPJ1.9NA cnr..~p Cl<.l~ REEl DRIVE ACel. C(lNTHOL ACeL A~~O AMP CK1S TAPE SYNC 1 CAPSTAN SYNC TACl-lo.:\,1ETEI-l SIGNAL Figure 4. Speed Control System Basic Block Diagram The entire system is classified single ended since each reel drive hub can be driven in one direction only. In the FO RWAR D mode the outer reel is driven clockwise while the inner reel free wheels (actually there is a slight voltage applied to the inner reel to provide proper tension). In the REVE RSE mode the inner reel is driven counterclockwise while the outer reel free wheels (with some drag). d. SIGNAL ELECTRONICS 1~ CHASSIS - Each chassis, record and reproduce, provide sufficient space and electrical connections to contain and operate the desired record boards and reproduce boards. ±l2 Vdc and +5 Vdc is supplied to each chassis from the DC to DC converter. These voltages are supplied to each board jack to power each board. Proper connections are provided for routing the input signals (record chassis) to the record head. The reproduced signals are routed from the reproduce head and preamps to the reproduce board and the output of the machine. Other signals involved in the chassis are the bias oscillator signal (record.only) and the speed lines for record (carrier freq/speed) and reproduce (equalization and filterino/speed) electronics. 2. RECORD ELECTRONICS - All record electronics are utilized to properly prepare the input signal" for recording on the magnetic recording tape.· Preparation primarily consists of supplying tht: proper record current to the record head to ensure optimum recording. Varied preparation is dependent on the type of recording, (direct, FM, dig"ital, etc). All speed dependent preparation is automatic. Due to the many types of recording, and types of boards to provide recording, a complete theory is located in the proper record board bulletin in the maintenance section of this manual. 19 BULLETIN NO. 3601),- r 3. REPRODUCE ELECTRONICS - All reproduce electronics are utilized for preparation of the re~oduced signal as it passes from the reproduce head and preamplifiers. Preparation involves amplification, speed equalization, filtering and possibly others such as demodulation, etc; dependent on the type of recording. All speed dependent preparation (filtering, equalization, etc.) is automatically selected with the selection of tape.speed. Due to the many types of reproducing, and the types of reproduce boards, a complete theory is located in the proper reproduce board bulletin in the maintenance section of this manual. OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE a. GENERAL - Operator's maintenance provides inspection techniques, preventative maintenance procedures, tape splicing procedures, and checks and adjustments concerning power, tape transport, and signal electronics. Inspection is limited to visual checks and replacement of fuses with preventative maintenance pertaining to care of the tape path and R/R heads. Tape splicing procedures are provided to aid in splicing tape, should the need occur. The checks and adjustments are provided as an aid to ensuring or obtaining proper operation of the various areas of the recorder/reproducer's power tape transport, and signal electronics. Also provided are suggested areas (bulletins), in the maintenance section of this manual, to check if particular indicated results are not obtained properly in these procedures. These suggestions may always be supplemented with various other areas. The ones listed, intended to be the most probable, are in the tape transport bulletin unless otherwise specified. Refer to the transport wiring diagram (rear of tape transport bulletin) and transport overall schematic when referring to these procedures as well as the maintenance procedu res. Cb. INSPECTION Step 1. Check to see that no fuses are blown. Refer to Table 2 for transport fuse information and to the Power Supply bulletin for Power Supply (optional) Fuse information. CAUTION Never replace a fuse with one of a higher rating unless continued operation of the equipment is more important than probable damage. If a fuse burns out immediately after replacement, do not replace it a second time until the fault has been corrected. TABLE 2. FUSE FUNCTIONS* FUSE RATING FUNCTION LOCATION PART NO. F1 ABC-2~ Primary OC Power Back of Transport 859774-011 F2 F02B-3A Capstan Motor Power Back of Transport 821926 F3 AGX-8A OCto DC - ~~ Converter 20 Left Side of Transport 510279-004 - BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 NOTE Additional fusing is contained on the optional power supply unit; refer to the power supply bulletin. Additional fusing may be contained on some auxiliary signal chassis. Step 2. Check that all plug-in boards and modules are properly seated. Step 3. Check that all plugs and jacks are properly mated and well seated. Refer to the installation section for information concerning cabling connections. c. PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE 1. TAPE PATH - Periodic cleaning of the tape path is necessary to ensure optimum performance. The frequency of cleaning will depend upon the usage of the machine and the condition and type of tape used. Normally, the tiansport should be cleaned daily. Materials required for cleaning are lint free cotton swabs, a clean soft cloth, and isopropyl alcohol. Step 1. Deenerigze the machine and remove the tape from the tape transport. Step 2. Remove the head cover and the head shield. Step 3. Moisten a clean cloth with a small amount of isopropyl alcohol and wash all oxide deposit!> from the tension arm guide pins, all four tape path guide pins, the two pinch rollers, the inertia dampening roller, and the main capstan. CAUTION" Use only isopropyl alcohol to clean any of the tape path elements or the tape heads. The use of any other solvent may result in possible damage. Alcohol must be completely dry before tape is rethreaded. Step 4. Moisten a lint free cotton swab with a small amount of isopropyl alcohol and wash all oxide deposits from the heads. 2. RIR HEADS (a) MAGNETIZED HEADS - A magnetized head may cause degradation of the recorded signal and a reduction ofthe signal-te-noise ratio. The following precautions should be taken to avoid magnetizing the heads. Step 1. Remove oneplace plug-in boards only when POWER has been removed. Step 2. Do not make or break signal input or record head lead connections while in the RECORD mode. Step 3. Do not test continuity of the heads with an ohmmeter or any similar test instrument. (b) HEAD DEGAUSSING - The heads should be degaussed (demagnetized) when a 4 to 6 db drop in signal-to-noise ratio is detected or whenever the direct second harmonic distortion exceeds one-half per cent. The magnetic field of the head will cause partial erasure reducing the accuracy of the signal handling circu its. Head degaussing may be performed with any good tape head demagnetizer. C===============~J21C[==========~I~~~%~ ~([JJ~«ill@~tlllYJ BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 NOTE If the tips of the demagnetizer are not covered with a material to protect the head, cover these tips with a length of vinyl electrical tape. Step 1. Connect the demagentizer to its proper power source. Step 2 Place the demagnetizer tips across the head. Step 3. Slowly move the demagnetizer back and forth along the entire length of the head stacks at least fou r times. This operation should take about 30 seconds. Step 4. Slowly move the tips of the demagnetizer away from the head. Motion of the demagnetizer should be smooth and continuous (with no sudden movement). Step 5. Clean heads after degaussing. d. TAPE SPLICING - Proper tape splicing is essential to avoid loss of tape-to-head contact, tape skew, excessive head wear and other adverse effects. Wnen a tape splice becomes necessary, the following stepby-step procedu re is recommended. Step 1. /~ With a short piece of masking tape, secure one of the magnetic tapes (in the area to be spliced) to a flat surface (e.g. the rigid back of a paper tablet). The non-oxide (glossy) side. of the magnetic tape must be up. Step 2 Carefully lay the second piece of magnetic tape (in the area to be spliced) over the secured magnetic tape. Ensure that the edges are perfectly aligned and, using two more pieces of masking tape, secure this second magnetic tape over the first. Step 3. Using a sharp razor slice through both pieces of magnetic tape. The cut should be approximately 600 to the edge of the tape. Step 4. Peel back the undesired top tape and secure it under an edge of the masking tape. '-~ 22 J BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 Step 5. With the two pieces carefully butted together, place a piece of standard splicing tape across the cut. Using a fingernail. or any blunt instrument, ensure that the splicing tape makes 100% contact with the magnetic tape. Step 6. Carefully trim all splicing tape from the edges of the magnetic tape. A very slight concave cut into the magnetic tape is advisable when trimming. Figure 5. Tape Splicing Procedure e. CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS - The following checks and adjustments are provided as an aid in ensuring or obtaining proper operation of the various areas of the recorder/reproducer's power circuits, tape transport, and sigrfal electronics. Also provided are suggested areas, in the maintenance section, to check if particular indicated results are not obtained properly in these procedures. These suggestions may always be supplemented with various other areas. The or.es listed, intended to be the most probable, are in the tape transport bulletin unless otherwise specified. Refer to the transport wiring diagram (rear of tape transport bulletin in the maintenance section) and transport overall schematic when referring to these procedures as well as the maintenance procedures. 1. DC TRANSPORT POWER Step 1. Ensure_primary DC power is applied to the transport. If the optional power supply is supplied, ensure it is turned on, and the indicator lamp is lit. Depress and release the RESET switch . (precautionary measure). Step 2 Depress the POWER pushbutton switch on the control panel and ensure the lamp becomes lit. Step 3. With a DC voltmeter ensure +28 Vdc between TPl (hil, red testpoint, and TP2 (10), black testpoint, (both on the Power and Control Panel, right side of unit). Obse~ve correct polarity with the measuring instrument. Failure to obtain any or all of the above results suggests the following checks be rTlade. (1) Power supply bu lIetin concerning adjustments and/or troubleshooting, maintenance section of this manual. (2) Cabling connections per the installation bulletin. 2. DC TO DC CONVERTER POWER Step 1. With satisfactory results obtained in previous DC transport power checks, open the left side door panel of the unit and locate the dcto de converter assem_bly (tower portion of unit). 23 C==========11~_7~~ia~~ BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 Step 2. With POWE R on, use a dc voltmeter and ensure the presence of the following voltages between the indicated point and W3 (LO). Terminals W1, 2, and 3 are arranged in descending order, with W3 at the top. Indication Point W1 W2 + side of C3 . Voltage +12 Vdc ±.1 Vdc -12 Vdc ±.1 Vdc +5 Vdc ±.25 Vdc Failure to obtain any or all of the above results suggests the following checks be made. (1) DC to DC Converter Fuse F3 (2) DC to DC Converter bulletin concerning adjustments and/or troubleshooting, maintenance section. 3. MODE CONTROL CIRCUITS Step 1. Thread tape on the recorder/reproducer as explained in the tape threading procedure. Step 2. Ensure POWE R is on and depress STOP, ensuring its indicating lamp is lit. If extreme slack tape is present pulse the STOP pushbutton gently to tighten tape and lift the tension arms. Observe no tape movement with stop lamp lit._ Failure to obtain the above results suggests the following checks be made: (1) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section, concerning stop mode. (2). Reel drive system test, in the maintenance section, concerning microswitch, photocell, tension arms, etc. Step 3. Depress FWD, ensuring its indicating lamp is lit, and observe tape moving from the inner reel to the outer reel, with the capstan turning counterclockwise. Ensure both pinch rollers are energized. Failure to obtain the above results, with reverse tape movement (next step) possible, suggests the following checks be made: (1) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section, concerning forward mode, and the tape direction relay, K2. Failure to obtain tape movement in either direction at any speed suggests -the following checks be made, in sequence: (1) Fuse F2 (capstan motor fuse). (2) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section. (3) Capstan board circuits test, in the maintenance section. (4) Capstan Power Amplifier test, in the maintenance section. BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 Step 4. Depress REV, ensuring its indicating lamp is lit, and observe tape moving from the outer reel to the inner reel, with the capstan turning ciockw!se. Ensure both pinch rollers are energized. Failure to obtain the above results, with forward tape movement possible, suggests the following checks be mC}de. (1) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section, concerning reverse mode, and the tape direction, K2. Step 5. While moving tape in reverse (step 4), depress FAST, ensuring its indicator lamp is lit, and observe tape movement in the reverse direction at an accelerated rate (greater than 120 ips). Ensure the right pinch roller is energized .. Step 6. Depress FWD, with FAST lamp lit, and observe ta;Je movement in the forward direction at an accelerated rate. Ensure the left pinch roller is energized. Failure to obtain the above results suggests the following checks be made: (1) Capstan board circu its test, in the maintenance section. (2) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section. Step 1. Depress STOP and FWD and place the EDT switch to the I N position. Ensure markers are placed at the end and beginning of tape (standard E.O. T. feature). When the photo end-ot-tape sense is used, ensure the sensing lamps are lit on the transport. Continue to move tape in for· ward and observe tape movement stopping prior to tape becoming completely unwound from the reel (approximately 75 feet left). Step 2. Complete Step 1 in the reverse mode. Failure to obtain the preceeding results (Steps 1 and 2) suggests the following checks be made: (1) Logic board circuits test, in the maintenance section. (2) Photo End-of-Tape sense (optional) in optional items section. 3. SPEED CONTROL (a) REFERENCE FREQUENCY CHECKS Step 1. With POWEf{ removed place the capstan board on its extender (if the cabinet back is removed or cabinet removed, the board need not be extended). Connect a frequency counter between testpoints TP5 (hi) and TP4 (10). Refer to figure 6 for capstan bbard locations. Step 2. Apply POWE Fl, depress STOP and either FWD or REV, and ensure the presence of the fre· quencies (switching through the speeds) as listed in table 3 (TP5). Step 3. Move the frequency counter hi lead from TP5 to P2-16 (or at A7 pin 8). Ensure the proper frequencies at both high and low densities, .while switching through the speeds in either REV or FWD. ======= =============.. C( ======::J 25 ============:=::J rc.=====::=::=: BU LLETI N NO. 3601- NOTE If the preceding signals are monitored with an oscilloscope, they should be a symmetrical square wave with a logic "0" level of +0.3 Vdc ±O.3 Vdc and a logic "1" level of +3.7 Vdc ±1.3 Vdc. TABLE 3. REFERENCE FREQUENCIES SPEED (ips) TP5 120 60 30 15 7 1/2 33/4 1 7/8 if applicable 15/16 Step 4. - 100 kHz 100 kHz -50 kHz 25 kHz 12 kHz 6.25 kHz 3.125 kHz 1.562 kHz P2-16 (low density) 200 kHz 100 kHz 50 kHz 25 kHz 12.5 kHz 6.25 kHz 3.125 kHz 1.562 kHz P2-16 (high density) 400 kHz 200 kHz 100 kHz 50 kHz 25 kHz 12.5 kHz 6.25 kHz 3.125 kHz Depress FAST and connect a frequency counter between testpoints TP5 (hi) and TP4 (10). Ensure a 267 kHz signal. Failure to obtain any of the preceding results suggests the following checks be made: (1) Capstan board circuits test. in the maintenance section. (b) CAPSTAN TACHOMETER CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS Step 1. With the cabinet removed, rear access panel removed, or the capstan board on its extender, depress STOP ando-FWD, and set to the slowest tape speed. Step 2. Connect a frequency counter and oscilloscope to the capstan board between testpoints TP6 (hi) and TP4 (10). Step 3. Ensure the presence of a symmetrical square wave of approximately 3.125 kHz (1 7/8 ips) or 1.562 kHz (15/16 ips) and SYNC lamp lit. If the symmetrical square wave is not present, locate the adjustment potentiometer on the capstan motor and adjust for best possible symmetrical square wave. Step 4. Switch through all speeds and check frequency versus speed per previous table 3 (same frequencies as TP5). Note that 120 ips produces a frequency at TP6 one-half that at TP5. • failure to obtain the preceding results suggests the following checks be made: (1) Capstan board circuits test, in the maintenance section. 6~[v(n]((\\~\=, (fJ}/nllr;))j7i1J)M,: )[1) CI===================:=:JI ijl.!nillili[ill~J>IY 11-73 26 CI-================::::;::========:=:J BULLETIN NO. 3[;01-1 {c} CAPSTAN SERVO CONTROL CHECKS and ADJUSTMENTS NOTE Tape must be threaded properly to complete the following. Stefl 1; With the cabinet remoVf]d, rear access panel removed, or the capstan board on its extender, (left panel door removed), apply POWER and depress STOP and FWD. Set tape speed selector to the slowest speed. Step 2. Monitor testpoint TP9, refer to figure 6, with an oscilloscope (TP4 10) end ensure the lower portion of the trapezoidal vvaveform is at 0 Vdc level. Adjust R40, as necessary, to bring this leve! to 0 Vdc. Step 3. Monitor testpoint TP1O(TP4 !o) with an oscilloscope and ensure the lower portion of this trapezoidai wavdonn is at 0 Vdc !evel. Adjust R43, as necessary, to bring this leve! to 0 Vdc. Step 4. Monitor the capstan power amplifier heat sink (hi) with an oscilloscope (TP4 10) and ensure severe ripple (above 10 Vp-p) is not present. Adjust R45, as necessary, to minimize ripple as much as possible. Step 5. Monitor the time base error at testpoint TP7 (phase pattern) with an oscilloscope (TP4 10). Jitter as this point should be minute. Adjust R52 and possibly R50 as necessary to minimize jitter. After the tape sync mode (optional) is set up and adjusted (this consists of adjusting R52) R50 will require readjustment in the capstan sync mode. NOTE TP8 may also be used to monitor this measurement and make this adjustment. Step 6. Remove all POWER and connect an oscilloscope to capstan board P2-20 (hi) and TP4 (10). Step 7. Apply POWER and depress STOP, ensuring the presence of a logic 0 level (+0.3 Vdc ± 0.3 Vdc). Step 8. Depress FWD and ensure the logic 0 level changes to a logic 1 level with stable tape movement. This function, very pertinent to the speed control squelch output for the FM reproduce boards, is adjusted as follows: (a) With all POWER removed, locate PHASE LOCK adj., R94, on the capstan board (refer to figure 6) and turn completely CWo (b) Apply POWER and depress STOP and FWD. Turn PHASE LOCK adj., R94, CCW untii stable tape movement occurs, then turn slightly more CCW. Failure to obtain the preceding results suggests the following checks be made: c=: (1) Capstan board circuits test, in the maintenance section. (2) Capstan power amplifier circuits test, in the maintenance section. BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 SQUELCH DISABLE tv.: • L OC K r------I r-- R37 Al I TP18e IOSC) I I I ACTIVE PH~S@@J TP15 __ "" SQUELCH I I -c::::.r- y R35 T~6 TP5G P2 I /\, Tt~8~O !._ - - - - __I TP4 (GNDe 1- TP38 TRAPEZOID '--- ~VDC LEVEl) 1- @@ R40 R43 <:1P10 TP9~ .-P12 R45 Pl aTP11 RIPPLE@) TP17.e TP19 a @) , ... ,R50 ,'.., '. ~\CAP I :1 SYNC \"··"GAIN) l' \ ,.1I • TPl OTP2 m:J R52~ &viASTER & TAPE SYNC GAIN) a eTP13 TP14 CAPSTAN BOARD Figure 6. Capstan Board, Location of Testpoints and Adjustments (d) TAPE SYNC CONTROL CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS (OPTIONAL FEATURE) NOTE All preceding checks and adjustments in the speed control system must be performed prior to completing the following. Step 1. Record in forward the tape reference signal at the slowest available speed. Refer to the tape sync operating procedu res. Step 2. Rewind the tape and begin reproducing the reference signal recorded in step 1 (TAPE and SYNC lamps should be lit). Monitor at the same time, the capstan board testpoint TP7, with an oscilloscope, (TP410), and adjust R52 (tape sync gain adjust) for minimum jitter on the oscilloscope. R50 will now require readjustment in the capstan sync mode. ·Step 3, Record in forward, bias only on a section of tape (20-30 feet). 28 BULLET! N NO. 3601-1 Step 4. Rewind and depress FWD reproducing the bias and noise (bias and noise track jumpered to tape sync connector), ensuring the tape sync lamp does not lit. Failure to obtain the above results suggests the following checks be made: (1) Direct record board or FM re-record of FM record board (bulletin in rn<,linten5nce section) and aU tape sync cable connections including reproduce jumper board. (2) Tape sync board circuits test, in the maintenance section. 4. REEL DHIVE CIRCUITS (a) TENSION CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS Step 1. With POWER ON depress STOP and ensure the tension arms rise off their rnlcroswitches. Step 2. Depress FWD and after tension arms halJe stabilized ensure they are positioned (with tape moving) midway of their path of travel and no oscillations or jittering of either arm is present. Step 3. If the tension arms are notpositioned properly remove power and gain access to the reel drive board (Jeft side of unit). Apply power, depress STOP and FWD, and adjust each reel drive board balance control, R 17 (first potentiometer at top of board) outer reel and R 2~ast potentiometer bottom of board) inner reel, until its associated tension arm is positioned rnidway of its path of travel. Possibly adjust gain control R 23 (second potentiometer at top of board) outer reel, and R8 (second potentiometer from bottom of board) inner reel to reduce arm jitter. (b) PINCH ROLLER PRESSURE Step 1. Step 2. With all power off remove the rear access panel and locate and remove the tape direction relay, K2, and the reel drive board. o «UJ :r Fasten the tape tension arms away from their "at rest" position. Step 3. Thread a four foot section of recording tape, and attach the gram gauge"per figure 7. Step 4. Set the tape speed to the slowest speed available, apply POWER and depress STOP and FWD. a a: o u W II:: / Step 5. Hold capstan firm and pull down on gram gauge until tape begins to' slip. The gauge should read 900 to 1100 grams before the tape sl ips. Step 6. If the pressure seems to be incorrect, remove the top and-rear access panels, or the cabinet, and complete the following: GRAM GAUGE Figure 7. Pinch Roller Pressure Threading CH.1 BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 NOTE Relay K2 and the reel drive board must be rep/aced. a. Ensure tape is threaded correctly, set the tape speed selector to the 1 7/8 ips, and depress POWER and FWD . • b. Disable the right hand pinch roller (viewed from the front of the machine) by holding the lever assembly down, thus preventing contact to the capstan. c. Apply the force gauge (calibrated in pounds) to the top of the left hand pinch roller lever assembly. Apply pressure through the gauge until the tape ceases to move. The reading on the gauge at this point should be 10 Ibs. ±1 lb. If this reading is not present adjust the tension adjustment tap at the top of the lever, until this reading is obtained at the same moment the tape ceases to move. CCW decreases pressure and CW increases pressure. d. For adjustment to the right hand pinch roller move tape in the reverse (REV) direction, disable the left hand pinch roller and repeat c in a similar manner. TENSION ADJUSTMENT NUTS CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT NUTS CAPSTAN MOTOR Figure 8. Pinch Roller Pressure Adjustment Failure to obtain the above results and adjustment cannot be obtained, suggests the following checks be made: (1) Reel drive system test in the maintenance section. 30 BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 . 7. RECORDIREPRODUCE SIGNAL CHASSlS (a) RECORD CHASSIS Step 1. Ensure tape is threaded properly and several record boards are removed from the record chassis (every board may be removed if every board jack is to be checked). Step 2. Depress POWER, STOP and RECORD. Step 3. With a de voltmeter 10 connected to system ground (black testpoint, Power and Control Panel) ensure +12 V de at pin 23 and 0 V de at pins 11, 12, and 19 of an accessible record board jack in the record chassis. Refer to chassis wiring in the maintenance section. Remove meter high lead. NOTE +12 Vdc is applied to the board jacks after -12 Vdc, due to a time delay relay. Step 4. Reverse meter polarity and ensure -12 Vdc at pin 1 of the same board jack in the record chassis. Remove hi lead and correct meter polarity. Step 5. 'MIile changing speeds ensure +5 Vdc at the pins corresponding to the tape speed as listed in table 4. - . - TABLE 4. RECORD/REPRODUCE CHASSIS SPEED LINES Standard Non-Standard Speed 120 60 30 15 7 1/2 33/4 1 7/8 Step 6. Speed Record Chassis Reproduce Cha ssis Jack Pin Jack Pin 60 30 15 7 1/2 33/4 1 7/8 15/16 6 8 10 14 20 22 18 22 2 3 4 5 8 19 Remove all power and test connections and replace all boards removed. Failure to obtain the above results suggest the following checks be made: (1) Record Chassis bulletin in the maintenance section. (b) REPRODUCE CHASSIS Step 1. With POWE R off ensure several boards are removed from the reproduce chassis (every board may be removed if every board jack is to be checked). cc====· =:=:=========:=:==:::========'-=_=.=.====,_=:::::J::::J 31 c_ . __~_,,___ BULLETiN NO. 3601;-1 /. Step 2. Ensure tape is threaded property, apply POWER and depress STOP and FWD. Step 3. After machine has reached speed and the SYNC indicator is lit, connect a dc voltmeter LO to system ground (black. testpoint, Power and Control Panel). Step 4. Connect H I of voltmeter to pin 23 of a reproduce board jack, refer to the reproduce chassis w(ring in the maintenance section and ensure +12 Vdc. Connect HI to pins 11, 12, and 15, and ensure 0 Vdc. Remove HI lead connection. Step 5. Reverse meter polarity and connect to pin 1 of board jack, reproduce chassis. Ensure a -12 Vdc reading. Step 6. With tape moving, switch through each speed (allowing time for stabilization and SYNC lamp to lite) and ensure +5 Vdc at the pin associated with the corresponding speed as listed in table 4). Earlier systems may -utilize +12 Vdc speed lines. Refer to the reproduce board bulletins to determine switching voltage used. Step 7. With the R/R moving tape at the proper speed (sync lamp lit) always ensure pin 7, of all board jacks, is not grounded. Step 8. Remove all power and test equipment. Failure to obtain the above results suggests the following checks be made: (1) Reproduce Chassis bulletin in the maintenance section. 8. SI GNAL ELECTRONICS - Refer to the maintenance section for bulletins containing maintenance information for record/reproduc:esignal boards, bias oscillator, preamps, etc. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENTS - a. WOW AND FLUTTER - The following equipment is required to perform wow and flutter measurements. Micom 8300 Wow and Flutter Meter. One channel of properly calibrated direct record/reproduce electronics. 'Step 1. During the following steps use a new or nearly new, thoroughly degaussed, reel of high quality magnetic recording-tape. Also ensure the heads are 'degaussed and the tape path has been Cleaned. Step 2. Select a tape track near the center of tape and ensure that properly calibrated direct record/ reproduce electronics are placed in the corresponding slots of their associated chassis. Step 3. Calibrate the Micom wow and flutter meter as follows: .. Drift 1% 32 Cc==========================~ BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 Peak-to-Peak 1% PK Time . . 20 Meter Select Demod Drift BW . . 30 Hz Step 4. Connect the output of the wow and flutter meter to the input of the track being used, Record Connector Panel. Step 5. Connect the input of the wow and flutter meter to the reproduce output of the channel being used, Reproduce Connector Panel. Step 6. With the recorder/reproducer in the STOP mode, the Wow and Flutter meter should present a LOW level indication. If a NORM or HIGH level indication is present adjust the output level of the reproduce board until a LOW level indication appears. Step 7. With tape moving in the R ECO R D mode, at the desired tape speed, set the drift meter to zero. A NORM level indication should be present on the meter. If NORM is not present, adjust the output level of the reproduce board until a NORM level indication appears. Recheck drift meter to ensure it is set at zero. Step 8. Refer to the following tabular I isting for filter and carrier characteristics requ ired for the Wow and Flutter meter settings at the various speeds. TAPE SPEED (ips) 120 60 30 15 7 1/2 33/4 1 7/8 15/16 if applicable Step 9. FI LTER (kHz) CARRIER (kHz) 108 54 27 10 10 5 2.5 1.25 .625 13.5 6.75 3.375 1.688 .844 .312 .156 Read the wow and flutter value directly from the meter for each speed and compare to the following typical wow and flutter specifications. TAPE SPEED 120 60 30 15 71/2 33/4 1 7/8 15/16 • PEAK-TO-PEAK FLUTTER (tRIG) % 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.80 BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 b. DIRECT RECORD/REPRODUCE 1. FREQUENCY RESPONSE Step 1. Connect a sine wave generator to the input of the track to be tested. Step 2. Reoord a short section of tape with a 1000 cps sine wave at the optimum record level. Step 3. Record frequencies from 50 cps to at least 20010 beyond the upper band limit at the highest speed of the electronics, keeping the output level of the generator constant. Step 4. Play back the 1000 cps section of tape and set the output level at a db. Do not change this setting., Step 5. Measure the frequency response of the track by playing back the recorded frequencies and. referencing the output level to the setting of Step 4. 2. SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO Step 1. Record a section of tape with a 1000 cps sine wave at the highest speed of the available electronics, using optimum record current. Step 2. Depress STOP and remove the input signal. Step 3. Record a section of tape with BIAS only. Step 4. Play back the tape and measure the difference between the 1000 cps reproduce level and the no signal reproduce level. (This is measured easiest by setting the output level of the 1000 cps signal to a db). c. FM RECORD/REPRODUCE 1. FREQUENCY RESPONSE Step 1. Connect a function generator to the input o! the track to be tested. Step 2. Record a section of tape with a 100 cps sine wave at the highest speed of the available electronics at ±4001o FM Carrier deviation (low, intermediate, and W.B. I. only· W.B. "use ±3001o). Step 3. Record frequencies from (0.05 cps square wave) up to 100 cps sine wave at the highest speed of the available electronics. Maintain a constant ±4001o (or ±30%) deviation level. Step 4. Replace the function generator with the sine wave generator and record frequencies from 100 cps sine wave to beyond the upper limit of bandpass at the highest speed of the available electronics, maintaining a constant ±4001o (or ±300,-b) deviation level. Step 5. Reproduce the recorded tape at each of the speeds desired to be tested, setting the output reference (0 db) level during the pass of the initial 100 cps recording. Output should be within 3 db of the reference level at the upper band edge. 34 J BULLETIN NO. 3G01-1 2. SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO Step 1. Record a portion of tape at ±4001o (or ±30%) carrier deviation using a 100 cps sine wave at the highest speed of supplied electronics. Step 2. During the record process remove the input signal and continue to record the unmodulated FM carrier. Step 3. Play back and measure the difference between the 100 cps signal level and the no signal level with a VTVM. (This is measured easiest by setting the output level of the 100 cps signal to o db). Step 4. Repeat the above steps for the other speeds, recording and reproducing at each speed. • 3. DC LINEARITY Step 1. Connect a variable dc voltage supply across the input BNC on the Record Connector Panel of the FM track being tested. Connect the positive side of the voltage supply to the center of the BNC connector and the negative side to a convenient ground point. Step 2. Depres~ RECORD and allow 15 minutes for warm-up of the record electronics before pro- ceeding. Step 3. Connect a frequency counter across the VCO (yellow test point) and G ROUND (black test point) on the front of the FM record board. Step 4. Refer to the FM record bulletin for the proper center frequency and th_e correct deviation for the speed and bandwidth being used. Step 5. If necessary use the ZERO adjust (front of FM record board) to obtain the correct center frequency. Step 6. Adjust the variable power supply for 1 Vdc. Use the INPUT ADJUST (front of FM record board) to obtain the proper frequency deviation measured at the VCO testpoint. Step 7. Position the RANGE switch on the front of the FM record board to the TEST position. Step 8. Depress FORWARD and while monitoring the playback signal, adjust the FM reproduce board, DC LEVEL ADJ (side of board), for 0 Vdc. Step 9. Position the RANGE switch to the 2.5 V position. Step 10. Monitor the output signal and adjust the reproduce board, OUTPUT LEVE L (frent of board) for 1 volt DC. Step 11. Fill in the table below. Before changing input voltages position the RANG E switch ~o TEST and ensure the center frequency has not changed. Use a digital voltmeter when measuring the output voltages and possibly the input voltages. ( I BULLETIN NO. 3601-1 Input Output +1 vo!t DC +.5 volt DC +.25 volt DC 4-0 volt DC -.25 volt DC -.50 volt DC -.75volt DC -1 volt DC Step 12. Using the tabular listing of input and output voltages from Step 11, plot the voltages on an ordinary piece of graph paper as shown below. output 50 lines t 50 ------+-0-----. + ~ Lines ; . input 1000ib = 1 volt = 50 lines 500ib = .5 volt = 25 lines 5% = .05 volt = 25 lines .5% = .005 volt = .25 lines Step 13. After plotting the graph draw the best straight line through z.ero. All the points should be at least .5% or .25 divisions from the line. ~1~i~~CI============~ 36 BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 TAPE. TRANSPORT GENERAL Information contained in this bulletin consists of maintenance data pertaining to the basic tape transport. This information consists of theory of operation, maintenance, parts removal/replacement, and transport diagrams.. The theory covers a general description of the major areas of the basic tape movement circuits. Maintenance is broken down into circuit description, test data, parts list and diagrams for each assembly, circuit board, etc., associated with the tape transport. Parts removal/replacement data contains information for removal/replacement of mechanical parts, tape width kits, :,ead alignment, etc. THEORY OF OPERATION a. GENERAL - This information covers a systematic theory of the various areas of the tape transport. More detailed theory in the form of circuit description for each circuit board or subassembly is found in the maintenance section of this bulletin. Refer to the transport overall schematic. b. DC POWER DISTRIBUTION - The recorder/reproducer normally operates on +24 or +28 Vdc (two ranges, selectable at the dc to dc converter) which is applied to J6-A (hi) and J6-C (10). A special 28Vdc input through J6-B and J6-D is routed to the tape transport for powering only the cabinet blower fan. The input primary de power is fused by F 1 and a reverse polarity protection relay protects against accidental reversal of power leads. The 0 Vdc line is tied directly tothe 28 volt ground bus, W2. All 28 volt return lines are connected to this bus. When the POWER pushbutton is depressed, +28 Vdc is applied to the DC to DC converter at A6TB1-1 (hi) and A6TB1-2 (10). The output of the power supply (A6) is +12 Vdc (on A6Wl), -12 Vdc (on A6W3), o Vdc (on A6VV2), and +5 Vdc (+ side of C3). All return lines for the ±12 Vdc and +5 Vdc are tied (directly or indirectly) to A6W2. The MAIN POWER relay will ':lot become energized unless: (1) a tight tape condition exists or (2) the STOP pushbutton is depressed. If the machine is in a slack tape condition, depressing the STOP pushbutton bypasses the tape tension microswitches A 1S1 and A2S1, and energizes the MAl N POWE R relay which applies +28 Vdc to W1 which in turn applies +28 Vdc to the reel drive board. With power applied to the reel drive board, the reel drive servo will attempt to find a null position, thereby pulling the tape tension arms off their stops and closing A 1S1 and A 152. With these microswitches closed, power will be applied to the MAl N POWE R relay and the recorder/reproducer will be ready for normal operation. With the MAIN POWER relay energized, +28 Vdc is applied to the +28 Vdc bus W1: This bus applies power to the voice power plug, the capstan power amplifier, through the capstan motor fuse F2 to relay K2·4 (the TAPE DI RECTION relay), and to the reel drive board. BULLETIN NO. 3604-;4 , From A6, lines are routed from A6Wl. A6W2 and A6W3 to the signal electronics chassis via Pl, P2 andrl4. Power to initiate the RECORD mode must pass through the logic board. +12Vdc from A6W1 is appliU:t to the reel drive board, the capstan board, the capstan power amplifier, and the tachometer in the capstan motor. -12 Vdc from A6W.3 is applied to the capstan board and the tachometer in the capstan motor. +5Vdc is applied through the speed select switch 53 to select certain speed dependent record circuits and rep rodu ce ci rcu i:ts. To meet the requirements of certain microcircuits +7Vdc, -7Vdc, +5Vdc, and -5Vdc are provided by regulated supplies on the capstan board. c. SYSTEM CONTROL LOGIC - The following sequence descriptions note the order of events which occur in the machine during a change from one mode of operation to another mode, i. e. STOP to Fa RWARD, FORWARD to FAST, etc. Refer to the overall system schematic diagram to follow the sequence of events. The events are explained assuming a tight tape condition, POWER pushbutton depressed, and the MAIN PO WE ~ relay energized. VVhen POWE R ,. is depressed, +28 vdc is applied, through A2S 1 and A 1S 1, to J8-22 (logic board). In addition +28vdc is applied through S5 (5 & 6) ** and through STOP A3S2 (2 & 1), to J7-6 (logic board). For the following discussion it will be beneficial to note that, with the above assumptions, +28 vdc is always applied to J8-22 (iog.ic) and is also applied to J7-6 (logic unless the STOP pushbutton is actually depressed). 1. SEQUENCE: STOP TO FORWARD '* Step 1. With the recorder/reproducer in the STOP mode, +28 vdc is applied to the FORWARD switch A3S1-5. Step 2 Wlen the FORWARD pushbutton is depressed, +28 vdc is applied through J7-9 to CR2 (logic board), to the FORWARD lamp andto the coil of Kl (logic board) energizing that relay. It is also applied through CR 1 to pin 20f the RECORD switch. Step 3. With K1 (logic) energized, +28 vdc is removed from the STOP lamp, and applied to the coil of K5. K5 will not become energized until the capstan tachometer reaches a point between 1000 and 1500 Hz which activates the transistor switch on the capstan board and grounds the low side of K5 (logic). Step 4. Before K5 is energized however, +28 vdc is applied to CR23 which places the 01 RECTION HOLDING relay K6 in the FORWARD position. This action applies +28 vdc (from K5-11) to the OPERATE.relay Kl0 (capstan board) and to the hour meter assembly A28. The POWER switch is alternate and remains in one·position until depressed again. STOP, RECORD, FAST. REVERSE and FORWARD are momentary switches wh ich retu rn to their original ~osltion when pressure is released. ** If the ENO·OF-T APE switch Is activated, this voft;age passes through Kg (12 & 4). 2 J BULLETIN NO. 36044 Step 5. • With the OPE RATE relay K 10 energized, +5 vdc is applied through K 10 contacts to activate the divide-by circuits. Other K 10 contact CI JSures switch a low potential to the low side of the capstan motor. With this circuit activated, the countdown network and all circuits pertaining to the capstan motor motion are activated, thus the capstan starts turning . Step 6. When K 1 was originally energized +28 vdc was applied, through CR 19, to pinch roller #2 (the downstream pinch roller for forward tape movement). Step 7. \filth K5 energized, +28 vdc is applied from K5-6, through K3-' and K3-9, through CR 17, to pinch roller #1. Step 8. With both pinch rollers energized, and with the capstan motor turning and the reel drives operating correctly, tape will move from the inner reel to the outer reel. The capstan will tu rn in the corrc~t direction because K2 (TAPE DI RECTION relay) is deenergized. 2. SEQUENCE: STOP TO REVERSE . Step 1. With the recorder/reproducer in the STOP mode, +28 volts is applied through A3S1-5 and 4, through P2T and P2N, to pin 5 of the REVERSE pushbutton (A4S1). Step 2. Depressing REVERSE applies +28 volts through CR7 (logic) to the REVERSE lamp and to the coil of K2 (logic) energizing that relay. It is also applied through CR6 to the RECORD pushbutton. Step 3. With K2 (logic) energized, +28 vdc (from pin 4) is removed from the STOP lamp and is applied as a holding voltage through CR9 to K2 (logic). This voltage will hold K2 energized until (1) STOP is depressed or (2) FORWARD is depressed. Step 4. K2 (logic) also applies +28 vdc from pin 7 to the coil of TAPE MOTION relay K5 (logic). However, K5 will not become energized until the capstan tachometer reaches a frequency between 1000 and 1500 Hz, at which point the transistor switch on the capstan board grounds the low side of K5's coil. Step 5. Before K5 is energized, +28 vdc is applied to CR24 which places K6 (DI RECTION HOLDING relay) in the REVERSE setting. Step 6. K6 (logic) now performs several functions. It applies +28 vdc to the hour meter assembly, A28, and to the coil of OPERATE relay K10 (capstan board) energizing that relay. Step 7. With the·OP~RATE relay K10 energized, +5 vdc is applied through K 10 contacts to activate the divide-by circuits. Other K 10 contacts closures switch a low potential to the low side of the capstan motor. VJith this circuit activated, the countdown network and all circuits pertaining to the capstan motor motion are activated. Thus the capstan motor starts turning. Step 8. When K2 (logic) was originally energized, +28 vdc was applied, through CR 16, to pinch roller #1 (the downstream pinch roller for reverse tape motion). lC=========.=========::=::=::===-=:::=:::=_=:===:=:=.===:J==~ 3 BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Step 9. When K5 becomes energized, +28 vdc is applied from K5·6, through K3-1 and K3-9, through CR 18 to pinch roller #2. Step 10. With both pinch rollers energized, the capstan motor turning and the reel drives operating correctly, tape will move from the outer reel to the inner reel. The capstan will turn in the correct direction because K2 (TAPE Di RECTION relay) is energized. 3. SEQUENCE: STOP TO RECORD Step 1. ""hen both K 1 (logic) and K2 (logic) are deenergized, +28 vdc from Pl-6 is passed through Kl (11 & 3), K2 (12 & 4), CR11 and applied to RECORD switch A4S3-2. Step 2 When RECORD is depressed, +28 vdc is immediately applied to the RECORD lamp and to the coil of K4 (RECORD) through Pl-7. Step 3. Relay K4 (logic) will remain energized because +28 vdc from Pl-6 passes from pin 9 to 5 on K4, through K2 (2& 10) and Kl (2 & 10), and is applied to Pl-7 which energized K4 originally. Step 4. The circuit described in Step 3 is the holding circuit for RECORD when tape is NOT moving. If either FAST, FORWARD or REVERSE are depressed, this circuit is immediately broken (K 1 or K2 energized) and the R ECO R D relay K4 will become deenergized. Step 5. With K4 energized, +12 vdc (from P1-20) and -12 vdc (from Pl-18) are applied to the record electron ics. 4. SEQUENCE: STOP TO FORWARD-RECORD Step 1. To record in the FORWARD mode, it is necessary to establish forward tape motion before releasing the RECORD pushbutton. The sequence for establishing forward tape motion is identical to sequence 1. Step 2. With tape moving in the FORWARD mode, +28 vdc is applied to the RECORD pushbutton A4S3-2, (Step 2, STOP to FORWARD sequence). Step 3. Depressing the RECORD pushbutton applies +28 vdc to the RECORD lamp and also to RECORD relay K4 (logic) through P1-7. Step 4. Relay K4 will remain energized because +28 vdc from Pl-6 passes from pin 9 to 5 on K4, through deenergized K3 (2 & 10), energized K 1 (5 & 9), out on P1-4, through FORWARD switch A3S1 (2 & 1) to REVERSE switch A4S1 (2 & 1) and to P1-7 which energized K4 originally. Step 5. The circuit described in Step 4 is the holding circuit for RECORD when tape is moving in the FORWARD mode only. If either STOP, REVERSE or FAST is depressed, this circuit is immediately broken and K4 will become deenergized. BULLETiN NO. 3604-4 Step 6. 5. With K4 energized, + 12 vdc (from P 1-20) and -12 vdc (from P 1-18) are app lied to -the record electronics. SEQUENCE: STOP TO REVERSE-RECORD Step 1. To record in the REVERSE mode, it is necessary to establish reverse tape motion before releasing the RECORD pushbutton. The sequence for establishing reverse tape motion is identical to sequence 2. Step 2. With tape moving in the REVERSE mode, +28 vdc is applied to RECORD pushbutton A4S3-2 (Step 2, STOP to REVERSE sequence). Step 3. Depressing the RECORD pushbutton applies +28 vdc to RECORD relay K4 (logic) through Pl-7. Step 4. Relay K4 will remain energized because +28 vdc from P1-6 passes from pin 9 to 5 on K4, through deenergized K3 (2 & 10), energized K2 (5 & 9), out on P1-4, through FORWARD switch A3S1 (2 & 1) to REVERSE switch A4S1 (2 & 1) and to Pl-7 which energized K4 originally. Step 5. The circuit described in Step 4 is the holding circuit for RECORD when tape is moving in the REVERSE operate mode only. If either STOP, FORWARD or FAST is depressed, this circuit is immediately broken and K4 will become deenergized. Step 6. With K4 energized, + 12 vdc (from P 1-20) and -12 vdc (from P 1-18l are applied to the record el ectron ics. 6. SEQUENCE: FORWARD TO FAST·FORWARD Step 1. To move tape in the FAST-FORWARD mode, it is necessary to establish forward tape motion before releasing the FAST pushbutton. The sequence for establishing forward tape motion is identical to sequence 1. Step 2. With Kl (logic) energized, +28 vdc is received from K2-3, through K1 (12 & 8), out on Pl-2 and applied to FAST A4S2-2. Step 3. When FAST is depressed, +28 vdc is applied to the coil of K3 (logic). Relay K3 receives its holding voltage (through pins 12 & 8) from STOP pushbutton A3S2-1, through FORWARD switch A3S1 (5 & 4) and REVERSE switch A4S1 (5 & 4). Step 4. With FAST relay K3 energized, +28 vdc is removed from Pl-21 (logic) and Pl-20. This would deenergize Kg (capstan board) which would lock out the phase lock switch from the speed control servo. In addition a voltage is applied to the base of Q1 {logic) which locks out tape synchronous speed control, if applicable. Step 5. With FAST relay K3 (logic) energized, +28 vdc (from K5-6} is removed from the anodes of CR17 and CR18. Therefore only pinch roller #2 will remain-energized (from K1-7), ===:=:======:=: ='===========::::::J cc=::=: =: 5 r= ~-=: ==========:=J ~ ~\fv)~~~~~\~~ ~4~llil@1[~'J~W) BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Step 6. Relay K3 {logic) also removes the ground from J8-13 (logic) and J9-6 (capstan board) and appl ies +5 vdc through K3 (11 & 7) to these points. This activates the slew reference signal which places the speed control into the FAST tape (slew) mode. Step 7. 7. Step 1. With the capstan turning at a slew rate, the reel drives operating correctly and the downstream (#2) pinch roller engaged, tape will move from the inner reel to the outer reel at a fast~slew) tape speed. It is not possible for the RECORD relay to remain energized since the interlocking circuits in K3 (2 & 10) and K 1 (2 & 10) are open. SEQUENCE: REVERSE TO FAST-REVERSE To move tape in the FAST-REVERSE mode, it is necessary to establish reverse tape motion before releasing the FAST pushbutton. The sequence for establishing reverse tape motion is identical to sequence 2. Step 2. With K2 {logic) energized, +28 vdc is received from K 1-3, through K2 (12 & 8), out on Pl-2 and applied to FAST A4S2-2. Step 3. When FAST is depressed, +28 vdc is applied to the coil of K3 (logic). Relay K3 receives its holding voltage (through pins 12 & 8) from STOP pushbutton A3S2-1, through FORWARD switch A3S1 (5 & 4) and REVERSE switch A4S1 (5 & 4). Step 4. . FAST relay K3 also removes +28 vdc from Pl-21 (logic) and Pl-20. This would deenergize relay K9 (capstan board) which would lock out the phase lock switch from the speed control servo. In addition, a voltage is applied to the base of Q1 (logic) which locks out tape synchronous speed control, if appl icable. Step 5. With FAST relay K3 (logic) energized, +28 vdc (from K5··6) is removed from the anodes of CR17 and CR18. Therefore, only pinch roller #1 will remain energized (from K2-7). Step 6. Relay K3 also removes the ground from J8-13 (logic) through ~9-6 (capstan board) and applies +5 vdc through K3 (11 & 7) to these points. This ~ctivates the slew reference signal which places the speed control into the FAST tape (slew) mode. Step?- With the capstan turning at a slew rate, the reel drives operating correctly and the downstream (#1) pinch roller engaged, tape will move from the outer reel to the inner reel at a fast (slew) tape speed. It is not possible for the RECORD relay to remain energized since the interlocking circuits in K3 (2 & 10) and K2 (2 & 10}are open. 8. SEQUENCE: FORWARD TO STOP Step 1. When tape is moving in the forward direction and STOP is depressed, +28 vdc is momentarily . removed from Pl-6 (logic). This removes the holding voltage (through K2-11 & 3) from the coil of K1 (logic) and the FORWARD relay immediately deenergizes~ Step 2. When Kl is deenergized, +28 vdc is removed from the anode of CR20. However, K5 (logic) will remain energized due to the holding voltage from K5-6. 6 BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Step 3. In addition, K 1 removes the voltage from OPE RATE relay K 10 (capstan board) which deenergizes and thereby removes the reference signal. With no reference signal, the capstan motor will immediately begin stopping very quickly due to its low inertia. Step 4. When the tachometer frequency drops below 1000 to 1500 kHz, the switch on the capstan board is opened which deenelgizes K5. With K5 deenergized, voltage is removed from the two pinch rollers (from K5-6 through K3-1 & 9). Step 5. When the capstan stops turning and the pinch rollers released, tape movement will stop. 9. SEQUENCE: FAST·FORWARD TO STOP - The FAST-FORWARD to STOP sequence is identical t() sequence 8 except that FAST relay K3 (logic) is also deenergized immediately when STOP is depressed. When FAST relay K3 becomes deenergized, both pinch rollers become engaged for the short time it takes for tape movement to stop. 10. SEQUENCE: REVERSE TO STOP Step 1. When tape is moving in the reverse direction and STOP is depressed, +28 vdc is momentarily removed from P1-6 (logic). This removes the holding voltage (through K 1 - 3 & 11) from the coil of K2 (logic) nnd the REVERSE relay immediately deenergizes. Step 2. When K2 is deenergized, +28 vdc is removed from the anode of CR21. However, K5 (logic) will remain energized due to the holding voltage from K5-6. Step 3. In addition, K2 removes the voltage from OPERATE relay K 10 (capstan board) which deenergizes and thereby removes the reference signal. With no reference signal, the capstan motor will immediately begin stopping very quickly due to its low inertia. Step 4. When the tachometer frequency drops below 1000 to 1500 kHz, the switch on the capstan board is opened which deenergizes K5. With K5 deenergized, voltage is removed from the two pinch rollers (from K5-6 through K3-1 & 9). Step 5. When the capstan stops turning and the pinch rollers released, tape movement will stop. 11. SEQUENCE: FAST-REVERSE TO STOP - The FAST-REVERSE to STOP sequence is identical to the REVERSE to STOP sequence 10, except that FAST relay K3 (logic) is also deenergized immediately when STOP is depressed. When FAST relay K3 becomes deenergized, both pinch rollers become engaged for the short time it takes tape movement to stop. 12. SEQUENCE: FORWARD TO REVERSE Step 1. When tape is moving in the forward direction and REVERSE is depressed, +28 vdc is applied to the REVERSE lamp and to the coil of REVERSE relay K2 (logic). Step 2. Relay K2 breaks the interlock (11 & 3) for the holding voltage of FORWARD relay K 1 which becomes deenergized. c::::::===___ :::. =====::::J 7 BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Step 3. With K 1 deenergized the tape will begin to stop. Step 4. Relay K2 will remain energized because K 1 is now deenergized. Step 5. When the tachometer frequency falls below 1000 to 1500 kHz, relay K5 will deenergize which applies +28 vdc to K6 (logic) . • Tape will now begin to move in the reverse direction as explained in sequence 2. Step 6. 13. SEQUENCE: REVERSE TO FORWARD Step 1. When tape is moving in the reverse direction and FORWARD is depressed, +28 vdc is applied to the FORWARD lamp and to the coil of FORWARD relay K1 (logic). Step 2. Relay K 1 breaks the interlock (11 & 3) for the holding voltage of REVERSE relay K2 which becomes deenergized. Step 3. With K2 deenergized the tape will begin to stop. Step 4. Relay K 1 will remain energized because K2 is now deenergized. Step 5. When the tachometer frequency falls below 1000 to 1500 kHz, relay K5 will deenergize which applies +28 vdc to K6 (logic). Step 6. Tape will now begin to move in the forward direction as explained in sequence 1. 14. SEQUENCE: FAST-FORWARD TO FORWARD Step 1. When tape is moving in the FAST-FORWARD (or slew) mode, and FORWARD is depressed, the interlock to the FAST relay K3 (logic) is immediately broken and relay K3 deenergizes. Also, the voltage is removed from the base of Q 1 (logic). St'ep 2. With the FAST relay deenergized, the slew reference will be replaced by the operate reference and the recorder/reproducer will seek synchronous operation at the selected speed. 15. SEQUENCE: FAST-REVERSE TO REVERSE Step 1. . Step 2. When tape is moving in the FAST-REVERSE mode, and REVERSE is depressed, the interlock to FAST relay K3 (logic) is immediately broken and relay K3 deenergizes. Also the voltage is removed from the base of Q 1 (logic) . With the FAST relay deenergized, the slew reference will be replaced by the standard operate reference and the recorder/reproducer will seek synchronous operation at the selected speed. 16. SEQUENCE: END-Of-TAPE SENSE (also used with the optional shuttle feature) Step 1. When END-OF-TAPE sense switch S5 is in the IN position, the +28 vdc from A1S1C cannot pass through S5, but must be routed through deenergized K9. Step 2. Whenever FORWARD, REVERSE or STOP is not actually depressed, +28 vdc is applied to resistors R9 and R8 from P 1-1. ~~~~~~) L-C::=============::=::J-' 8 =======================:1 CC:::= BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Step 3. When tape is moving (1<5 energized), +28 vdc is applied to the anode of CR32. Step 4. When a sensing strip passes over the electrode on PU3, the electrode is momentarily grounded, and the voltage on the base of 03 is less than the voltage on the emitter and the transistor conducts for the short period of time when the sensing strip is on the electrode. With the optional photo end-of-tape sense feature J8-7 (fwd) 01 J8-6 (rev) is grounded when the associated sense detector is activated by light from the associated photo sense lamp. This produces the same effect as the sensing strip passing over the electrode on PU3. Refer to the Photo End-of-Tape Sense bulletin in the optional items section (tab). Step 5. When 03 conducts, it applies a voltage to the gate of silicon controlled rectifier CR32 which now begins conducting. CR32 will continue to conduct (even with no voltage on the gate) as long as +28 vdc is applied to its anode. The silicon controlled rectifier is necessary in the circuitry because the period of time when the sensing strip passes over the electrode is insufficient to energize sense relay K9. However, since CR32 wili continue conducting, relay K9 will energize and remain energized until K5 is deenergized which removes the +28 vdc from CR32. Step 6. When K9 (logic) is energized (and S5 is in the IN position) a stop command will be routed to control logic. When tape movement stops, K5 will deenergize removing the +28 vdc from CR32. d. SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM - The following theory describes the overall speed control system and its use in the precise movement of tape. The magnetic tape is "pulled" across the record and reproduce heads by pinching the tape between a rotating capstan and two pinch rollers. To accurately control the tape travel, the rotational speed of the capstan must be carefully controlled. This is accomplished by one of the two following methods of servo speed control. CAPSTAN SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL - The primary method of controlling tape speed is called CAPSTAN SYNCH RONOUS control. During Capstan Synchronous control, an internally generated, crystal oscillator signal is used as a reference against which a tachometer signal (from the capstan motor) is compared. Because the tachometer is part of the capstan motor, the frequency of the tachometer signal is proportional to the rotational speed of the capstan. Any difference in frequency and phase between the crystal oscillator reference and the tachometer signa! is converted into error difference signals to regulate the capstan motor speed. During Capstan Sync the SYNC lamp on the Operators's Control Panel should be lit. TAPE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (OPTIONAL) - In order -to achieve greater speed control accuracy from a recorded tape, a second method, called TAPE SYNCHRONOUS control, is available as an option. To use this method the internal reference signal from a crystal oscillator is recorded on tape (even numbered track) during the record process. When the tape is reproduced, this signal in lieu of the tachometer signal is recovered from the tape and compared with the reference frequency of the crystal oscillator. Any difference in frequency and phase is converted into error difference signals which increase or decrease the tape speed. If the voltage level of the reproduced reference signal is insufficient or if the signal is lost due to tape dropouts, the recorder/reproducer will instantaneously revert to Capstan Synchronous Control. During tape sync the TAPE and SYNC lamps on the Operator's Control Panel should be lit. [ ::: : BULLETI N NO. 3604-4 During the record time, Capstan Synchronous is used to control the speed of the tape. The tape speed control circuits contain eight basic functional divisions as listed below with the circuit board or subassembly containing each. 1. Rpference Oscillator Circu its -- Capstan Board. 2. Tachometer (Tach) Signal Circuits - Capstan Board. 3. Tape Signal Circuits (Optional) - Tape Sync Board and Capstan Board 4. Frequency Preparation Circuits - Capstan Board. 5. Phas~ 6. Frequency Comparison - Capstan Board. 7. Acceleration and Amplification Circuits - Capstan Board. 8. Capstan Motor Circuits - Capstan Board and Capstan Power Amplifier. Comparison Circuits - Capstan Board. SPEED, r,.'ODE, AND :£,"51 fY osc CKJS cm'T:::-1 _.SIGNAl II l TO REEl DRIVE ACCL C~'~d nUL -*- Acel MW AMP CKTS --=l REF SIGNAt (('IMP FROM r- CKTS' TAPE T APE SYNC j CAPSTAN SYNC TACH SIGNAL eKTS (STNJDAR TACHO,METER SIGNAL Figure 1. Speed Control System Basic Block Diagram For discussion, refer to the Speed Control Circuits Overall Block Diagram, Figure 2. 1. REFERENCE OSCI LLATOR CIRCUITS - A 3.2 MHz crystal oscillator is used to generate the basic reference frequency for comparison with the tachometer (or tape when used) signal. This same signal (divided down per speed and density) is also recorded on tape when the recorder/reproducer is equipped for the optional Tape Synchronous Control. The output of the reference oscillator is applied to a frequency countdown network and to a frequency select gate with the output dependent upon the tape speed selected at the Operator's Control Panel. The counted down speed dependent frequencies are applied through an operate/fast divider select gate to the density select gate. With the DENSITY switch in the H IG H position, ~~e output of the gate will select the higher of the two inputs to make the output frequency, 400 kHz for f20 ips. ~rrU@ffi\rt(\ C============::::J (Q\~\\k\\I~W~\~, ~ffI)!! /1~!IMIIMI;YJ { L1<.\l.l\llil\i.llI,,- :I 10 [ ::::-=== :: BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 If the LOW position is selected. the input is selected to make the output frequency 200 kHz for'120 ips. The output of this gate will be submultiples of these frequencies for lower tape speeds and is applied to the REF connector on the Record Connector Panel to be recorded on tape for Tape Synchronous control (optional). This output is not utilized for Capstan Synchronous control, When a FAST mode is desired, the chain of events is slightly different. Upon depressing the FAST push• button on the Operator's Control Panel, the 3.2 MHz oscillator signal is applied to a divide-by-twelve circuit, activated during fast. The output frequency is 267 kHz and is applied directly to the operate select gate, bypassing all the countdown circuitry. The output is applied to the frequency preparation circuits. 2. TACHOMETER SIGN,AL CIRCUITS - During Capstan Synchronous operation, a tachometer sig, nal from the capstan motor is generated and gated through to the frequency preparation circuits for com, parison against the reference oscillator signal. The frequency of the tachometer signal is porportional to the rotational speed of the capstan motor. A slotted opque disc rotating in front of a photocell produces an output signal which is amplified and quantized to develop a square wave within the capstan motor. The quantized signal is inverted, and gated through to the frequency preparation circuits. When utilizing the tape sync board, this signal is routed through the tape sync board. The tachometer signal is also shaped to drive a switch which energizes the tape motion relay on the logic board. Because of an R C time constant within the switch circuit, the tape motion relay does not energize until the tachometer reaches a point somewhere between 1000 and 1500 Hz. 3. TAPE SIGNAL CIRCUnS (OPTIONAL) - The tape signal circuits are used only if the recorderl reproducer is equipped with the optional tape sync board. The tape sync board plugs directly onto the capstan board. record reference signal, from the reference oscillator circuits is recorded During the record process on tape through a direct record channel. The frequency r.ecorded is proportional to the tape speed selected. During the reproduce process the tape referencesignal passes through the selected preamplifier and bypasses the reproduce electronics through a jumper board. F rom the iumper board the signa! is applied to the tape sync board via the TAPE connector. Upon entering the tape sync board, the signal passes through an intergrating amplifier and triggers a signal detector circuit This circuit turns the tape sync lamp on, activates the tape sync gain change on the capstan boards, and is also app;ied to the tape/tach select gate. The output of the intergrating amplifier also passes through a level detector and a divide-by two circuit to the tapeltach select gate. The function of the level detector is further conditioned by the 15/16 ips thru 7 1/2 ips speed lines, when applicable. The tapeltach select gate utiiizes three data inputs (tach signal, tape reference signal high density, and tape reference signal low denisty), three control inputs (hi density, tape inhibit, and signal detector), and one output The selected input (tach signal in capstan sync or tape signal- hi or low density) is routed through to the output and on to the capstan board, conditioning and controlling the speed control system as the tachometer signal normaUy does in the capstan sync speed control function. 4. FREQUENCY PREPARATION CIRCUITS - The reference oscillator signal, upon being counted down by the speed dependent countdown circuits, is applied through an operate/fast divider select gate. BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 " This gate provides a divide-eight and divide-by sixteen output for tape speeds of 120 ips through 1 7/8 ips. for a tape speed of 15/16 ips, a output of divide-by sixteen and divide-by thirty-two are provided. The divide-by sixteen (standard speeds) or the divide-by thirty-two (15/16 ips) is applied through another divide-by two and the operate select gate to the freq/phase lock detector and the function generator network. Table 1 shows the reference frequencies generated for each tape speed. The oscillator reference signal is referred to as the A" signal. II The tape reference signal (tape sync option) or the tachometer reference signal is either divided-by two (120 ips only) or divided-by one (all other speeds) and applied to the freqlphase lock detector and the function generator network. The tape or tach signal is referred to as the "B" signal. -- TABLE 1. REFERENCE FREQUENCIES kHz VS TAPE SpeED Speed (ips) 120 -60 30 15 7112 33/4 1 7/8 15/16 Osc Ref 100 kHz 100 50 25 12.5 6.25 3.125 1.562 Tach Ref Tape Hi Den Tape Lo Den 200 kHz 100 50 25 12.5 6.25 3.125 1.562 400kHz 200 200 kHz 100 50 25 12.5 6.25 3.125 1.562 100 50 25 12.5 6.25 3.125 5. PHASE COMPARISON CIRCUITS - The phase comparison c.ircuits are used to maintain capstan speed once the selected speed is released. The A and S signals are applied to the two inputs of the functi£!:!.gener~r. Th~tput of the function generator develops four basic logic signals, consisting of AS, AS, AS and AB. The AB and the AB are applied to two operational integrator circuits. Each of the operational integrators have the same ~ignal at the input, except for a 1800 phase shift. The output of each is a trapezoidal wave with a 1800 phase shift. Each trapezoidal wave is held to the 0 Vdc reference by the function generator outputs AS and AS via the clamp circuits. The two signals are added together by an operational adder to develop a dc level proportional to the phase relationship of signals A and B. Whenever a phase lock signal is received by the mode select gate, the dc level is allowed to pass to the acceleration and amplification circuits. 6. FREQUENCY COMPARISON CIRCUITS - The frequency comparison circuits are used during the time the frequency error between the oscillator reference signal (referred to as the A signal) and the tape/tach signal (referred to as the B signal) is the greatest. When the A and B signals are running at the same frequencies, the phase comparison circuits are sensed and used to maintain a constant tape speed. ~11~~C~h.=1=~=3======~ 12 TAPE SPEED LINES DENSITY SELECT SWITCH J9-15 - P2-/5 .--- RECORD REF J9-/6 PZ-16 TO OPT. TAPE SYNC _ + 12VDC I BOARO J/O-/3, Pf-/3 Tn + S vDe . + Jlo-IBI P/-(B GND VIA JI2 GATE AT 15116 ips ---, 3.2MH, J9-/3 PZ-f3 -12VDC +8Y2 SPEED/FREQUENCY COOiHDOWN osc I DENS1TY SELECT GATE r FAST ';-BY TP4 12 TI>3 ~ J9-IO PZ-/O '( TP7 "I" FAST} J.9-6 P2-6 "O"NORMAL F AST ....:...;-"+-'::.....::.....---6~ GATE "S"SIGNAL -;. SY 2 120ip'S _ _ SPEED LINE AT ____~________--~~:~.~FU~~~~~r;~:~$--t-- 120ips 10.8 JUMPER USED WHEN TAPE SYNC FEATURE is NOT SUPPLIED J9-7 PZ-7 TAC" SGNAl=--t-=------+lINVERTER 1--&--<111- ~ J -- - - - - J9 '--LOGIC I· SW BD. +2BVDC I ~ K5 EQUALIZER DURING~D.REva F~ T::l SIGNAL O+_-=-J9:::-..;2~2~P.!2:..:-!:;2!'.2_----+---_fI.::A:....cI_+l'NTEAR~RpATOR m LEVEL -;. BY 2 DETECTOR GATE INPUT Ir-., I +12VDC TAPE SYNC LAMP ~ JI OPERATORS CONTROL PANEL "O"FAST O. R REC "." NORMAL MODES } TIMING CONTROL ~-tJ~9-.~/6~P~2~-..;/~6-----.~~,~~.::J:/4~.'r---~L~O..;S~P~E~E~D..;C~O~N~T..;R~O~L_ _ _Ojr" TAPE INHIBIT J9 - ZI 712:-15/16ips KI SPEED LINES "OR" ED r TAPE SYNC BD.(OPTIONAL) 2 - Z1 ----- BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 SolTELCH "I" SYNC LOCK "O"STOP-FAST-OUT OF SYNC .J9-20 P2-20 TPIS IPI2 TPI3 C~~.p~OL 1-__"': GATE STBLN INVERTING AM? I I NETWO: 28VDC~/ PI-II .JIO-II .J8-23 OPERATE PHASE LOCK SW NOTSYNC t K5 KIO ~ IL-Q_ _ _-' SYNC TP9 TPIO '-r-------r---J TPII 14>-::::-----. l AMP ANO GAIN r)o-28VDC ADJ :-----t I K8~REV P/-7 SPEED FILTER NETWORK .JIO~- .J10-8 T81-2 CAPSTAN POWER AMPUFIER PI-6 .110-6 REEL DRIVE SYSTEM SPEED LINE INPUTS 120lps 15/16 ips ITACH .EeT TE .J/I I J I bl2 II :ny -lSi CAPSTAN BO. ~ Figure 2. Speed Control Circuits Block Diagram c======:============:=============~ BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 \M1en the FWD pushbutton is depressed on the Operator's Control Panel and tape starts to move, the B signal starts to increase in frequency. From the output of the frequency preparation circuits, the increasing B signal is applied to the freq/phase detector circuit. In like manner, the A signal is applied also to the freq/phase detector circuit. Whe1n the B signal has reached a frequency approximately equal to the A reference signal, the frequency detector enables the mode select gate to accept the de voltage from the PHASE COMPARISON circuits. This function also provides a logic 1 level to the SQUELCH output during sync lock. 7. ACCELERATION AND AMPLIFIER CIRCUITS - The acceleration and amplifier circuits are used to retard speed changes of the capstan motor during periods of starting and stopping. This allows time for the reel drive motors to gain sufficient angular velocity and avoids spilling or breaking tape. The reel drive acceleration circuits (FWD and REV) decrease and then slowly increase the dc output voltage of the acceleration network until the reel drive motors have reached proper operating speed. The output of the acceleration network is appl ied to an emitter follower, the capstan power amplifier, and then the capstan motor. e. REEL DRIVE - This recorder/reproducer's reel drive system incorporates dual hubs on a coaxial spindle. Each hub is a part of a complete reel drive servo system including a DC motor driven spindle, a tape tension sensing arm with a photocell assembly and a DC servo amplifier located on the reel drive board. Also located on the reel drive board are special features including a dynamic brake in event of a power failure, an acceleration control for forward and reverse, (routed to the speed control system) and an acceleration program power mode to stop mode. The entire reel drive servo provides a complete system which maintains essentially constant tape tension across the heads under all conditions of operation. In addition it provides features for prevention of breaking tape, tape spillage, and possible damage to the reel drive motors. In a slack tape or no tape condition the tape tension arms are held at their extreme rest positions by their spring systems. For the upper tension arm (associated with the outer reel) the extreme rest position is to the left toward the side of the main transport casting. For the lower tension arm (associated with the inner reel) the extreme rest position is down toward the bottom of the main transport casting. \Nhen the tension arms are at their extreme rest position they activate m icrosw itches which disable the recorder/reproducer from normal operation. This is to ensure that in the event of a broken tape, empty reels, or an extreme slack tape condition the recorder/reproducer will not continue to run. A vane, attached to each tape tension arm, moves between the lamp and the photocell on the photocell assembly. The geometry of the photocell and lamp is such that when the vane is centered, half of the photocell is shaded and half is illuminated. This vane varies the amount of light obtained by the photocell thus varying the output current' With the photocell completely shaded the current output would be zero and with the photocell completely illuminated the output would be maximum. As the vane moves from its centered position it indicates either slack tape or tight tape. Slack tape allows the tension arm and vane to move toward its extreme rest position and tight tape forces it to move off center in the opposite direction. The degree of slack tape or tight tape determines the displacement of vane movement off center. The reel drive system is classified single ended since each reel drive hub can be driven in one direction only. In the forward mode the outer reel is driven clockwise while the inner reel free wheels (actually there ·_=.=::=:=::=:::=====.=========.::1::1 c::::::=::::__ 15 ====== Cl BU LLETI N NO. 3604-4 is a slight voltage applied to the inner reel to provide proper tension). In the reverse mode the inner reel is Criven counterclockwise while the outer reel free wheels (with the slight drag). The following discussion will pertain to the FORWARD mode of operation. With a tight tape condition on the upper tension arm the vane would shade the photocell causing a decrease in current from it. With this decrease in Current to the reel drive motor, its speed would tend to decrease thus correcting the tight tape condition and strive to center the vane. The inner reel is forced to freewheel by a tight tape condition on the lower tape tension arm which allows very little current to the inner reel drive motor. This tight tape condition is caused by the capstan drive moving tape in opposition of the inner reels tendency to run counterclockwise. This slightly tight tape condition is always present (in the forward mode) allowing the inner reel to free wheel and turn only when pulled by tape. If slack tape should occur at this lower tension arm, the vane would move allowing more light to the photocell producing more current. This increase in current to the inner reel drive motor would cause it to have a greater tendency to turn counterclockwise thus giving it a greater drag and take up the slack. With the slack taken up the vane would return to near its midposition ·and the inner reel would again be free wheeling. MAINTENANCE a. GENERAL - This information consists of maintenance data (circuit description, test data and possibly maintenance adjustments, parts list, and diagrams) for the circuit boards and subassemblies used in the tape transport. Refer to the wiring diagrams and the transport overall schematic for information and location of particular points called out in these maintenance procedures. b. MODE CONTROL 1. LOGIC BOARD CIRCUITS (a) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION - The following list describes the function of each relay on the logic board. RELAY FUNCTION K1 Establishes forward tape motion; provides interlock for reverse, record and fast. K2 Establishes reverse tape motion; provides interlock for forward, record and fast. K3 Establishes fast tape motion if either K 1 or K2 is energized; provides interlock for record, pinch rolls and reference signals. K4 Applies ±12 Vdc to the record electronics during the record mode. K5 Determines if tape is moving or not moving; provides interlock for tape direction relay, end-of-tape sense, pinch rolls. == BULLETIN NO. 3604A RELAY (CONT.) FUNCTION (CONT.) KG Establishes which direction tape will move. K9 Actuates stop mode when energized by sense circuitry. K10 Selects proper sense detector for forward or reverse tape sense. (b) TEST DATA Step 1. With POWER removed, place the logic board on its extender board and ensure the following voltage indications are present at the indicated pin during the proper mode. J7 is the corresponding jack for logic board plug, P 1, as J8 is for plug, P2. Connect a dc voltmeter between system ground, TP2 (power and control connector panel) and each indicated plug pi!"' number. Ensure POWER is applied, tape is threaded properly and STOP mode is first depressed. PLUG PIN NO. MODE Pl-5 Pl-6 Pl-l0 P1-15 Pl-16 P2-8 P2-9 P2-14 P2-15 P2-l6 P2-l8 P2-22 Pl-8 Pl-9 STOP - STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP -FORWARD FORWARD Pl-21 P2-7 P2-ll P2-12 P2-17 Pl-14 FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD REVERSE Pl-17 P2-6 P2-20 Pl-' . Pl-2 =. ....c__ REVERSE REVERSE REVERSE FAST FAST FUNCTION 28 Vdc Return Stop Initiate Record Initiate Power 28 Vdc Return Stop Lamp Power Stop Initiate Power Stop or FAST +5 Vdc +5 Vde +5 Vde 12 Vdc Return +28 Vde Forward Power Forward I nitiate pushbutton in and do not release Pinch Roll Activate Forward EOT Sense PR NO.1 Control PR NO.2 Control Operate @ 28 V de Level Reverse Initiate pushbutton in and do not release Reverse Lamp and Hold Reverse EOT Sense Reverse Hold FAST Holding FAST Initiate Power VOLTAGE OVdc +28 Vdc +28 Vdc OVdc +28 Vdc +28 Vdc +28 Vdc +5 Vdc +5 Vdc +5 Vdc OVdc +28 Vdc +28 Vdc +28 Vdc +28 +28 +28 +28 +28 Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc +28 +28 +28 +28 +28 +28 Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc BULLETI N NO. 3604-4 £lUG PIN NO. (CaNT.) MODE (CONT.) Pl-3 FAST P2-13 Pl-4 Pl-7 FAST RECORD RECORD Pl-18 Pl-20 Pl-22 Pl-23 RECORD RECORD RECORD RECORD VOLTAGE (CONT.) FUNCTION (COr'JT.) FAST Light Power and FAST Initiate Fast @ 28 Vdc Level Record Relay Holding Power Record Holding and Record Ught Power -12 Vdc +12 Vdc -12 Vdc Record +12 Vdc Record +28 Vdc +28 Vdc +28 Vdc +28 Vdc -12 Vdc +12 Vdc -12 Vdc +12 Vdc Step 2. To check the tape direction relay K2 (not on the logic board) depress FWD and ensure approximately +28 Vdc at terminal board TB4-2. Depress REVERSE and ensure approximately +28 Vdc at TB4-1. Step 3. The capstan motor may be checked as follows: (1) Remove POWER, unplug K2, and ensure a 3 ohm or approximate reading between pins 1 and 8 of K2 relay socket. Replace K2 vvhen finished. (2) Disconnect the lead to TB4-2 and connect a dc ammeter between this lead and TB4-2 Apply POWER, depress STOP and FWD, and ensure an approximate reading of 2.5 to 3 amps. If this current is excessive, check the pinch roller pressure as detailed in the checks and adjustments under maintenance in the Operator's Data bulletin. Replace the proper lead when finished. (3) Complete (2) above using TB4-1 and REV mode. Replace the proper lead when finished. (4) The use of a stethoscope or similar instrument may aid in detecting bad capstan motor bearings as the capstan is turning (FWD or REV, slow speed). Step 4. End-of-Tape Sense Checkout NOTE Ensure the metallic marker are properly placed on each end of the tape and the tape is threaded properly. (1) Ensure the EOT switch is set to the IN position, and POWER is applied. (2) Depress STOP, FORWARD, and FAST, in that sequence. (3) The recorder/reproducer should automatically revert to STOP mode prior to the inner reel becoming completely empty of tape. There should be approximately 60 to 100 feet, (approximately 1/8 inch tape wrap) of tape left on the inner reel. cc==================~~ 18 : :::J BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 (4)' Depress REVERSE and FAST. (5) The Recorder/Reproducer should automatically revert to STOP mode prior to the outer reel becoming completely empty of tape. There should be approximately 60 to 100 feet (approximately 1/8 inch tape wrap) of tape left on the outer reel. (6) If satisfactory results are not obtained in the previous (1) through (5) refer to the following test and adjustments. (a) Gain access to the logic board, right rear of recorder/reproducer, by removing the top and rear access panels. Place the logic board on its extender. (b) Ensure tape is threaded properly, apply POWER, and depress STOP and FORWARD. Ensure the EOT switch is set to the I N position. (c) Connect various resistors, ranging in value from 22 K ohm to 27 K ohm, between logic board pin J8-7 and system ground. Ensure STOP mode is activated with the application of one of these values. Ensure with a YOM, the presence of 12 to 14 Vdc atJ8-7 when the recorder/reproducer reverts to STOP mode. This ensures the logic board sensitivity adjustment is approximately set to a satisfactory level for either forward or reverse. Slight adjustment of sensitivity adjust, R 12 may be required to bring the sense circuitry firing level within the above resistance ranges, providing the 12 to 14 Vdc. NOTE When the optional Photo-End-Of- Tape Sense feature is supplied, refer to the appropriate bulletin in the optional items sections. (c) PARTS LIST Logic Board 835785 510142-001 898406 See Note 896458 K8 K9 K10 P1 P2 01 02 Rl R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 See Note 896458 896458 See Note See Note 896458 896458 846164 19 C See Note 853515-003 855130-004 853518 853518 853037 852738 198200-102 198200-102 198200-123 198200-822 198200-222 198200-102 198200-470 I$~II~) BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 l.ogic Board 835785 (Co·nt.) CR33 896458 CR34 896458 CR35 See Note See Note 853515-003 198200-103 R8 R9 R10 R 11 R12 See Note 329151-007 thru XK1 853516 K5 K6 thru 843788 K7 See Note CR36 K1 198200-331 198200-223 XK5 XK9 853516 NOTE These components comprise the shuttle kit (835792) C2 CR25 691391-016 CR28 CR29 896458 896458 CR36 R11 691111-823 896458 K7 855130-004 896458 K8 855130-004 CR35 896458 (d) DIAGRAMS- For schematic diagram of the logic board refer to the transport overall schematic. 2. SHUTTLE CIRCUITS (optional) - Refer to bulletin 3629 in the optional items section. C. SPEED CONTROL 1. CAPSTAN BOARD (a) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION INPUTS Power +12 Vdc -12 Vdc 12 Vdc Common 28 Vdc Common +5 Vdc Speed Lines Ips 120 Ips 60 ips 30 ips 15 ips 7 1/2 ips 33/4 Ips 1 7/8 Ips 15/16 Servo Signals Tachometer Tape Reference - HI Lo Acceleration Control Motion Bias Motion Bias Reel Drive Forward Reel Drive Reverse Capstan Motor Feed back Status and Control Operate-28 Vdc Level Fast-5 Vdc level Reverse-28 Vee Level Pinch Roll Activate 28 Vdc Level OUTPUTS "'Pi··U "-13 Pl-20.P2-10, 11, 12 ·Pl-4,5 1'2-13,14 P2.-4 P2-5 P1-22 1'1-23 P2-1 P1-21 P2:-3 P2-2 P2-7 P2:-22 Pl'!-23 Pl-t Pl-11 P1-6 Pl-S PI-9 P1-3 P2-ti Pt-2 Power Lamp Supply (Tachometer) +5 Vdc Lamp Supply (Reel Drive) Status and Control Phase Lock or Squelch Sync Lanl!> (Contact Closure to Ground) Tape Sync Capstan Motion Signal Servo Error and Servo Control Reference (Record) Tachometer Tape Sync Board Provisions Power +t2Vdc -12 Vdc +5 Vdc Supply Common Status and Control Tape Inhibit Hi-Density Low Speed Group Tape Sync Signal Tachometer In Tape Signal In Hi Lo Tach/Tape Output Pl-15 P1-14 P2-20 Pl·12 Pl-16, P2·19 P2-8 pl-e P2-16 P2-9 J7 J8 J6 J5 J13 J12 J14 J9 J-l0 A B J1t F1.·10 :: BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 (1) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS· Q23, CR21. and associated circuitry provide +10 Vdc at P1·14 (reel drive photo-cell lamp voltage) and +5 Vdc at Pl-15 (tachometer lamp voltage). Both voltages are produced from the +12 Vdc input to the capstan board. (2) REFERENCE OSCILLATOR CIRCUITS· This portion of the capstan board consists of crystal oscillator A 1, frequency countdown circuit A2, and divide-by-twelve circuit A4. One output of the crystal oscillator, operating at 3.2 MHz, is applied to the frequency countdown circuit (normal tape speeds) at A2-9. The output of this circuit, at A2-5, is a submultiple of 3.2 MHz, dependent (proportional) on tape speed. The speed line input pins to A2 are 4 (1 7/8 ips), 1 (3 3/4 ips), 14 (7 1/2 ips), 15 (15 ips.) 2 (30 ips), 13 (120 ips), and 3 (60 ips). When a tape speed is selected, +5 Vdc is applied to the proper input of A2; all other speed line inputs to A2 will be grounded. The particular output of A2 is applied to the Frequency Preparation circuits for further processing. The other output of the crystal oscillator is applied to fast divide-by-twelve gate A4, at pin 14. This circuit provides a divided-by-twelve output at A4-8, when activated by a logic 0 level at A4-6 and 7. This logic 0 level is present from AS-11 due to the logic 1 level applied to P2-6 during Fast mode: The divided output is applied to the frequency preparation circuits further processing, allowing the recorder/reproducer to rapidly move tape. (3) FREQUENCY PREPARATION CIRCUITS - These circuits consist of divide-by and gating circuits A3, A5, A6, A7, AS, A9, A 10, and A 11. The divided frequency (during normal tape speed) from A2 is applied to divide-by circuit A3, at pin 14. This circuit is enabled by a logic 0 level at A3-2 and 3, present from P2-6 during any normal operating mode. A3, during tape speeds 120 - 1 7/S ips, provides a divide-by-eight output at A3-S and a divide-bysixteen output at A3-11. During a tape speed of 15/16 ips, a divide-by-sixteen output is provided at A3-S and a divide-·by-thirty-two output at A3-11. The various divided outputs of A3 are provided by divide-by-two A5 and gate A6. A5, activated by the 15/16 ips speed Iine, controls the degree of A3 division by dividing-by two the frequency at A3-12 prior to A3-1. Gate A6, du ring 120 - 1 7/8 ips tape speeds, lowers the degree of A3 division by providing no division from A3-12 to A3-1. Both A3 outputs, A3-8 and A3-11, are appl ied to density select gate A 7, yvithonly one output, A3-11, being applied to divide-by-two A9 and gate A 10. A7, functioning as a density select gate, provides either a Hldensity frequency (400 kHz at 120 ips), submultiples at lower speeds or a LO density frequency (200 kHz at 120 ips), submultiples of lower speeds, for recording on tape (optional tape sync method of speed control). With a logic 1 level, from the HI position of the density switch, applied to P2-15, NAND gate A7~12, 13,11 is enabled. NAND gate A7-3 produces a logic 0 level from the logic 1 levels Dt pins A7-2 and 3 (from P2-15). This logic 0 level, when applied to A7-4, inhibites that NAND gate, thus preventing the signal at A3-11 from passing. The signal at A3-S passes through NAND gates A7-13, 11, 10,8, to the reference output at P2-16. With a logic 0 level applied to P2-15 from the LO position of the density switch, NAND gate, A7-4, 5, 6 is enabled and NAND gate, A7-12, 13, 11, is inhibited. Thus the signal at A3-8 passes through NAND gates A7-5, 6, 9, 8 to the reference output at P2-16. I BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 The single output at A3-11 is applied to a divide-by-two circuit at A9-3 and a gate at A 10-2. At 120 ips, the div ide-by-two is activated by a logic 1 level from A8-G. Th is is due to a logic 1 level from P2-4 NANDED with a logic 0 level at P2-6 to produce a logic 0 level at /\S-3. This logic 0 level produces a logic 1 lf1vel at AS-4, 5,6, activating A9-3, and inhibiting N.A.ND gate A 10-1,2, 3. With this NAND gate inhibited the frequency at A 10-2 passes no further (while at 120 ips). The divided output of A9, at pin 6, passes through enabled A 10-4, 5, 6, to operate/fast select gate A 11. At speeds other than 120 ips the divide-by-two circuit A9-3 is not activated and the signal from A3-11 passes through enabled NAN D gates A 10-2, 3, 4, 6, to A 11. A 10-1, 2, 3, is enabled by a logic 1 level from A8-3, produced by NANDING a logic 1 level from AS-11 with a logic 0 level from P2-4. A 10-4,5,6, is enabled by the logic 1 level produced by A9-G during its inactive state. At A 11, the signal applied to pin 2 is passed through enabled NAN J gates A 11-1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, to TP5 and the Frequency Comparison Circuits/Phase comparison circuits. A 11-1,2,3 is enabled by a logic 1 level to Al1-1.This level is present via energized operate relay Kl0. A logic 1 level, enabling All-8, 9,10, is produced by a logic 1 level to A11-13 (via Kl0) and a logic 0 level to A11-12 (from inactive A4). (4) TACHOMETER SIGNAL CIRCUITS - These circuits consist of partial gates A8 and A 10 and one-half of a divide-by-two circuit A9. The tachometer signal from the capstan motor is applied to the board at pin P2-7 and is inverted by ,(\8-9, 10, 11. The signal is then appl ied to a tape sync board connecotr, J 10, and to a tape motor detector lif'tNitch. The signal applied to J 10 may control the tape/tach select gate (selects either the tach signal or the tape signal, refer to tape signal circuits) on the tape sync board (optional feature), when supplied. When the tape sync board is not supplied, the signa! at J lOis jumpered to J 11 and applied to divide-by-circuit A9, at pin 11. This circuit functions as a divide-by-twocircuit only at 120 ips. The divided output is gated through A 10-9 and 8 to the phase comparison/frequency comparison circu its (A 12, A 13, A 14, etc) . At all speeds other than 120 ips, the divide-by-two circuit is disabled and the tachometer signal is gated through A 10-13 and 11 (no frequency division) to the phase comparison/frequency comparison circuits. The tape motion detector switch consists of 021,022, and associated circuitry. This switch circuit simply detects when the tachometer circuit is between 1000 and 1500 Hz. At this point 022 conducts allowing a path to ground for the low side of tape motion relay K5. With K5 energized, the recorder/reproducer's mode control circuitry is assured that tape is moving. (5) TAPE SIGNAL CI RCUITS (optional) - Refer to the tape sync board circuits in later portions of th is speed control section. (6) PHASE COMPARISON CIRCUITS (referto the waveforms in the test data section) - These circuits consist of function generator gates A 13 and A 14, constant cu rrent generators 03 through 010, clamp c ircu its Q 11 and 012, and operational intergrators A 17 and A lS. :::: : BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 The following discussion refers to the oscillator reference signal as the A" signal and the tape or tachometer reference signal as the "B" signal. II The two signals, A and B, are applied to the function generator; with four resultant outputs. The A signal is appl ied to A 13-·'0, 12, 13 and A 14-4, with the B signal applied to A 13-9, 1, 2 and A 14-1. The A and B'signals are NANDED to produce AS at A13-8. Each A and B signal is NAND ED separately to pro---;::".:£:r.duce A at A 13-11 and B at A 13-3. The A and Bare NANDED to produce AB at A 13-6. AS is produced at A14-3 by NANDING A an~, and AS is produced at A14-6 by NANDIf~ A and S. AS is produced at A 14-8 by inverting AS and AS is produced at A 14-11 by inverting AB. AS and AS, in conjunction with constant current drivers, provide the charging currents required by operational intergrators A 17 and A 18. AS and-AB, in conjunction with contant current drivers 07 through 010, provide the discharging currents required by operational intergrators A 17 and A 18. Each signal, when applied to either A 17-2 or A 18-2, is intergrated using the selected speed dependent capacitor, C3 through C14, resulting in a trapezoidal wave output at A 17-6 or A 18-6. The selected capacitor determines the charg~ime and thus the rise angle and the dc voltage level reached before the charging time is shut-off by the AS input signal (A 17) circuit. The ~[(A 17 circuit) signa! discharges the capacitor proportional to the charge rate. AS with clamp 011 and ArX with 012 is used to clamp the outputs to a 0 level until the beginning of the next trapezoidal wave. This 0 level is also adjustable by R40 (A 18) and R43 (A7). The Two trapezoidal waveforms, 1800 out of phase, are summed through potentiometer R45 and inverted and amplified by A20 to develop a dc level proportional to the phase relationship of the A and B signals. Gain adjustments R52 and R50 vary the gain of A20. R52 is used alone in the tape sync mode, with R50 and R52 used together in the capstan sync mode. The dc voltage level is applied to the mode gate circuitry through resistors R70 and R62. When a phase lock condition is attained as described in the later frequency comparison circuit paragraph, transistor Q14 is "turned off" and the de voltage is amplified at A21. The output is applied to a stablization filter network, energized relay K 10 and an emitter follower circu it to the capstan power amp Iifier. (7) FREqUENCY COMPARISON CIRCUITS - These circuits consist of frequency/phase lock detector A 12, optional amplifier A 19, select gating circu its Q 13 through Q 16, phase lock switch Q 19 and A 15, and gate A 16. The A and B signals from TP5 and TP6 are applied to A 12-1 and 3, respectively. When FWD is depressed on the Operators Control Panel and tape starts to move, the B signal begins to increase in frequency. With the B frequency lower than A (frequency coming up to speed), the output at A 12-13 goes to a logic o level. This signal, when applied through A 19, provides negative puises at TP12. These pulse, when applied through A21, etc., to the capstan, increase tape speed. When the B signal frequency increases past the A signal frequency (over speed), the output at A 12-2 goes to a logic 0 level. This signal, when inverted by A 19, provides positive pulses at TP12. These pulses, when applied through A21, etc., to the capstan, decrease tape speed. These de levels produce capstan motion until a phase lock condition mode gate circu it selects the de level from the phase comparison circu its. i~ obtained. At this point the BU LLETIN NO. 3604-4 The mode gate circu it is controlled by Q 19, A 15, and A 16, Q 19 and A 15 accept the AB and A"B 5igiflals from the function generator (TP7 and 8). A logic 1 level is produced at A 15-7 when the A and B signal match, producing phase lock. R94 is provided for adjustment of the phase lock point. This level is NANDED, at A16-2 and 1, with the logic lleve! from A8-11 (present during all modes except FAST), producing a logic O~evel to 018 preventing conduction. This action produces +5 Vdc to P2-20 {squelch) inhibiting the servo squelch function to the F M reproduce bds (outputs will not be squelched during phase lock). Squelch switch S1, when depressed, places a continuous logic 0 level to the base of 0.18. This allows an FM reproduce board output during STOP or other non-phase lock modes. The logic 0 level at A 16-3 is also NANDED by A 16-4,5,6, to produce a logic 1 level at A 16-6. This logic 1 level, present during phase lock, is applied to 015 causing conduction of 0. 15, 0. 16, and 0. 13, along with inhibiting 0. 14. With 0. 13 conducting, the output of the inverting amplifier at A 19-6 is shorted to ground. With 0.14 "off" the output of the phase comparison circuits, at A20-6, is allowed to control cap· stan motion via the amplification and acceleration circuits. The logic 1 level output at A 16-6 is also applied to the base of 0.20, causing conduction. This action energizes Kg causing the capstan sync lamp to lite. (8) AMPLIFICATION AND ACCELERATION CIRCUfTS - The input to A21 at pin 2, whether from A 19 or A20, is inverted and appl ied through the stablizatiofi network, consisting of C18, C19, R65, R66, R67, and R68, to relay K 1O. When K10 is energized, this de tevel is applied through emitter follower 0.17 and P1-8 to the capstan power amplifier and capstan motor. The acceleration control circuits consist of C26, C27, and related components. In a STOP mode, capacitors C26 and C27 are charged with +28 volts via the capstan motor feedback from the capstan power amp I ifier. Upon depressing the FWD or REV pushbuttons, the +28 volts instantaneously drops and is . coupled to the base of transistor, 0.17, to reduce the output at the emitter. As capacitor C26 discharges, transistor, 017 is allowed to conduct as the frequency and phase comparison circuits require. The reel drive circuits perform a similar action through capacitor C27 when tape motion begins as does the capstan. Th is action is necessary to retard speed changes of the capstan motor to allow time for the reel drive motors to gain sufficient angular velocity so that tape spilling does not occur. (b) TEST DATA Step 1. Place the capstan board on its extender, apply power, and depress STOP. Enusre with an oscilloscope, or voltmeter, the presence of the following approximate indications between the indicated point and TP4 (10), during the proper mode. Refer to the capstan board component location diagram for location of pins and testpoints. NOTE A logic 1 level is considered +3.7Vdc ±1.3 Vdc and a logic o level is considered +0.3 Vdc ±O.3 Vdc. = BULLETIN NO. 36044 (1) POVVER AND CONTROL INDICATION POINT INDICATION MODE TP1 STOP +12 Vdc approx. TP2 STOP +5 Vdc approx. TP30 STOP -12 Vdc approx. Pl-15 STOP +5 Vdc approx. Pl-14 STOP +10 Vdc approx. Pl-3 +28 Vdc approx. FWD or REV Pl-2 +28 Vdc approx. REV P2-15 STOP (density set to HI) +5 Vdc approx. P2-15 STOP (density set to LO) o Vdc approx. P2-4 STOP - tape speed 120 ips. +5 Vdc approx.* P2-5 STOP - tape speed 60 ips. Pl-22 STOP- tape speed 30 ips. +5 Vdc approx. * * +5 Vdc approx. * Pl-23 STOP - tape speed 15 ips. +5 Vdc approx.* P2-l STOP - tape speed 7 1/2 ips. +5 Vdc approx. * Pl-21 STOP - tape speed 3 3/4 ips. +5 Vde approx. * P2-3 STOP - tape speed 1 7/8 ips. +5 Vdc approx. * P2-2 STOP - tape speed 15/16 ips. +5 Vde approx. * ** * With each individual speed line activated, all other speed lines should be grounded. **Optional Speed. (2) REFERENCE OSCILLATOR AND FREQUENCY PREPARATION CIRCUITS INDICATION POINT MODE INDICATION P2-6 FWD orREV TP5 FWD (switching through speeds) Logic 0 level SPEED (ips) FREQ.(kHz) 120 100 60 100 30 50 15 25 71/2 12.5 3 3/4 6.25 1 7/8 3.125 15/16 1.562 BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 INDICATION POINT (CONT.) INDICATION MODE FWD (switching through speeds, either density) SPEED (ips) P2-16 FREQ. (kHz) HI LO 120 400 200 60 200 100 30 100 50 15 50 25 7 1/2 25 12.5 33/4 12.5 1 718 15/16 6.250 6.25 3.125 3.125 1.562 P2-6 FAST logic 1 level TP5 FAST 267 kHz (3) TACHOMETER REFERENCE CIRCUITS INDICATION POINT INDICATION MODE P2-7 STOP (turning capstan by hand) a squarewave (output of tach on capstan motor) P2-7 FWD (any speed) a well defined squarewave (adjustable by potentiometer on capstan) P2-8 FWD or REV a Vdc approx. P2-9 FWD (switching through speeds) same as P2-16 in previous paragraph (2), except 120 ips is 200 kHz TP6 FWD (switching through speeds) same as TP5 in previous paragraph (2), P2-8 FWD OVdc (4) FREQUENCY/PHASE COMPARISON CIRCUITS NOTE Adjustment per the checkout and adjustments in the maintenance section of the Operator's Data bulletin should a/ways be attempted prior to trying to obtain these indications. : :: BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Depress FWD and move tape at 33/4 ips. Ensure, with an oscilloscope, the foliowing waveforms, or approximates, between the indicated point (hi) and TP4 (Io). All waveforms are at a frequency of approximately 6.25 kHz. INDICATION POINT INDICATION TP5 A TP6 S I I A13-11 y;: A13-3 B I A14-6 AS A14-3 AS lJ I I I I U I I A14-8 -1J LI U * u-U I I .A.s -Jl--++- A14-11 AS H I I -A13-6 AS A13-8 AS 0.4 Vdc TP9 o Vdc TP10 o Vdc 0.4 Vdc I I --til ~ 20 J1 sec. r I * These indicated waveforms are at logic 1 levels (+3.7 Vdc ±1.3 Vdc) and Logic 0 Levels (+0.3 Vdc ±0.3 Vdc). c := - 27 r==: BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 CAPSTAN BOARD 836248 Al A2 A3. A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 Al0 A 11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 510118-002 859520-053 859520-029 859520-028 859520-020 859520-001 510376-036 859520-001 859520-020 859520-001 859520-001 510387 859520-001 859520-001 510339-002 859520-001 510240-002 thru A21 Cl C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 Cl0 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 1iJ ~((Wil!1> '\(\\\~\' '\1\ \ \\ I I!;:/ 859959-002 329157-001 691391-008 691391-009 691391-033 859775-021 859959-002 859959-002 859959-002 859775-017 859775-017 854555-026 854555-026 854555-014 854555-014 854555-010 854555-010 276212-450 276212-450 276212-200 276212-200 198816-621 198816-621 198816-561 198816-561 854555-116 691391-011 854555-116 691686-027 854555-127 854555-127 859775-021 J5 J14 K1 K6 K7 K8 Kl0 C41 859959-002 C42 859959-002 CRl 844510 thru 510388-001 855130-004 thru MP Pl 859959-002 510388-002 thru C39 C40 836268 thru thru P2 01 854220 (22 used) 853518 853518 854540 thru 06 07 854539 thru CR4 CR5 ~m)E ~&«~~ c==: Ii Ch. 1 8-73 ~~ 3 22K CR2 lN753A NSION ASSY .114-23 2BV MOUNTED ON HEATS1NK-- C4 R6 HETUR,N f'ROMW2 r - - - - I RIO ~ CR5 !N4Y37 RI2 + C2 1.0 15V R3 21K , CW R7 3.3K + I +--_____-t__ -'P::;/-,,/B~ GAIN cw C5 2.2 35~ R9 4.1K .,. RIO 2.0 2.0 21W 21W TO 1 ~g~~~~~ATION FOnWAAO ./14-21 R_;"~ I2.RIVE BOARD AI4 Figure 7. Reel Drive System Overall Schematic and Board Component Location c=================_==:======::=_=_=======::~~ 45 BULLETI N NO. 3604-4 PARTS REMOVABLE/REPLACEMENT DATA· This section contains information to aid in the removal/ replacement of certain mechanical and electromechanical parts pertinent to the tape transport. F'1eference may be made to the rear of this bulletin for mechanical parts listing. a.•CABINET REMOVAL Step 1. Remove the side panels on the upper left and right sides of the cabinet. The panel on the right side simply pulls loose and is lifted out. The panel on the left is released by a fastener and is I ifted out. Step 2. Open the side doors by unscrewing the panel fasteners and pulling open. Step 3. Remove the fuse located on the Power and Control Connector Panel, Step 4. With a Phillips screwdriver, remove the seven screws on the left and right edges of the front of the transport and the four screws at the rear of the transport (one at each rear corner). Step 5. Slide the cabinet back gently and remove while firmly holding the transport. NOTE Much of the maintenance, cleaning, board removal, etc., may be accomplished by removing only the rear and top access panels of the cabinet. For certain assemblies and overall maintenance, the removal of the entire cabinet may be necessary. b. BOARD AND REPLACEMENT - To remove any mode control, speed control, reel drive, or other transport associated board or subassembly, ALWAYS ENSURE POWER IS OFF. Rocking of the board against its jack, may be necessary to start movement of the board from its jack. To replace the board, align the guide pins of the board with the associated guides on the board jack. Reference may be made to the General Information Bulletin photo's concerning board locations. c. CAPSTAN MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1. CAPSTAN MOTOR REPLACEMENT Step 1. Remove the cabinet (or remove the top and rear access panels) capstan board front door, and both reels, including tape. Step 2. Discon_nect the lead harness to the capstan motor. Note the orientation and terminal connection of each wire. Step 3. Lay the entire transport face down. Step 4. Remove the three mounting screws holding the motor assembly to the tape transport. Note the location of each shim between the motor mounting plate and the tape transport. Do not disturb these shims. , '" BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Step 5. Remove the four mounting screws holding the mounting plate to the face of the motor. Remove the mounting plate from the motor and install the mounting plate on the face of the new capstan motor using the same four screws. Step 6. Insert the capstan motor into position and use the three mounting screws, removed in Step 4/ to tighten in place. Ensure the sh ims are in the same position. Tape will not track if the shims are not properly located. Step 7. Connect the lead harness to the terminals noted in Step 2. Refer to figure 8 various motor wiring. Step 8. Reinstall the capstan board. Step 9. Thread a tape on the recorder/reproducer and place it in an OPERATE mode to determine if the tape will track. If tape does not, recheck the tocation of the shims. Step 10. Reinstall the cabinet (or access panels) and front door. "...., COR ~ TERMINAL TO BALDWIN b857362} WIRE COL R TB2-3 BLACK BLACK BLACK TB2-4 RED WHITE WHITE TB2-5 GRAY GRAY GRAY TB2-6 YELLOW WHITE RED TB2-7 PURPLE BLACK BLACK TBl-5 'ORANGE RED RED DRC (835800) SEQUENTIAL (857363) WIRE COLOR WIRE COLOR - - -LAMP --- ,..... TACH ':r' CAPSTAN MOTOR ASSEMBLY A2l - TBl-6 BLUE GREEN GREEN TBl-7 WHITE BLACK BLACK TBl-8 TBl-4 BROWN GRAY WHITE GRAY WHITE GRAY Figure 8. Capstan Motor Wiring Variations 48 cr'============================~)' BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 2. CAPSTAN MOTOR BRUSH REPLACEMENT Step 1. Gain access to the Capstan motor and remove the four brush retaining screws. Refer to figure 9. Step 2. With a small screwdriver work the end of each brush and tension spring loose, and remove. Step 3. Insert each new brush and tension spring, ensuring they are positioned with the concave surface aligned with the armature. Step 4. Align the tension spring and metal tip completely inside the brush holder and replace the brush retaining screws. TACHOMETER LAMP MOUNTING SCREW Figure 9. Capstan Motor, Disassembled 3. CAPSTAN MOTOR TACHOMETER LAMP REPLACEMENT Step 1. Gain access to the Capstan motor and remove the two screws securing the metal cover to the motor end opposite the capstan. 51 ide the cover off, gaining access to the inner components. 'CAUTION Exercise extreme caution when sliding the tachometer leads through the grommet in the metal cover. Step 2 Remove the tachometer lamp mounting screw, with an Allen wrench, and remove the lamp assembly, including leads, from the mounting position. 49 BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Step 3. Insert the new lamp assembly into the mounting position and replace the mounting screw. Do not tighten. Step 4. Mon itor, with an oscilloscope, the output of the capstan motor tachometer at TB 1-6. Step 5. Apply POWER and, with tape properly threaded, depress STOP and FORWARD. Prior to completely tightening the tachometer Lamp mounting, position the mounting to provide maximum tachometer output amplitude, as measured with the oscilloscope. Step 6. Remove POWER and replace the metal cover, ensuring all leads and grommets are positioned properly. d. PINCH ROLLER ASSEMBLY 1. PINCH ROLLER AND BEARING REPLACEMENT (refer to figure 10) Step 1. Remove the head cover and the screw securing the pinch roller. Step 2 Slide the pinch roller assembly from the pinch roller shaft. Remove the spacer and retaining ring from inside of the roller assembly and remove the bearing. Discard the pinch roller ball bearing, if worn. Step 3. Insert the bearing into the end of the pinch roller that has the recessed notch for the retaining ring. Insert the retaining ring so the retaining ring clips DO NOT touch the bearing shield. The stamped numbers on the retaining ring are to face the bearing shield. Step 4. Slide the pinch roller onto the shaft and insert the spacer - small diameter - towards the bearing. Replace the securing screw. GUIDE _~~_ ::tJ_~l~R WASHER SECURING SCREW SHAFT ASSEMBLY RETAINING RING ROLLER ASSEMBLY BEARING Figure 10. Shaft and Pinch Roller Assembly BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 2. PINCH ROLLER SOLENOID Rt;PLACEMENT (refer to figure 11) Step 1. Remove the cabinet or the top and rear access panels. Step 2. Remove the capstan board, terminal boardTB2, and tag and disconnect all leads from TB2. Step 3. Disconnect the lever assemblies from their pivot arms by loosening the locking nut next to the elongated nut, and turning the adjustment tape (the entire threaded rod turns) counterclockwise. Step 4. Remove the four screws (two on each side of the solenoids) holding the solenoid mounting bracket to the transport, and move the entire assembly free. Step 5. With the assembly free, remove the retaining ring holding the pivot arm to the bracket. With this removed the arm assembly should slide away from the solenoid. Step 6. Remove the four screws holding the solenoid and slide it free of the entire bracket. Step 7. Place the new solenoid in position and replace the four mounting screws; Step 8. Place the lever assembly back into bracket and replace .~he retaining ring. Step 9. Replace the entire solenoid mounting bracket and secure it to the transport with the four mounting screws removed in Step 5. Step 10. Remove tags, reconnect the solenoid leads, and replace terminal board TB2 and the capstan . . NOTE, The pinch roller pressure adjustment procedures in the checks and adjustments section of the Operators Data bulJetin must be following after replacing either or both'solenoids. l l RIGHT PINCH ROLLER FINAL ADJUSTMENT LEFT PINCH. ROLLER SOLENOID TERMINAL _ _ __ BOARD TB2 PIVOT ARMS RIGHT PINCH ROLLER SOLENOID LEFT PINCH ROLLER FINAL ADJUSTMENT Figure 11. Pinch Roller Solenoid ,Mounting Details C=::==:=:=================:J1 51 =============::::::JI C=:=! ~Iii~~ BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 e. REEL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 1. TENSION ARM SPRING REPLACEMENT (refer to figure 12) Step 1. F;emove the cover from the tension arm assembly. Step 2 Remove the spring securing screw, with a small Phillips screwdriver, while holding the multi-leaf spring with needle nose pliers. l NOTE Use extreme care when screw is completely removed. Spring will relax causing screw to possible fly free of assembly. Step 3. Remove old spring and place new spring in relaxed position. With screw replaced and partially tightened, stretch spring into correct position. Completely tighten screw. Step 4. 'Replace the tension arm assembly cover. 2. PHOTOCELL ASSEMBL Y REPLACEMENT (refer to figure 12) Step 1. Remove cover from tension arm assembly. Step 2. Note, tag and unsolder the four leads connected to the photocell assembly. Step 3. Remove the one adjustment screw and lift the photocell assembly out. Step 4. Install the new photocell assembly with the adjustment screw removed in Step 3. Step 5. Align the photocell assembly by lining the two screws on the assembly with the center of tension arm hub. Step 6. Replace tension arm assembly cover. , 3. MICROSWITCH REPLACEMENT (refer to figure 12) Step 1. Remove the tape tension arm cover and remove the two screws that hold the microswitch in position. Step 2. Unsolder the wires from the microswitch. Step 3. Solder the wires onto the new microswitch and remount in position. Step 4. Tighten the two screws and ensure that the microswitch is activated when the tension arm is at its extreme rest position. -. :: BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 PHOTOCELL AND LAMP ASSEMBLY '~-""'y'-'-,;'7_ :'i;t-;;'--'-""";"';;'--':7- TENSION ARM WITH TAPE GUIDE ROLLER M IC ROSWITCH Figure 12. Tension Arm and Photocell Assembly f. INERTIA DAMPENING ROLLER AND BEARING REPLACEMENT (refer to figure 13) Step 1. Remove the head cover. Step 2. Remove the two screws at the base of the roller and remove the roller. Do not lose the two wavy washers behind the roller shaft. Step 3. If the C!omplete roller assembly is being replaced, reinstall the two wavy washers behind the shaft assembly and reinstall the roller using the screws removed. Step 4. To replace the bearings, remove the retaining ring and washer and any spacers supplied. Step 5. Slide the roller off the shaft. Remove the worn bearings and replace with a new set as was removed. Step 6. Reinstall the washer, spacers and retaining ring removed in Step 4. Step 7. Reinstall the inertia roller using the two wavy washers removed in S~ep 2. BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 BE.A.RING BEARING ROLLER ASSEMBLY • ROLLER BASE Figure 13. Inertia Roller g. RECORD AND REPRODUCE HEA.D ASSEMBLIES R EPL;().CEMENT (refer to figure 14) 1. RECORD HEAD REPLACEMENT AND ALIGNMENT Step 1. Remove the head cover. Remove the head shield located between the reproduce and record heads. Step 2. Remove the two head mounting screws, located between the upper and lower head stacks. CAUTION Do not touch the jack screws at the base of the head on the head mounting pad. Step 3. Unplug the head lead harness from connector and remove head from recorder/reproducer. Step 4. Mount the new record head using the screws removed in Step 2. Be sure to place the record head tight against t~e head alignment guide block. Step 5. Plug the head lead harness into the connector. CAUTION Handle the head lead harness with care to prevent damage to the leads at the head. 54 BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 NOTE The following steps are provided for head alignment when required. REPRODUCE HEADS INERTIA ROLLER AZIMUTH ADJUSTMENTS PREAMP BOARD(S) RECORD HEADS EMITTER FOLLOWER BOARDS HEAD MOUNTING SCREWS REPRODUCE HEADS PINCH ROLLER ASSYS Figure 14. Tape Head Mounting Details Step 6. Select the two outside tracks (opposite ends) on the same head stack. Step 7. Connect a signal generator, set at 1.0 vrms, to the inputs of both tracks at the input connector on the Record Connector Panel. Use properly cal ibrated direct record boards, refer to the Direct Record Bulletin. Install jumper boards in the reproduce chassis for the correct channels. Step 8. Connect a dual trace oscilloscope to the output BN.C connectors on the Reproduce Connector Panel for the proper channels. Step 9. Thread tape on the recorder/reproducer and place the Tape Speed Selector to the 60 ips position. Step 10. Depress the POWER, STOP, RECORD and FORWARD pushbuttons. BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Step 11. Sweep the generator over 10 kHz to 100 kHz for wideband heads or 10 kHz to 40 kHz for intermediate band heads and observe the signals on the oscilloscope. Step If the time relationship is not correct, adjust the two outside jack screws on the mounting pad slightly, until the two signals coincide. J CAUTION The head mounting pads are prealigned at the factory and should only be changed with extreme care and only when necessary. Step 13. Repeat the above procedures with the opposite record head stack, striving for a compromise between the two stacks. Compromise being the position of the head which provides the best possible signal time relationships for both head stacks. Step 14. Remove power and test equipment. (b) REPRODUCE HEAD REPLACEMENT AND ALIGNMENT Step 1. Remove the head cover. Remove the head shield located between the record and reproduce heads. Step 2. Unplug the preamplifier board(s) from their connector{s) (newer models). Older models require unpluging the head lead harness from the connector and the preamp power leads from the preamp power supply. Step 3. Remove the two head mounting screws located between the upper and lower head stacks. Carefully remove the head assembly including the attached preamp assembly (Wideband only). Step 4. Normally reproduce heads and preamps are both replaced as one assembly. If this is not the case the preamp assemblies must be disconnected from the old heads and connected to the new head. Step 5. Install the new reproduce heads, including the preamp assemblies, with the two screws removed in Step 3. Be sure to place the reproduce head tight against the head alignment blocks. Plug the preamplifier board(s) into their connector(s) (newer models) or plug the head lead harness into its connector (older models). CAUTION VVith the reproduce head assembly removed the head mounting pads and jack screws are visible and accessible. These are aligned at the factory and are not to be tzimpered with. NOTE The following steps will correctly align the heads if required. BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Step 6. Select the two outside tracks (opposite ends) on the same head stack. Step 7. Thread tape on the recorder/reproducer. Step 8. Connect a signal generator, set a 1.0 vrmSj to the inputs of both tracks at the input connector on the Record Connector Panel. Refer to the previous Step 7 in record head alignment. Step 9. Connect a dual track oscilloscope to the output BNC connectors on the Reproduce Connector Panel for the proper channels. Step 10. Place the TAPE SPEED SELECTOR in the 60 ips position. Step 11. Sweep the generator over 10 kHz to 100 kHz for Wideband heads or 10 kHz to 40 kHz for intermediate band heads and observe the signals on the oscilloscope. Step 12 If the time relationship is not correct,. for wide band heads, adjust the two azimuth adjustment screws located between the reproduce head stacks, slightly until the two signals coincide. For intermediate band heads adjust the two outside jack screws on the mounting pad, slightly until the signals coincide. Step 13. Repeat the above proced.ures with the opposite head stack, striving for a compromist between the two stacks. Compromise being the position of the head which provides the best possible signal time relationships for both head stacks. Step 14. (Wideband only). Apply 1.0 vrms signal at ,- MHz individually to each of the four outside tracks of each stack. Monitor individually and adjust azimuth for peak out of each channel. Strive for compromise between all fOur channels. Step 15. Remove the test equipment. h. TAPE WIDTH CHANGE 1. ONE INCH TO ONE-HALF INCH CHANGE r Step 1. Loosen the allen screws on the outside collar of the guide roller shafts. Slide the collar in to measure one-half inch from the inside collar and tighten the allen screws. Remove the pinch rollers and their spacers (behind the pinch rollers). Step 2 Place the pinch rollers back on their shafts and Step 3. Loosen the allen screws on the outside end of the tape tension arm. Remove the one inch guide rollers and replace with new one half inch guide rollers. Step 4. Insert the three stops into theholes located 1200 apart on the reel drive hub to accommodate the one-half inch tape reels. Step 5. Replace the one inch record and reproduce heads with new one-half inch heads, as described in record and reproduce head assemblies procedures. 57 pl~ce the spacers on the outside. BU LLETI N NO. 3604-4 2. ON°E-HALF INCH TO ONE INCH CHANGE Step 1. Loosen the allen screws on the outside collar of the guide roller shafts. Slide the collar out to measure one inch from the inside collar and tighten the allen screws. Step 2. R,emove the pinch rollers and their spacers (outside). Place the spacers on their shafts and replace the pinch rollers (spacers behind pinch rollers). Step 3. Loosen the allen screws on the outside end of the tape tension arm. Remove the one-half inch guide rollers and replace with new one inch guide rollers. Step 4. Remove the three stops located 1200 apart on the reel drive hubs to accomodate the one inch tape reels. Step 5. Replace the onCL-half inch record and reproduce heads with new one inch heads as described in the record and reproduce head assemblies replacement procedures. i. ASSEMBLY REFERENCE DESIGNATION AND MECHANICAL PARTS LIST 1. ASSEMBLY NUMBERS - The following is a list of the standard basic assembly numbers. All of the listed assemblies may not be present on anyone machine. Unit - Transport Al Tension Arm Assembly (lower) Photocell & Lamp Assembly A2 Al Tension Arm Assembly (upper) Photocell & Lamp Assembly A3 Switch Assembly (Forvvard, Stop, Thread) Al A4 Switch Assembly (Reverse, Fast, Record) A5 Capstan Power Amplifier A6 Al DC to DC Converter Assembly DC to DC Converter Board A7 Preamp Power Supply A8 Capstan Motor Assembly A9 Reel Drive Motor and Hub A10 Logic Board A12 Capstan A Board A13 Tape Sync Board A14 Ree! Drive Board A15 Record Connector Panel* A16 Reproduce Connettor Panel * A17 Power and Control Connector Panel A18 Al-A7 or Al-A 14 Preamp Chassis Preampl ifiers A19 Al-A14 Record Chassis Direct and/or FM Record Boards Bias Board Voice Record Board ° A15 A16 A17 Record Connector Board .. Connector Panel refers to the BNC panels used for si!]nal and power connections. Connector Board refers to the etched circuit board on which the printed circuit board jacks are mou !'ted. BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Unit 1 - Transport (Cont.) A20 Al-A14 A16 ~17 A18 Reproduce Chassis Director FM 3 sp. or 7 Sf). Reproduce Boards Voice Reproduce Board Reproduce Connector Board Phase Equalizer Board A2l Accessory Kit (Extender Boards, Grease, etc.) A22 Voice Kit A26 FM Density Change Kit Unit 2 - Power Supply Al Al A2 A2 Regulator Module/Bridge Assembly Regulator Module Bridge Network Control Amplifier Board Unit 3 - Auxiliary Chassis Al-A 14 A15 A16 Direct and/or F M 3 sp. or 7 sp. Reproduce Boards Connector Board Connector Panel Unit 4 - Remote Control Panel 2. MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS - The following list contains selected mechanical parts listed by name anq cross referenced to the Sangamo part number. Description Sangamo Part No. Record Head Assy See Head Sheet Reproduce Head Assy See Head Sheet Tension Arm Assy (Parts of) Lower 857225 300699-018 808561 855864 300027 855851 855876 857232 300699-018 808561 856629 300027 855868 855876 Main Hub Securing "E" Ring Washer Vane Bearing Bushing Spring Tension Arm Assy (Parts of) Upper Main Hub Securing HE" Ring Washer Vane Bearing Bushing Spring 1" Tension Arm (upper or lower) Roller Assy Complete (1" Tape Kit) Shaft Cap Roller Bearing Spacer W:!~her 855879 855856 855858 855857 657506 880429 852987 Description Sangamo Pai"t No. 1/2" Tension Arm (upper or lower) roller Assy Complete (1/2" Tape Kit) 856458 856455 Shaft 856456 Cap Roller 856454 Bearing 657506 Spacer 856457 Washer 852987 Shaft and Pinch Roller Assy (parts of) 857096 Guide Collars 855839 Set Screw 899628 Pinch Roller Assy 835018 Bearing 897174 Retaining Ring 655920 Spacer 857328 Cap Roller 857131 Pinch Roller Splenoid 857094 Inertia Dampening Roller Complete 855003-002 Bearing 846745 \/\asher 855010-008 Grip Ring 850942 Roller Assy 855004-002 Reel Drive Inner Hub 853451 BULLETIN NO. 3604-4 Outer Hub 856373 Footage Counter Roller 857239 Bearing . Snap Ring 657506 850942 "0" Ring Footage Counter Meter 835008·001 Front Door Cover 836061 Capstan Motor "D.R.C." Brushes Tach Lamp Assy 857098 835800 867624 836534 Capstan Motor "Baldwin" 857362 Brushes 836443 Tach Lamp Assy 836442 Capstan Motor "Sequential" Brushes Tach Lamp Assy 857363 867624 or 855218-001 867615 DIAGRAMS The following is a list of transport diagrams contained at the rear of this bulletin. Remote Control Shorting Plug Wiring Diagram Remote Control Panel and Cable Wiring Diagram Record and Reproduce Head Wiring Diagrams Transport Wiring Diagram Sheets 1 and 2 Transport Overall Schematic * *The Transport Overall Schematic may be located in the pocket at the rear of the manual instead of the rear of this bulletin. Remote Control Shorting Plug Plug P1 complete 857260 Plug P1 (not wired) 854536-005 @ 0 G) (0 CD . @ (i) ® 0 ® PI (MATES WITH AI7JI) Remote Control Shorting Plug Wiring Diagram ( : := Unit 4 Remote Contra! Panel 857085 - Hand Held Model 857209 - Chassis Mounted Mode! 857222 - Mounted in Speak-Amp Enclosure Jl Al A1DS1 A1DS2 A2 A2DS1 A2DS2 854536-003 ~53539 898743 898743 853538 898743 898743 JI NOTE' THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLICABLE FOR: (I) HAND HELD REMOTE., (2) CHASSIS MOUNTED REMOTE,OR (3) REMOTE IN THE SPEAKER - AMPLIFIER ENCLOSURE. -51 ,..--51 ...,2 XDSIA ( I 03 XDSIB r-- S2 XDS2A C o~ 2' it XDS2B - - S3 XDS3A C: b o26 c~ o~ ~'tXDS3B XDS3A ( -r-XDS3B ~l o5~ -"-:;:-- !II~JIH LJIF AI A2 Remote Control Panel and Interconnecting Cable Wiring Diagram = 8570840TTL - 8517152 Remote Control Interconnecting Cable 857084 P 1 854536-005 P2 854537-003 ~----- P? ~0 B y --------O.!~1 G C. 8 BL BK 8K BK y ® rM--- 0. y R ®---~0- r---~~ R I BK @--- ~--- ~G) M ®--. w BK B ~~ £ ® jR) -0 RR w 'W' 6) R ~ r 81( 0 0 ~-~ f--~--@-- CONNECTOR o~ ~t -@ ® ~---JM _ ®- 0 f0 G 13K @ PI Q BI( B)( -- P- .B V T I (]) ® sr4,J'"37-Q03 @ @ <0 ® (£) • ® ® @ C-ONNEC- TO R 85"f53b-005 i X X N V :: 0 " <.> "" <.> 0:: f- 0:: f- <[ <[ " " " u" "~ 0 " u 0: .... f- <[ " 7 Channel ( % inch ) NOTE To obtain the head part number for the machine this man accompanied, refer to the head characteristics sheet locat. in the front of this manual. x N .,.x '"« U II:: l- i' :x- i: <0- eo Q '"rr« x U t- <.:> 4: e: I- " ~ rr .f- n'"u « It: l- I s: '"rr~ I- u ILl rr ttl ILl u g CHANNEL NO. 14 CHANNEL NO.2 VOICE CHANNEL A t PI ~SANGAMO PART NO. TRANSPORT SIDE VOICE CHANNEL B x "rr « U f- .:1: i: Of) 10 '"rr :cl " l- ~ rr t- .x i: '" "a::u« f- i' .:1: !2 '" u « oc l- " u -13 ~ 54-3 .s34·" ~-u.-. Sit MrE -clS-!'$' S.JI-S US-7A t05J_, A Gc.J(+ '----=PI-. '-----¥' p"-I< ' -_ _ _~·.,J4-R ' - - - - - - KOSI L--------Jm-~ . PI--H (u"." t.t FT ) II IDA_ SPEc 1079 0Ab~-------- £3-3 =~'>7/lff>l~iR<:-';;-;;;<---- t 1-1 No7"l!:: ,. A I IS SHowH ,. ARoUND 2. 5' AND AS50CIATEb KIT FA ON'" OF Til AN s,olir !tWA" VIE.W. A'''' HAt. BUH LO(.ATE DON ""'H~ PANE/... TUR,.&D NO. ,or "'-0 c.oNNE.c..T/O~S. SHoW' WIRING. WfRJIIC IS F'ART OF SHUTTLE 8357"Z. "TAPE '.H$~ S5"7l.41 A Pi:. AtATES WITH A200ll or !'tAt CII'AS.Sl.S o 5311-3 ---tQ;)liii\..L- 53A - 1 Main Transport Wiring Diagram, Sheet 1 C::::=::=========:::::J~~8~~) Sh • 836250-1 TTL Unit 1 M~in Transport CR1 CR4 CR5 OSl OS2 E1 thfu E3 J1 J3 J4 J5 J6 8964['8 891JA-58 896453 510377 510317 871885 854537-005 855977 854537-00~ 843724 853623 54 855107 R1 TBl TB2 TB3 TB4 XF1 XF2 XK2 Al ~11'1f e 5"4- 'StfO~r'NG 5"83 8 H977 54 85S 107 D~N 5/1"'1 691975008 859174,011 82¥926 856221 855221 853657 853657 857004 857004 ,897634 POW'£R" COl'TP>oL. c..oNN.£C--roA _ __ P..'I_N£ L 84-.5~_~~:- ___ _ 897581 - 853615-{)07 896190 899250 83S055-001 812299 812299 8i2385 851225 89BS07 85;,]232 898807 A2Al 855'874 A2A1R3 A5 A6 836259 "A29 ~L...L'G- 855:'156 855874 198200-471 A9 "'''''1'£5 853538 A1A1 A1A1R4 A2 A2S1 AS I, 856256 A1Sl A7 ~::~'" II 835~51 85HJ20 K2 l1 L2 P1 RtCORD CONNECTOR 835461 857317 853539 854549-001 J14 A\S 85102.0 89'>655 8913656 855644 857005 [ B1 F1 F2 J9 J10 --~ 510141-001 891634 851241 857055 A15J17 C1 'I 830077-003 856221 855721 853623 J7 J8 K1 K3 M1 P2 PU3 S3 thru S6 TP1 TP2 W1 VV2 XOS1 XOS2 XM1 A3 A30S1 thru A30S3 A4 A40S1 thru A4DS3 fr J17 J ,}-/6 t00200-471 835630, See Bulletin 854538-001 .. 8J5!'!OO 851363 8S6427 835571 * Present only with optional Photo End-of-Tape Sense feature, "OPTIONS: 857362; 857363 NOTE. : LooP IN r::..Aru.. £ IU.,iD£O II£~E. NoTE. : 1 AI-I.. , ~ "" ~ WIP,£ IS ltG-A. SPf.o:::. Z.lBS" UNL. • .50S o-rHEH'r,'/SE /NO/CArED "AID liS. FO/..J.(J'W~: COAX IS RrO.-J9~/U SP.fc.. Z.~50 £X·CFPT AS IHDJC.,,-rED IN NOTe II. M .. !. ""'-.,.II'Yr~D SH/~LDJ:.D wJlH IS sP.ec. t.HiS i WJJ'\E GAGE As I"o1.1.ows: 2.. ""UU: '-WIS,£D SjJ!J./"'DI.D A£D 9-GR£E.H /s ZOGA· z.1'tl~T£O SHIH.OJi.O IS Z4- "'/t. l. W/.AE TW/ST£D S)IIii.t..DE.D :t<.:,.:/'fs ... ;t l. AJ..1. "1 t.~~~ =- ... AJAJ HAS BEEN TURJI£lJ '~" ~.. s: ~ > ,. ...'" C L~ ;?~ ." WI ,Wi.. "'A!5 ,,1\£ II/fEA K DOWN PAR, NO. S.Ej£ ~ . "'''' "'...9 ~ "'''''" ..... . "EfD .'0 1 JC~.r JN4-3SS" B WIRING UN.(..£SS oTII£" wISE o!> ~\o "'" Q: o f S"'~£n B£L.OW FoR SPEED loIN£. £1 fEZ. "ND J/O. SPEED Sf-LEer ,,"0 J.ps it L.INE Q~10 ~i-ooz. J~ I -s r !/ -I z. ll-l. f J- 3 E. 1.- 3 vlo-eZ JIO- Z3 H-Z. ,}10-2/'--- 1 4 ~- CONNECTiONS. n. tl.l. }NPI(..A'TED /::Rr ~';.N~:~ ..~Z- ~1f~~/J~~iN'£~IDE =~~c.~:; souMc.E NO. 0,," ~ ./jJ.ii-r· iABlo-E f.£Tw£''- II' "'" ~" "" ::: '"" ~ '"......." Ie I:;; ;;J,r~£1'1 INsu1.ArEO FAoM -rill: TRA»S fcP.l· FoR PP.OP.EA INSUl~A'TORS. 8'lf;,. 45'8· 8. tl' ~~O"Tft ::\ '~T. :~ I~ ItAE NO. FRoM ,H£ ILf A". 9. Sl'EC. slJ,E£T FOP' PAAr NO· ~ :-v• ...L-J OleDES AROUND TO SJK.)W I'M", $££ ~ ~< U J1.JJ81J'JJIO!JI4 ~~f. 1. AL.L -JI ~-J SIDE AP.J. ,MOtfIlO,'T£D WJ"TH BLA<"K "t.Z (i,A WJJll SPEC.· zz..es. 4- AI 15 UX:.ATED ON TilE FRONT OF TRANSPORT FIiNEL SflOWN IN CUT AIV;~r ;'IEW • 3.SJIJ£J.DS =:J ,,,- coMPON£IJ-rS ,-RE Y'EW.~D FAD"" W!lIINc,.. ANO WH~P.E orHE./{W1SE INDIGAT£D. "l13,RJ S£LEf:.. ToR D'ltt. C.ONNE<.,loH S .-'5ii] DIAL __. I 11-0 I P-::. ~. 7 0.i.,.S- 001j J9- 4 ~J3-5 J'!;J- 1 ASSY. --':!!£- 2 2 I _._~ .)/1)- Z 3 J I ,)9-1 1 ~--t~ ~~=i. ~-=£..-.J 1 .. ') II).WHERE WJ1IiJNG- Q~. II. AISoll? 1.5 TN( fUCORD PHo'ToEL.£C.-r1<.. END of -rAPE SE,N5E·,5 iN, SUPPLJ£D, sj4ouL.lJ 11£ liED 8A"K }or LltMP 1- PHOTo 5£NSif ENDS· WIRED ... ...." AND CONNECTOR CO.... x SPEC. 2JS!I LEFT lZ. THE. WLRe:. ~eFe:~~ce:.D Q UNATTAC}I£IJ ON THIS ASS!' AS ~Af ,W 836250-1 TT L 85"70~4 J3 CAFS TAN !30AfW LI flNt.H lioLL. NO. I JIO CAPS iAN BOARD Nor, : Al IS Loc/tTZO oN "T'J;1. 'Aa,..,- or ,1l,\N5i'cRr fANt-.L SH"WN 1\1 c.u, AwAY V/lW. At-AI HA~ }JtPN ,uJ'J N£D .Al\ouND TO 5Ho'N W}~JN(P CoN N£c.rJQr.ls. A c::: UPPER TEN.Sti)N ASSY IIL O~VO .. T.5 ________ _ o T/t1'1!: St.NS£ pos r Ai!. 9 ~~ ,-I VI , I )~: __ -1 Transport Overall Schematic ,. :: BULLETIN NO. 3653-1 RECORD CHASSIS GENERAL This bulletin contains information pertaining to the record chassis employed with this recorder/reproducer. The record chassis houses all the record electronics utilized with this recorder/reproducer. Also provisions are normally made for housing of the voice or edge track record board and bias oscillator board. Due to certain circuit component requirements on the record boards, +12 Vdc input to the chassis must be applied to the boards after -12 Vdc is applied. This is accomplished with the use of a time delay relay circuit, K 1. A printed circuit board, with jacks mounted, provide the appropriate wiring for each record board. The input signal connections are provided by BNC connectors on the record connector panel. OPERATING DATA a. CONTROLS z- No effective controls are located on this chassis. b. BOARD PLACEMENT - Standard board arrangement should conform to Figure 1. . Ch. 1 Ch. 2 Ch. 8 Ch.9 Ch. 10 Ch. 11 Ch. 12 Ch. 13 Ch. 14 Ch. 3 Ch. 4 Ch. 5 Ch.6 Cil. 7 BIAS Voice or Edge Track Figure 1. Board Placement Diagram, Front View I. ,------ /\ 19 Hecorcl Chassis 835135 Jl 897633 J2 843734 K1 855130-002 XK1 835327 A 1917 Record Conrjector Board (upper & lower) 856999 C1 851139-007 thru C4 896477 C5 thru C18 Jl 855894 thru C'" ~5 CONIIECTOR -P;,7JVEL L ________________ _ J16 85"7076 /1/5 Record Connector Panel Jl 855971 thru J16 J17 Not Used J18 843734 (used only with monitor kit, 835460) NOTES: 1. All references off A 15J 18 are prefixed with A 19A 17. ( I 0 #OT£: 835"327 XKI fiLL REFERENCES OFF c/1"J2! PI?£FIXED WITH /i'/9/i'I1. J4-Z3 J fI- i!.3 J4-1 J4 <14-9 <111- 9 f XKI fiRE Ie. BK _0-cJJI-J V I I I ! I +/1'V P5. 'GAlL) . J 1 e :1 Y-11 rGA'L4- C/8t / C/9 .1-i-cn oluF I __. . . PI_I ~>-=a:J~_-4t-_-I )-av rr/,(,. nJ I/) /ur ,_o/_Qr +I,ZV :!: @ TPI _ -!.'''lV A- BULLETIN NO. 3609-1 eR2. TP3 .81115 TtllVE /?7 L/ ~~------~#'~/-4P~/6 )P/-15 TO II£RLJ IOO..A.. 10 C7 7,s,PF' 12:/2 :/2. /OUH ____ ~r---------~----~c~ . lI .o~ oO UF ' /f21 H20 -L! CIS ~OUrr---~'-------------O---~ 150-,,- Cf4 ...-----+-----------4___---------I~+-----l !l.Z//F 9 RE.COR£> RDdUST H2.5 ~>&-------...---r;r--lI-'---0N'v.----e1>---'--T--n-)~---4)P/-.2 :~~ HI5 4/-'70-,,- PI R23 ell 1- 56//F -1-70........ _ '@ Ir~ TO VLI METER - NEe - LEV elL HI7 /2.X /SOUF + - . Figure 3. Direct Record Board, Schematic Diagram 9 BULLETIN NO. 3643·1 FM RECORD GENERAL This bulletin contains information on the FM record board operating and servicing procedures. The information consists of characteristics, operating data, theory of operation, maintenance, parts list, anel diagrams. The FM record board is utilized to frequency modulate the carrier frequency with the input data signal, amplify it, and apply it to the tape record head. The carrier frequency is automatically selected by the TAPE SPEED SELECTOR, on the Operator's Control Panel, for each individual tape speed. • Figure 1. FM Record Board c========================:=:'~ 1 C - :: HULLETIN NO. 3643-1 J QIB FM record boards are located in the record chassis and are easily accessible from the front of the !llachine. CHARACTERISTICS Nomina! I nput Level • Power Requirements 1.0 vrrns +12 Vdc ± .1 Vdc @ 36 ma -12 V de ± .1 Vde @ 33 rna +5 Vdc ±.5 Vdc@ 127 rna Input Signal Attenuation Levels (RANGE switch) . . . .2 to 1.5 Vrms I nput I rnpedance . . , 1.5 to 10 Vrms TEST (internal grounded input) 20 K ohm nominal (others available) . . • . . . . . Re-Record Input Level (pre-modulated signal) i I ~,--------....---- ! l/\PE SPEED ! TTL Compatible TABLE 1. FM FREQUENCY RESPONSE ._-----....-------'----...---------...,-------- + DEVIATION IPS ( .:. ,_, _ _- - ' - - _ - L - . CENTER FREQUENCY kHz -DEVIATION . 0........-__•. ______ _ , +40% kHz fO ! 120 151.2 60 30 15 71/2 3 3/4 1 7/8 15/16 120 60 30 15 7 1/2 3 3/4 1 7/8 15/16 tRIG LOW BAND 108 Dc to 10 'Dc to 5 Dc to 2.t) +40% kHz IRIG INTERMEDIATE BAND -40% kHz 216 108 54 27 13.5 6.75 3.375 1.688 CC=======================~J 2 Dc to 20 33.4 16.2 8.1 4.02 2.02 1.01 .507 302.4 - 151.2 75.6 37.8 18.9 9.42 4.725 2.35 ·---'1...,--------·---·'1I 64.8 54 27 13.5 6.75 3.375 1.688 .844 129.6 - 64.8 33.4 16.2 8.1 4.02 2.02 1.01 -_'col FREQUE~~: RANGEl -40% kHz 75.6 37.8 18.9 9.42 4.725 2.35 1.17 ,!I Dc to 1 Dc to Dcto.312 Dc to .156 .1- Dc to 40 Dc to 20 Dc to 10 Dc to 5 Dc to 2.5 Dc to 1.2b Dc to .625 Dcto.312 '--1 I BULLETIN NO. 3643·' -TABLE 1. FM FREQUENCY RESPONSE (CONT) .. +40010 kHz 120 ) 60 30 15 7 1/2 33/4 1 7/8 120 60 30 15 71/2 33/4 1 7/8 432 216 108 54 27 13.5 6.75 604.8 302.4 151.2 75.6 37.8 18.9 9.42 +30% kHz -40% kHz IRIG WIDEBAND GROUP 1 IRIG WIDEBAND GROUP II 1170 585 292.5 146.25 73.13 36.56 18.29 900 450 225 112.5 56.25 28.125 14.06 260.2 125.6 64.8 33.4 16.2 8.1 4.02 Dc Dc Dc Dc Dc Dc Dc to to to to to to to 80 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25 Dc Dc Dc Dc Dc Dc Dc to 500 to 250 to 125 to 62.5 to 31.25 to 15.6 to 7.8 -30% kHz 630 315 157.5 78.75 39.38 19.69 9.84 OPERATING DATA a. CONTROLS - The following Table 2 lists those controls and adjustments employed on the FM record board. These controls are vital in respect to optimum performance in FM recording. For complete maintenance and calibration procedures refer to the maintenance section of this bulletin. : :: 3 C": ::.: ::: BULLETIN NO. 3643·1 r---------~----------------·--------------------------------------------------__, tt) TABLE 2. FM RECOHD CONTROLS & ADJUSTMENTS ~_J--------------------------------------~------------------------------------.~ CONTROLS 4:" LOCATION AND FUNCTION RANGE switch Located on the front of the board, it selects the input voltage range levels of 0.2 to 1.5 Vrms, 1.5 to 10 Vrms and TEST (grounded internal input) IN adj control Located on the front of the board, it determ ines the level of the data signal passing to the first amplification stage and VCO. This allows adjustment of the desired modulation (0 to 40%) over an input range 1623 o INPUT R61·/. ~""''-'_'V'A/'-- -liND PI-12 + R35 cw o BLACK PI-\!_ + BALANCE +6.2VDC CRt /000.0.. R1 1':'_ 1K IOCOn.. R9 I':'. --~CARRIER 6450.0. RII FREQ. OSClllATOlI 8+ son -G.2VDC +G.2VDC -4-CW IK .01 Uf R31 HOll -IZVDC R3 IK PI ·1 r--- - - - - - - - - - - - - S2 RfQR,:..E.:..CO_R....:D_ _ _ _-+---+~Y:_!__i...,.._=~n : SfGNAc..IN PI-3 I S 1 ~_ 3 1 .!. R41'> SEE ~ NOTEI:i;:- . i r--+_._E~ .------!~4EI ~ ~+.5VOC R-+ Q b ,SI< I~. i1 1 5. "" 1 ·_-------------______ 1 4 R34 +12YD(:--1>---N'Io~---~--4---! 27011 tW RI7 4.71( RI5 . +5VPC--+---, (3 _2-":>6 PI-5 PHa 1"1-22 z : I N~iE' ,PHD 1 ~.!:.€=.;ED~6-_----------__{ H~AOHI~PH6 1.. . PI_10~nD5~-------_------ PH4- SPE.f 04- ~PEtP3 PHO PI-B ( 5PElD 2. T RIB CR2 680.0. HEAD LO ""------"7 PI-IS RI9 4.7K 5PEED_ 1 _ __ (-----_c ~ ...._..,;.;R"'2~'-;-:-7"""_......--_t--'u 1'70n.t W RIG 220I'_ ...L -IZVDC NOTES: 1. Optional input impedance. C.17 8 t<>PF ~t~h 2N4124 IN914 PI -6 -I Z Z 0 W m ~ CfJ ~ TP4 I/ ~ ~~"i ~~~ !jIll .1$8 18 :;,,, ~~:q ~~ <:: J5"" 'i ~ l.. I"I ~ c::J> C\) 8SG.1 a 1"'007 ~ 1111 ll> '"" ~--~---) [ .JI . I ' II 0, r i I II III I II , ,, ~[::-~=--:~=I,'",-=-~....:=b-==-=?=3 f-' f . '------------, !}--c _ _ _ _ - C0 il'll~1 ~I 1:1'-'1 IIIli,1 1 I !11'I-J8f----\~-, 1 B~ L~~L'~-~l V/6111 _f{ , , - - -!:',' ,:!?:~,=-I\-,-'--==-- -==:-. 3 I'l I v,~'-~ ::=::.-~""\\-::;rc~;if__:::e I i ii'',. it" \':1 i:J IIII , III \:1, ell, + '-'-W/SV c:.. rl ~ l!:\ r~~ +._!£J, 7,dF/;5 , -- ---~<"A.~.. _. _ _. __ 11II I iii"'1 !,l,I: "II .1 ~ ILl IL ~J~JJ~:: 00";:' I rl rl rtrri ~ O~::IJT" 1 ~ r~99~ OUrPiJr3 - I firl-rfrl OiJTPUTIO -11,1 fl~~' ~ 1 IIII is ~, ~ . I~~ I () Itl~>c,'l I I I I l' INPUT:? INPi/T I INPUT 3 <- ~'" --...;.. c:> 1 I J~"2)J/6 ~J/5 I~P/jI is ~J!! ~J/o 11 /NPiJT nltl>:;' (s H", \) JI2 ~ H", 11 ,e .,,_,~ _ ,J~Plh·~,? J3 If1 I~"~ <- .);; ....... () 1 I . J~) J/3 00 0 NOTE: I. 3. JI8 IINO R.ssOCI~Tf:D WIft.ING IS Pllli!T OF KIT 8310069 Auxiliary Reproduce Chassis Wiring Diagram BULLETIN NO,3647-' FM REPRODUCE GENERAL The Frequency Modulation (F M) reproduce board is used for reproducing frequency modulated data previously recorded on magnetic tape. The board, located in the reproduce chassis and possibly the auxiliary reproduce chassis (one board per FM channel), accepts the recovered FM data from the reproduce head and tape, via the preamplifiers, and equalizes, demodulates, filters and amplifies this data for application to the board output and customer's equipment. Information contained in the bulletin consists of general, characteristics, operating data, theory of operation, maintenance, parts list, and diagrams. Figure 1. FM Reproduce Board Variations incorporated on this board consist of four bandwidth possibilities, operation at any three tape speeds out of a possible seven, and an optional FM Re-Record feature. These variations are described in the following paragraphs. c:==:=====:====-========.: .==. \/\ll~rrtl]F( i? rr cQ\~\~\)\)\ \~\\\\\f\\ ==:=: : 1:). 1 C(======::::=====::=::::J:J ij@lfi@Mtw&J =::==::=:=" BULLETIN NO. 3647-1 - TABLE 1. FM FREQUENCY RESPONSE .APESPEED + DEVIATION IPS • +40010 kHz 120 60 30 15 71/2 3 3/4 1 7/8 15/16 151.2 75.6 37.8 18.9 9.42 4.725 2.35 1.17 +4~1o ... !II 120 60 30 15 7 1/2 33/4 1 7/8 15/16 kHz 302.4 151.2 75.6 37.8 18.9 9.42 4.725 2.35 CENTER FREQUENCY kHz - DEVIATION IRIG LOW BAND 108 54 27 13.5 6.75 3.375 1.688 . 844 FBEQUENCY RANGE kHz -40% kHz 64.8 33.4 16.2 8.1 4.02 '2.02 1.01 .507 Dc to 20 Dc to 10 Dc to 5 Dc to 2.5 Dc to 1.25 Dc to .625 Dc to .312 Dc to .. 156 . IRIG 1~~~DME'DIATE_40% kHz 216 108 54 27 13.5 6.75 3.375 1.688 129.6 64.8 33.4 16.2 8.1 4.02 2.02 1.01 Dc to 40 Dc to 20 Dc to 10 Dc to 5 Dc to 2.5 Dc to 1.25 Dc to .625 Dc to .312 +40% kHz tRIG WIDEBAND GROUP 1-40% kHz 120 60 30 15 7 1/2 33/4 1 7/8 604.8 302.4 151.2 75.6 37.8 18.9 9.42 +30% kHz C 120 60 30 15 71/2 3 3/4 1 7/8 1170 585 292.5 146.25 73.13 36.56 18.29 432 216 108 54 27 13.5 6.75 260.2 125.6 64.8 33.4 16.2 8.·1 4.02 tRIG WIDEBAND GROUPI 900 450 225 112.5 56.25 28.125 14.06 2 Dc to 80 Octo 40 Dc to 20 Dc to 10 Dc to 5 Dc to 2.5 Dc to 1.25 -30% kHz 630 315 157.5 78.75 39.38 19.69 9.84 Dc to 500 Dc to 250 Dc to 125 Dc to 62.5 Dc to 31.25 Dc. to 15.6 Dc to 7.8 BULLETIN NO. 3647-1 a. BANDWIDTHS - Low, Intermediate, Wideband I, and Wide band II are the four bandwidth selections available. The desired bandwidth is usually determined by the frequency of the signal to be reproduced. Refer to table 1 for correlation of bandwidths to speeds, carrier frequencies, and deviation frequencies. Bandwidth selection components consist of equalizers, filters, and four circuit components (three capacitors·and 1 inductor). Refer to table 3 and figures 2, 4, 5, and 6. b. OPERATING SPEEDS - A speed line matrix and the three speed dependent filter networks govern wh ich three reproduce speeds are accomodated on the FM reproduce board. The optional F M 4-7 Speed Expander board (bulletin 3648-1) is required when all seven reproduce speeds are desired. Refer to figures 2, 5 and 6. c. FM RE-RECORD FEATURE - (optional) - This optional feature provides for routing the modulated signal directly to the board output 0 R through the demodulating, detecting, and amplifier circuits to the board output. RECORDER SPEED 7 l FItTER NO.1 HI _ -----, t SPEED 1 I 0 W f S T CI, fM EQUAliZER LOCATIONS ' - _ _ _ _ .1 r----------, L~~_:.:~_~j EOUAlIlfR IDENTifiCATION SPEED BAND COLOR BAR DOT BRN BRN 120 lOW INT 60 REO REO WBI ORN ORN 30 W811 15 YEl YEl GR!iI 7 III BlU 3 3/4 VIO 1 718 GRY 6 5 " 3 2 H I I; H t S 0 Q r.;/ / / v1 0 Tp ~.,., 't>" Ii' ~ fL3 ORN fL2 RED HI BAlI fIl TER SHECT CONTACTS / FIL T ER SHECT LIliES DUTY CYCLE 15/16 CONNECTIONS AND fll HR lOCATlllliIS SHOWN WITH DASHED LINES AIID BOXES ARE USED Iii 1 SPEED SYSHI!1 @ OSCILLATOR DUTY CYCLE FILTER NO 2 H2 FilTER 110. 3 FL3 r----' I SPEED 2 I ,-----..., L.. _ _ _ _ -J t SPEEO 3 L.. _ _ _ I ~ e l£VH DEl CONNECTIONS AND FilTER lDCATIOIS SHOWN WITH DOTTED LINES AND 1I0XES ARE USED IN A TYPICAL 3 SHED SYSTEM. IllUSTRATED IS A SYSTEII USING 60. 7 112 & I 111 1'$ Figure 2. Variation Locations and Matrix Lines BULLETIN NO. 3647-1 ...cHARACTERISTICS Frequency Response Speeds. . . . . . Power Requirements Output Level Output Impedance See Table 1 Three-Selectable +12V de at 70ma. max. -12Vdc at 100ma. m8X. +5Vdc at 150ma. max. Adjustable, 1Vrrns nominal 75 ohms, unbalanced to ground with SCPo OPERATING DATA a. BANDWIDTH AND SPEED VARIATIONS - Figure 2 details the various filter select lines, equ81izer locations and identifications, and filter locations and identifications. b. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS t\ND INDICATORS TABLE 2. FM REPRODUCE BOARD CONTROLS AND INDICATORS CONTROL OR INDICATOR LOCATION AND FUNCTION ZE ROadjust control Located on the front panel. This control is used to adjust the output amplifier to obtain OVdc out, with only the carrier frequency present at the input. OUTPUT adjust control Located on the front panel. This control is used to adjust the level of the output signal. RE-RECORD switch (optional) Located on the front panel. Provides selection of signal form at the board output. ON provides a modulated carrier at the board output (BNC) for re-recording purposes. OFF provides the standard output of a detected and filtered signal. SQUE LCH indicator Located on the front panel. Indicates, when lit, the board output is squelched (output signal is not present) by lack of proper servo control speed or lack of carrier. LEVEL DETECTOR DUTY CYCLE adjust control located on the side of the board. This control is used to balance the inputs to the input level detector stages. ascI LLATOR DUTY CYCLE adjust control Located on the side of the board. This control is used to adjust the duty cycle (symmetry) of the oscillator. 4~1 II BULLETIN NO. C. !-.'j OPERATING PROCEDURES 1. PRE-OPERATiNG CHECKS AND CONSIDERATIONS - Prior to reproducing FM data with the F M reproduce boards, observe the following checks. (a} Ensure the speed dependent matrix jumpers are positioned properly for those three speeds desired. Refer to figure 2. (b) Ensure the FM reproduce boards contain the desired speed and bandwidth dependent equalizers, filters, and timing components. Refer to figures 2, 5, and 6. (c) Ensure the FM reproduce boards are properly located in the reproduce chassis or auxiliary reproduce chassis, for the desired tracks. Also, if used, ensu re the F M 4-7 speed expander boards are properly positioned (refer to the expander board bulletin). Refer to the head characteristics sheet, front of manual, where board serial numbers are correlated to track numbers as originally positioned at the factory. (d) Ensure all output connections are made to the associated BNC connectors on the reproduce connector panel. (e) If the RE-RECORD switch (optional) is supplied, ensure it is positioned properly. If the FM reproduce board is being used for re-recording purposes, ensure the output is connected properly for recording on another channel. (f) Ensure the FM reproduce boards are properly adjusted. Operator adjustments consist of the ZERO adj. and the OUTPUT adj., as detailed in the following paragraphs. Overall adjustments concerning the two previous adjustments and the duty cycle adjustments of the oscillator and the input detectors are detailed in the maintenance section of this bulletin. NOTE The Servo Squelch switch must be set to the NORMAL position to utilize the Servo Squelch feature. (Output signal is squelched when the recorder/reproducer speed control has not established a stable accurate tape speed). 2. OPERATING CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS - The following adjustment procedures require use of a digital voltmeter and an FM record board. The Sangamo Calibrator unit, part number 836352, provides all adjustment capability in one package. (a) ZERO ADJUST - The following procedures are provided for adjustment of the FM reproduce ZERO adj., !.Ising a calibrated FM record board (VCO calibrated) of the same bandwidth. If an FM record board is not available refer to the maintenance section of this bulletin where complete calibration is performed by supplying a voltage input: Special equipment is required for complete calibration. Step 1. Connect a jumper from the FM record board VCO (yellow) testpoint to the FM reproduce board IN (yellow) testpoint. Ensure the FM record board RANGE switch to set to the TEST position. Step 2. Set the tape speed to one of the desired speeds, apply POWER, depress RECORD, and set the Servo Squelch s\'vitch to the TEST position. c:====:=::===:=:==:======-====:3) 5 .. ~~~~(\U~~\(,~~. CI======-=-='-=====::=:=:=:::J::J ~!n).iid))fIJ(I! . J'lti~i!D 11:l1!j,(ll/r/'!YI v l.l -.2-2. Each logic -1 level input to A2 produces a logic 1 leve! output with a longer time duration. The pulse output at A2-8 (clamp) removes the clear signal from A3a, at A3a-13, and activates the oscilfa~?r circuit by causing Q6 to be biased to cut off. With 06 not conducting the effective short between the ~mitter and base of 07 is removed, allowing Q7, 08, C16, C17, R32, R33, and R54 to function as an oscillator circuit. ~.~ )~.r.\"\I.\'·'CC========'=====::==::::J::J ~.~\~V:\.~ fill! r,l//J/JI1t0! Iv} I.1liL\\!Jllilll\f5'" ;\\nU11!1))i!C'I" III 6 CC:=========:=======:====::=._=.===:::::::J BULLETIN NO. 3647·1 r----------------~ I I I INPUT SIGNAL fROM I I I I I ( PREAMPS AND TAPE I TAPE SPEED LINES SPEED LINES ~~~~lCH{-------------------.---------------------------.--J SIGNAL l ) SELECTED TAPE SPEED ~, I I ---- I --~ TO INPUT I --~--FILTERED OF fM 4-7 SPEED EXPANDER • L t ' '---=-___ J OUTPUT OF FM 4·7 SPEED EXPANDER Bd. - - - - - - Indicatesvariabte wiring provided without FM RE:.RECORD KIT {part no. 8362561. - Figure 3. - - ,- - - Indicates variclble wiring provided with FM RE·RECOAD KIT (part no. B36256)' FM Reproduce Board Block Diagram CC=================~=-=:=::======__ ==:=:=:===:=:::J 7 OUTPUT SIGNAL BULLETIN NO. 364tl The oscillator output connected to the emitter of 05 causes 05 to further conduct with each successive -conduction of 07 and 08. Each conductIon of 05 momentarily inhibites the conduction of 04. This action produces a logic 1 level of short duration on the clock line to A4, at A4-9, and A3a, at A3a-l1. Binary rate n;ultiplier A4 functions asa positive edge clock triggered divide-by-device, controlled by the seven speed line inputs, the clock signal, and the strobe and enable input. The speed line inputs select the divide-by function of A4 as follows: 120 ips::=";- " 60 ips = -;- 2, 30 ips ==..;- 4, 15 ips::= -;- 8, 7 1/2 ips::= -;- 16, 33/4 ips = -;- 32, and 1 7/8 ips::= ..;- 64. The~ output of A4, at A4-5, (7 1/2 ips providing the -;- 16 function will be used for this explanation) remains at a logic 1 level until the trailing edge of the sixteenth clock pulse. At the leading edge of the seventeenth clock pulse the logic 0 level ~ output) is applied to the 0 input of the demOdulator flip-flop A3a, at A3a-12. This action would produce a logic 1 level on the Q output of A3a, at A3a-9 and a logic 0 level at the Q output, at A3a-8. The logic 0 leve; on the 0 output of A3a would deactivate the strobe and enable inputs of A4 causing the r output to rerum to a logic 1 level. This 0 output is also differentiated by CS and applied to the reset input of A2, at A2-5. A2 is now reset causing the oscillator to stop and a clear signal to be applied to A3a, holding the 0 and Q outputs to their present states. This present condition would remain until A2 is again set causing the sequence to function. The Q output of A3a, at A3a-9, is applied to a constant current generator, consisting of Q 18, C R10, and associated circuitry. 010 and assodatedcircuitryfunction as a switch, conditioning the signal prior to appl ication to the 018. The output of 018 is applied to the three JFET's, Q19 through Q20. This signa! is also available at P4-15 for application to the optional expander board. With all speed lines grounded, except the selected speed, the associated control transistor Q17, Q22, or Q23 will not conduct. Thus the associated JFET will not conduct, eliminating that particular filter. With +5 Vdc on the selected speed line the associated control trar,:>istor will conduct removing negative voltage from the associated JF ET. This action causes the .:r=ET to conduct, allowing the output at 018 to pass through the associated speed dependent filter to the next stage. This voltage at th_e filter inputs is either positive or zero, causing the filter output to be positive. The next stage consists of operational amplifier A6, the input at AS-4. The filtered outputs of the expander board are also applied at this point, from P4-20. AS functions to provide 0 Vdc output when only the carrier frequency is present at the input. Potentiometer R62, ZERO adjust, is used to achieve this output by adjusting the negative offset current to the summing junction of A6. The output of AS, at AS-l1, is appfied through a low pass filter network, consisting of L 1 and C 15, to potentiometer R49, OUTPUT adjust. R49 adjusts the signal level passing through the power amplifier, consisting of 09 and Q13 through Q16, to the board output at P4-18 (hi) and P4-17 (10). .= :::=:::3 BULLETIN NO. 3647-1 b. SQUELCH - Two squelch systems are utilized with this FM reproduce board. "Servo" squelch, dependent on the recorder/reproducer speed control accuracy. and "carrier" squelch, dependent on the input signal level, are the two types. "Servo" squelch is controlled by a speed control signal applied to board pin P4-7. When the recorder/reproducer's speed control system is not "phase and frequency locked" to the crystal oscillator reference, a • logic 0 level is applied to all FM reproduce board pins P4~7. This level when applied to the preset input of squelch flip-flop A3b, at A3b-4, causes the 0 output, at A3b-5, to go to a logic 1 level. 011 and 012 will now conduct shorting the output signal, at the base of 09, to ground. The logic 0 level at theQ output grounds the cathode of light emitting diode, eR8, causing it to become illuminated indicating the board output is squelched. A "Servo" squelch disable switch, located on the recorder/reproducer, is provided for disabling the squelch line at P4-7, for test and calibration purposes. When a logic 1 level becomes present at P4-7, by the speed control system lock condition, the Q and-Q outputs of A3b will remain in the squelch state. The squelch condition will be released wh~n the second squelch method requirements are fulfilled as described in the following paragraphs. When the signal inputs to the level detectors are of sufficient amplitude, a logic 1 level will be produced ~y the EXCLUSIVE OR output at A 1-8. This will set flip-flop A2, allow the oscillator to run, allow A4 to function, and allow A3a to function. At the end of the f,irst timing period; the Q output of A3a will go to a logic 1 level causing the 0 output of A3b to go to a logic 0 level. Q 11 and Q 12 will not conduct thus removing the short between the base of 09 and ground. The squelch lamp (CR8) will not be illuminated due to the logic 1 level at the 0 output of A3b. The input signal sensitivity levels are determined by the signal amplitudes effect on LD2 (level detector 2). LD2 is less sensitive than LD1, thus with a loss of signal or low signal input, the output of LD2 will go to and remain at a logic 1 level. LDl will continue to change st~te by the application of the low level signal or noise. This action by both level detectorS will produce an output at A 1-8, containing logic 1 level pulses of a longer time duration. A2, the oscillator circuit A4, and A3a will all function. However, these functions create a conditio~by which a logic 1 level at A 1-8 will be present at the D input of A3b, at A3b-2, at the same instant the 0 output of A3a goes to a logic level. This action clocks the squelch flip-flop at A3b-4, producing a logic 1 level at the 0 output of A3b. 011 and 012 will now conduct shorting the base of 09 to ground. The squelch lamp will also become illuminated, indicating the-output is squelched. c. FM RE-RECORD - The optional re-record feature functions by routing the modulated signal from the level detector outputs through emitter follower 03 to the board -outputs. The demodulated output signal is still available at TP2 when utilizing the re-record feature. The re-record switch simply selects between a modulated or demodulated output. MAINTENANCE The maintenance section contains-information to properly test and calibrate the FM reproduce board. Refer to the theory of operation section schematic diagram (figure 6), and waveforms (figure 6), for detail-circuit operation. 9 BULLETIN NO. 3647-1 a. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED HP Model 400E VTVM or equivalent Tektronix 531 Oscilloscope or equivalent IEC F51 Function Generator or equivalent HP Model 310 Wave Analyzer or equivalent General Radio 1130-A Frequency Counter or equivalent Fluke 8100 Digital Multimeter or equivalent b. TEST AND CALIBRATION - Refer to the operator's data section of this bulletin for minor operating checks and adjustments prior to completing the following procedures. Step 1. With the FM reproduce board removed from the recorderireproducer and its shield removed, visually inspect if for loose connections or mountings, dented, misshaped or biCken components, foreign material and signs of overheating. Check the board for the proper equalizers, equalizer positions, proper filters, filter position, speed matrix connections, and bandwidth variable components. Step 2. Mount the board on its extender, in the reproduce chassis, (shield removed) and apply POWER. Step 3. Ensure the presence of the following approximate voltages between TP3 (GND) and the indicated point. + Side of C13 + Side of C20 - Side of C24 +5 Vdc +12 Vdc -12 Vdc Step 4. Connect a sine wave generator, AC VTVM, and frequency counter between the IN (yellow) testpoint, TPl and GND (blackj testpoint, TP3. Set the generator level at.5 to 1 Vrms as monitored with the AC VTVM. Set the generator frequency for the correct frequency per tape speed and bandwidth, as listed in table 1. Monitor frequency with the frequency counter. Step 5. Ensure the "Servo Squelch" switch is set to the TEST position (tape movement will not be required for a board output), POWER is applied, STOP depressed, and the RE-RECORD switch, (if applicable) is OFF. Step 6. Set tape speed to 30 ips and monitor wi~h an oscilloscope the collector of transistor Q4. Adjust potentiometer R 54, oscillator duty cycle adjust, as necessary to provide equal time intervals between the pulses. Step 7. Select the highest desired tape speed and change the generator accordingly to produce the proper carrier frequency for the speed selected. Step 8. Adjust R49, OUTPUT adjust, fully clockwise. Step 9. Monitor the OUTPUT (red) testpoint, TP2, with a digital dc voltmeter, and ensure a reading of 0 Vdc ±5 MVdc. Adjust R6.2, ZERO adjust, as necessary to obtain the 0 Vdc reading. BULLETIN NO. 3647·1 Step 1a Connect a wave analyzer between the OUTPUT (red) testpoint, TP2, and the GND (black) testpoirnt, TP3. Adjust the wave analyzer'for the carrier frequency applied to the board. While observing the indicator on the wave analyzer, adjust potentiometer R7, level detector duty cycle adjust, as necessary to produce a minimum reading. Step 11. Change the generator frequency to the plus % deviation, per table 1. While monitoring the OUTPUT (red) testpoint, TP2, with a digital dc voltmeter, adjust potentiometer R49, OUTPUT adlust for a 1.5 Vdc reading. Step 12. Change the generator frequency to the minus % deviation and ensure a reading of 1.5 Vdc ±15 MVdc is present. Step 13. Repeat steps 10 through 13 for those speeds desired. Compromising adjustments may be performed to make entire board performance more satisfactory. The potentiometer on the filter trnit may be slightly adjusted to obtain the 0 Vdc output at the lowest speed. Step 14. With the plus % deviation input, position the "Servo Squelch" switch to the NORMAL positioo{No tape movement). Ensure the board output is squelched (drops to 0 Vdc ±50 MVdc) and the squelch indicator lamp is lit. Sweep input frequency to minus % deviation and ensure output remains the same. Step 15. Place the "Servo Squelch" switch to the TEST position and remove the generator input at the IN testpoint. Ensure the output signal is squelched (drops to 0 Vdc ±50 MVdc) and the squelch indicator lamp is lit. Step 16. Repeat steps 1 through 16 for all FM reproduce boards, as desired or required. PARTS LIST FM Reproduce Board 836154-(* A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 Cl C2 C3 859520-001 Cl1 859520-001 C12 859520-020 C13 859520-053 C14 510339 C15 510128 thru 859775-009 C17 896475 C18 859775-021 C19 C4 329157-001 C20 C5 859775-017 C21 C6 844115 C22 C7 844115 C23 C8 859775-010 C24 C9 859775-013 C25 C10 329157-001 C26 . *See table 3 for dash number description. I 329157-001 Not Used 859775-021 329157-001 See Table 3 510114-020 510116-025 859775-017 329157-001 Not Used 845258 859775-017 510116-027 510058-003 - C27 C28 C29 C30 CR1 CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5 CR6 CR7 CR8 CR9 CR10 . CR11 CR12 11 Ch. 2 6-73 898330 329157-001 329157-001 859775-017 853531 844510 844510 852475-018 852475-024 844510 853531· 510345 844510 852475-014 844510 844510 1~I~i~~ ~ BULLETIN NO. 3647-1 PARTS LIST FM Reproduce Board 836154· (* ) (Cant.) R39 L1 See Table 3 R6 198200-102 198200-512 Pl 855981-001 R7 329151-006 R40 198200-102 thru R8 198200-222 R41 198200-221 P3 P4 R9 198200-154 Fl42 198200·102 853518 R10 R43 198200-103 01 854540 198200-182 198200-472 R44 853530-254 02 854540 198200-471 03* 854539 04 510360 05 06 07 08 09 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 thru 021 022 023 Rl R2 R3 R4 R5 510360 R 11 * R12 R13 R14 R15 510364 R16 198200-561 R49 510164-008 510360 R17 198200-361 R50 198200-102 510360 R18 198200-124 R51 198200-271 . 859970 R19 198200-471 R52* 198200-151 510360 R20 198200-471 R53 198200-470 854540 854539 859970 854539 854539 R21 R22 R23 R24 R25 R54 854540 854540 R26 198200-391 198200-181 198200-561 198200-472 198200-223 853530-108 ** 510336 198200-222 R45 198200-105 R46 198200-472 198200-561 R47 853530-147 198200-271 R48 853530-212 R60 R28 198200-103 198200-562 329151-007 198200-472 198200-223 198200-472 198200-223 198200-101 198200-563 R61 198200-622 R29 198200-221 R62 510164-008 R30 198200-221 R63 R31 R32 R33 R34 198200-331 R64 198200-273 198200-271 853530-254 853530-254 R65 R66*** 198200-151 198200-222 198200-332 R67*** 198200-222 R35 198200-102 R68*** . 198200-222 198200-102 S1* 198200-222 R36 R37 198200-472 R38 198200-271 854540 854540 198200-471 198200-562 198200-471 R27 R55 R56 R57 R58 R59 510399-001 198200-103 FM Re-Record Kit 836256 03 854539 R52 198200-151 Rl1 198200-472 S1 855432-001 * Part of optional Re-Record Kit 836256. ** May be either 510364 (MPS 3640) or 854540 (2N4126). *** These resistors always used with Linear phase filters. ::: ::: "===:1 BULLETiN NO. 3647·1 -_ . .. TABLE 3. -- PARTS LIST VARIATIONS cn L1 Band- Carrier Frequency C15 001 Basic Board Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 002 900 kHz 27 PF 835341-031 32 PF 835341-023 32 PF 835341-023 836242-001 1500,uh 835242-002 W.B.I 1500l1h 836242-002 I ntermediate 1500f.lh 836242-002 lcow 836154- • C16 width 003 432 kHz 150 PF 835341-029 70 PF 835341-027 70 PF 835341-027 004 216 kHz 150 PF 835341-029 130 PF 835341-028 130 PF 835341-028 330l1h , I Not Used W.B. II 005 108 kHz 150 PF 835341-029 270 PF 835341-030 270PF 835341·030 006 450 kHz 27 PF 70PF 70PF 330ph W.B.II 835341-031 835341-027 .. 835341·027 836242-001 (60 ips 560 PF 560PF 150quh Low 835341·032 836242·002 (60 ips 150 PF 54 kHz 007 835341-032 835341·029 top speed) to () s()Oed \ TABLE 4. EQUALIZER PARTS LIST I NTERM£DIAT£ BAND /.8K '82 1·8t< 182 1.81<. Illl i R3 8361:40- ;:::0 I LI VAL: 5-:-<:0 I VA CI • SECO Cz. V"'iL. SEcO R2. VAL. SE"co R3 V,QL. SECo RI vAt... SECO Q/! Fe ryr.'c sE"c.o ,K.Hi! I;;.~~~,:,;,",c, ~ "'iXiT- BULLETIN NO. 3647-1 ~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _'_'_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _• _ _ _M'W __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ••'_________ U_U_._ _ _ _ _ _ n ________ " _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ .-O___~-_-_T-A_B..,..L-E-5-._F_rl_T_E_'R_A_N_D_ErQ,_U_A_L_I_Z_E_R_P_A_R_T_S_L...,ISrT_._._~, SPEED IPS - FREQ. HFLAT AM? FILTER PART NO. LINEAR PHASE FILTER PART NO. miG INTERMEDIATE BAND J 60 30 15 7112 3 3/4 1118 * 15/16 40 20 kHz 277272-002 277272-003 277272-004 277272-005 277272-006 277272-007 271272-008 271272-009 10 5 2.5 1.25 .625 .312 EQUAL ::::~ PART NO. - "-'-' 120 _ _"____ " _ _ _", 277181-002 277181·003 277181·004 277181-005 277181·006 277181·007 277181-008 277181·009 83::::-+0-001 83:::::'!().002 -- 83;:: .: -+ 0- 003 83:: ::: .! 0-004 83:::: .':-!:O-OO5 83.c:~O-006 83;: '::':'l}·007 836 :-+0-008 IRIG WIDEBAND GROUP I 120 60 30 15 7 1/2 (33/4 ~ 80 kHz 40 20 10 5 2.5 1 7/8. ___.L-______ 1.25 ____ ~ 277272-001 - 271272-002 277272-003 271272-004 271272-005 277272-006 277272-007 ____________ ~ 277181-001 277181-002 277181-003 277181-004 277181·005 277181·006 277181·007 ______________ 836 z-~ 0-009 836:'.';0-010 836:~0-011 ~ 836 0-012 836:::.!0-013 836:-H}.014 _________ 83e:::-W-015 ,___________ tRIG WIDEBAND GROUP II ~------~------------r-------------.--------------.-----------_, 120 60 30 500 kHz 250 125 15 7 1/2 3 3/4 67.5 31.25 15.6 1 7/8 7.8 277273-001 277273-002 _____ 8362~0·016 8362-!'O-017 271273-003 271273-004 271273-005 271273-006 271273-007 8362~O-018 8362~O-019 8362~O-020 8362~O·021 8362~O-022 LOW BAND 120 60 30 15 71/2 3 3/4 l() 1 7/8 20 kHz 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.625 0.312 217272-003 277272-004 271272-005 277272-006 2T1272-oo7 271272-008 277272-009 277181-003 277181-004 277181-005 277181-006 277181-007 277181-008 277181-009 8362~0023 8362':'0-024 8362-+0025 8362~0026 836240·027 8362~0028 8362~0029 ~ .~ BULLETIN NO. 3647-1 OVTPVT SAl! DOT Figure 4. FM Equalizer Schmetic Diagram and Component Location U I I I I I -.q) Q. o OWPUT 1 " ,.'. .. T~" •• 0 . OUT"UT R ,s~ " >9 t• FL-3 n ." /."..:~-\ Q .' l':''''\ \ - ,~, I \ U ) U- U- ,-------LC_-----:..!--'-____'_-_-~__________'-_-_/____.____________ __I ~. Figure 5. FM Reproduce Board Component location 15 . . 83624G-OTTl-S 836154-5-lTL' ~~~~~~~ ijR~@@~~ ----.---.... ~ N-20( F"ROI'1 E)tP4NDER - - ( :qr-~'--{ r-------------------_'~~--~. . WAVEFORM A. Typical output of level detector 1 (L01). WAVEFORM B. Typical output of level detector 2 (L02). WAVEFORM C. The exclusive 0 R of LO 1 and L02. WAVEFORM O. Negative pulses of approximately 50 N sec. WAVEFORM E. Positive edge of CLAMP pulse, caused by nega- r-------------------" ,----------------------, --------------,~ ~. spreD :t4-'U.~'.-+--H++-++H,(E) HIGHE.ST tive edge of waveform O. WAVEFORM F. Clock generator pulses, produced as long as -... CLAMP is high. WAVEFORM G. Rate multiplier~output. SPEED 2 WAVEFORM H & I With waveform G high when a clock pulse occurs, _ E!,L!§'R_2.._ _ the Q output at A3a-9 will go high and the Q output at A3a-8 will go low. This activates the "'4"~ SPEED 3 strobe enable inputs of A4. If waveform G is low .... C& when the leading edge of the clock pulse occurs, Q will go low and Q will go high. WAVEFORMJ. WAVEFORM K. " ... ~ SPEED4 Servo squelch signal. With waveform J high and waveform C low, this signal will go low when waveform I goes high., This action removes the squelch from the board. P4·S I f"~ SPEED 5 270lt- ~ With waveform J high and waveform C high, this .l~_ signal will go high when waveform I goes high, thus squelching the board output. WAVEFORM L. L ....-8 ( SPEED S This signal produced by waveform I causing waveform E to go low, stopping the generator. '_I9E StEED !..----~I_+f2l LOWE~T .. AS. INPUT B"$.~ :. ",-10 ~~"'+----1H INPUT'U~ A11 D ~3,r--'r-'Ir-,r~r-~r~r-------------~r-~r~~------~ • A28 F A3 11 -I1W-...1W.l..-JJJ.U._....JJUll-...!W.l..-.lIJIL. ..lll"--____________--'UlI1..--1lIU-..lillL-_---1lIlL-llllL---1l'llL , " jUo.s..J •. Ala" "'-'''-----------------' LOW C "4-'~ " P4-. E C3.J: 4cl,u~T C4 .. 1 ~:r "I-OIUFf cu':'''',,;f' ;'5\1' L..._________ ~~----.rL ~~ P4-r foE_________ L, Pot-II P4-Jz.. !:=:1 -,2. V "t1:: -: TYPICAL £OUAL1l£,R U!ff' C.I"'~H· BULLETIN NO. 3647-' ..,..- +5V ~J3 J:" .r +J.. I/F ___+---(,;ljs D··I" .--+--- 4, ZJ ;-~i)S WIOI:SI 1TER. M,NO 6.2 K 198200-822 8ZK 198200-B~2 8.21< 198200-822 12 t< 27K 198200-:273 198200-123 27 K 12K 198200-273 1982oo-{23 '31./4 IPS "'loceAND :r 1"'/6 1Pi ~Jl!l.!-jJL i~Q IPS '" I DE B~N D 60 IPS \JIDEB"'NI> I;t 30 IPS WIOEBAWP J! 15 11'5 R7 2. 0-,,- RS 10 K 82 JL. 198200-273 198200-103 198200-820 51011'3-011 2D..r.. 82.n.. 27k 10K 1'8200-273 198200-103 198200-820 510113-011 10 K :z.0.n. 82 ..... OMIT /98200-103 19B200 .. SRO 510113-011 oS OJ>10k 47.,... OMIT 198200-103 198200-470 844993 50...... 10K 4'7.JlOMIT 138200-10, 198200-4'70 844993 \.IID.,SANPI ,,!L... R3 OMIT 271< 10/( 198200-10' 10K 198200-103 10K 1198200-<03 9.2'" 198200-!lU B2J< 198~~ I!!k 198200-273 ":111200-/21 ~7k I~ 1\ 196200-;n, 198200- / 23 101( OMIT 136200-103 OMIT OMII OMIT 1'!>~~OKo.,O' 10 II" 198:200-103 8-2K 19S2oo-gn 8·2 k OMIT I!!B"oo..S22 OMIT 198U>O-lo3 OMIT 10 k IO~ 199200-103 IOO-A- JUMPfR 84499410O..n.. JVMPtR 84-4994 IOO...n.. 844994IOO..n.. JUMPER J!JMPE"R J UI1 PER i 84+994100-,,_ RS R9 CI C3 C2 5K 20.1>. 400PF" 62 PF" 329151-009 329'51-002 197212- 4-00 1972/2-062 51< :20~ 240 PF" SOOPf 329151-009 3291SI-002 1982 4 9-600 197212-240 iooo Pf 20 ...... :2. K OMIT 32~15"I-o"8 329151-002 I091'8f,-ooa I K .0039""20-,,OM I i 3291SI-OD7 32915'-002 S9'.BG-oU 500_n _ :z.O.n.. .015uF OMIT 329151-006 329151-002 .91.8.-'>12 500J'L 20J>... 3"9151.006132~15~O02 500...n.... 20...n... 32.1!115H)01! 329151-002 200-11.., Zo..n.. 3291SI-005 329151-002 20~ 51<. 32<.1151-009 32':1151-002 51( 20 ...... OMIT OMIT .015UF 691!>9E-0!J! OMIT OMIT 69/~_~-c34 LI 1000 UH lur/3SV 4- 7vrl 10V 5104Z"",-025 859775-"'''' 853587-020 IUF"/35V 1000UH 4 T ur/lOy a53581-02_~ 5/o4?-Q-Q'115 B597'7S-o~I IUF"/35V 47u./IOV 1000 v\-! 5/D4Z'l-oZS 85977s-otl 853 5 p~r=~.'!.o OMIT IUF"/35V 5I012Q-02<; OMIT OM!T .033uF C5 C4 OMIT OMIT OMIT .OC!,\u.69168.-055 OMIT 1,~~r:t8lC 47PF 197212-047 OM IT 820P, o .. EQUALIZER PARTS LISTING 82 p, 47u, 100(.' UH /lOV S5~17S...oZI 853597-020 lu,/:3;\1 47v;/IOV /000 UH S,04Z'1-oz5 8S1!1775-otl B53Se'T-",,"~ lur!3sv 47vvllOV 3$'00 UH l5-i04;'9'::CDI e59775-~~~~~~~ IVF/35V 47ul·-/!OV B200UH 859775-02.1 8!:3S"g1-04o 47/J,/IOV / VFf35V 2000VH 510429-02' 85977,-c;01 ~U"/15V .2Z VF" 51042~-D2<; 1if;~~ 510117-025 85971;:-0' ~ 85lS97-00~ .?2ur 1".6">/"-'1 I 470 UI-! 510:l7-02S BSC)7'75- (\~2i SS')S8f'j;.OO! .22 4.1 U .. /,5V I 1000 VI-! u. 329151-009 329151-002 198:249-820 /91212-082OM IT 20...1151<. ISOPr OMIT OMIT 32915;-00'" 329151-002 1972.Ui'-ISO 5/0117-02.0 8S9775-01( 185:l~~ 100..1'\. ."22U>/!l5 .... 4.,ur/15" /OOOUH 21< ,OJ>.. 6S0P" JUMPER 844994- 329151-008 32915"H>03 OMIT OMIT 859775-016859775-011 135356':'-020 19824"'-66 ,OO27uF 50.r... .Olvr IOO~ II< .'2.2" .. 1"35V 14-.7 VFII5V! 1000U" OMIT JlIMP!!! 844994 6" 1686-02< 3Z91S'J..ocu 859'775-00$ 85971S-oq '8S3~~ 32'!>15H::~ ;:!_2~151-003 100 ........ 500.n.... .:22 u~/3>y 4., VF/I 1-001 l291SI-009 32915HXl2 19!U"'9-82.D 1912 1::/-050 JOD..(L 1000 VI-! 20Jl5k 75 PI" .22".4.1 "Vli5" JUMPER OMIT OMIT 844994 329151-009 32'1115HX>2 854528-075 510117· 020 959175-011 953587-<>2. 330 iOO..n.. 21< 50 ....... .22U.-/35v 4-" v./ISV IOOOV~ JVMPI"I! 01"\ IT 1972i2'UO OMIT 8"'''' 9!il4 . J!,~151-~ 3291SHWl Q5~115.·"itP.~5'T15~~* 85358'1' ,"'= It< 50..0.: :OOtfl: 'If~uH :01 .2." ,:;-.. JUMPtR OMIT 329151-007 321?J15~001 6"'I6SI1-c.:11l 329157-001 1859775- 00) S5977!i-g.g. JUMPE"R 844994- 100 ..... 844994 i ?;~~~~r;W 19f2~~. p, 8~f;'94 JUMPtR 100';" 844994 100 ..... JlIMP£R 8q.4-SSq. JUMP!R 844994 J U I1PCR WOO.n. IOO~ 9~4- v,' Soo./\. 100 ..... 32915"1-006 3291S1-00~ 200-,,IOO.J'L. 329151-005 329151-004 OMIT OMIT 20 ...... 32.915/-<:.02 20 J'- 3291~I-002 .c'£lI.u. .OOS!iu~ OMIT 69/611<;-024 510116- O'f I OMIT ,;'SIUG-02! 5/olIe-041 .02:eU~ .0&20,- OMIT OMIT OHIT OMIT i '7" .; 4:"iur-Jlii'v .2. '2 t)(:"13Sv 4,.'~ urI 15Y ~~-~ IOQOUH 8S'1TS-DOl 859715-0 11 85351J~ _2. 2 u./~v 4.1 V::"!.15V 10DouH 859775-003 859715-0'1 85'587- 0 20 OMlr .2? url'.1I5~i 4:W'-/"'''1 859175-003 859715-01j OM/T IUF/3,V ,~, ... 7 UF!'OV! 859775-00 859775-011 • OM IT OMIT w (j) .j::. -' 330~ -[!D- + I C'3 I ~oo°J'f" ..fRiO'l._ ... .,O~ 8:2K1JTP4/ -illJ- - - - - - - - -.. . r:---= o 0 TPI'---+.... 'I'~lLO\J r-Ir III 0"" 0: II) Inld 0 WJ 1>1« 1.01 - (1)0 Id "'0 0..:::0 W .... ci~ elll 1.1- ...I W" 0 0: "'101 ON I./J- 1.1..1 0.." 1110 (1)5 W 1.1 ILj W 0 0:: 0 '" III a "I 1.01- L&I .... cr. NW ON WW .... 0 « -w ON W::i 1.01" Ill::> 0 a." 1115 a..::> III Id Id 4. 4 "'0 ~.. PI TP2--_h RE'O TP3 ---+-.... CI aLAe!\. 23 . Jl 22UF Pl-IO HI±.. P 1- 9 >------ PI-3 >- SPE PI-4 r-?P~ PI-5 ) S PE PI-8 a3G08! -001 -002 . (..8 47uf rov ~2. Uf 2Sv PART NO. r2 PE REMARKS 8SS77S-021 INTE:RMEDIATE 855775"-0.17 WIOE8AND PI-19~ >-PI-I >-PI-II >-PH!3 PI-12 >--- BULLETIN NO. 3641-1 ------, IsmD I CRI -- ~ SPEED LINE I •.. : CR2 +12V '> . R2E> I k: + I2.V R21 SPEED LINE 2 220~ +12V +12V - --, SPEED 3 CI 1I L2 2 -=r~~ C2 'TOP. J_ I Q4 EOUALIZER , _ _ _ ~_-i ::24J:24 ,PO! OliTPUT -:= IO~ Cf4 5GUF RI If{ R2.3 JO../\.. 3 -) PI-IS + ._____-+ ___-....:"-1 f-....--./'Nv-- -12 V SPEED LINE 22U • I '-_~ +12V + CI2 4~5 ..A- -_._~ ... 12V __ I I -:= Figure 6_ Direct Reproduce Board Schematic Diagram and Component Location 11 cP,\(\\~~~U@.\\f\~, CC===============:::Jl ,f)J)fl)!i).IiIFJfi)/!A),UW 836083-3TT L-S ' BULLETIN NO. 3639-1 ,------, -I I . C10*·8.2Vdc C9* To All Other Transistors on same Emitter Follower Board To Reproduce Board '--~IlfI'-1I!1-M~ Ct* I I .Head Channel I I EMITTER FOLLOWER BOARD +6.2Vdc I I I V /\ / / / \ / " Jo " PREAMPLIFIER BOARD r \ / \ ~ /\ / \ \ / / ' ,/ 'l/ ", / , /" \/ I \ I \~ *THESE COMPONENTS USED ONCE PER BOARD, FOR ALL CIRCUITS ON THAT BOARD. Figure 2. Typical Channel Schematic -:J 6 C:::=-======== ___ =:J o_ _ _ BULLETIN 1'40.3639-1 r;-------- ,* i C-8.:*E3~ I ____ _ L PI R At. 2HdW ~~'2 219 ;11 ~_-~~.-< J z +6.0v +c2 /1JF/35V ~ ~--e'---+--<:TIO - 8.2 v ;r 1\ Q2 ZIJ3407 JI'l.. * Used for laboratory model (preamp power supply part no. 836017) Figure 3. Preamp Power Supply, SchematicOiagram and Component Location CC:=:=:==========-==:========:==_w===:=:~====:J < BULLETIN NO. 3639-1 -8.~VA 12.1 IOO-'L EZl) E3 EI ~ E4 " £7 v EIO £:35 ~ E.13 " Ell EIG" E;19o--- -<> EI7 E41 EZ8 1:18 E~I E42. E34 E37 E,47 f:-40 £:43 E46 BOARD PART NO. E:2.1 E4S DESCRIPTION COMPONENTS USED 835856-001 4 ckts 010, all, Q14, and 015 835856·002 7 ckts 03,06,07,010, 011; 014, and 015 835856-003 8 ckts 02,03,06, 07,010, all, 014, and 015 835856-004 14 ckts 01 through 014 835856-005 16 ckts Q1 through 016 Figure 4. Emitter Follower Board, Schematic and Wiring Diagram HOTE: ALL T'RANS'STORS £{ lief! ZNSOS7 E2. SEE: TR8/"E £:3 >- m t;;:TC.H SiDE ... III A~ A'!o M A5 A{, 118 Irt FlIO COMPONENT SIDE - 8 ' a~ 83 54 85 6i> fS1 8889 BIO E4>- PIEIS >- BOARD PART NO. DESCRIPTION PIAG >- 835886-001 Contains 7 circuits by the omission of those components enclosed in the dotted lines. 835886-002 Contains 8 circuits by the use of those compon~nts enclosed in the dotted lines. PIBI PI 82. PIS3 >>>- P/a4>P/5S>- PIS'" >- PIB? >PIBB >PIB9 >PI BIO>- BULLETIN NO. 3639-1 -8.2V -B.t\l -s.zv QIO Q2. 2 NS087 ZN5087 ~6 -tt-PIAI 2NS087 _'V'"'V-_ PI A3 E.S Ell 62/8 51:310 47..n.. 47.n.. 47.D... £5 4.7K RI7 4.71( 4.7K R~S + E6~ I e,," 47 _NFO +6.0'1 +6.oV +6.0V -s.zv -s.'2V -S.2V Q8 2NS087 -_"",fV'-_ PI A 2. 2N5087 E7 >-_...f-I -_J\AfV'-_ (13 >--e-H .ale. PI A9 47-'1.. £Z3 RII 4.71< 4.7/( E8'l E14'l +C&.ov +&.OV SEE TRBLE: IR5 >-- ell. .01 /IIFD I +I Y CIZ- '+6.0V soVI!c.e- r- - -S.lV ~E./G AG >>----I.--rt--4hl--.sOyec£" B.'2.V C9 " C/O .01 NFl> '.'BI~ --r T +T <1.7 ~J:> .3SV Q/O 2N5087 _""'-fV'-_ PI A7 E9 >--.-H 1.8"" Ie,7 ISS r~fo~ I l EIS I 244 47 _NFl> 1- I Q/G QIS 2NS087 I 21115087 R'48 PlAID £47 I E141 + ".7K I. I -= 3-~~ I~ -= ~ __ ~_-_---4~-_--=-+-~~~~ NFl) I I I ~A I I es - - - -, ~K I 182 183 184 1&5 I I 4:1 MFO • .35V ~ -':-8.1.V - I _, :I J Figure 5. Preamplifier Board, Schematic and Wiring Diagram (7-8 channel 14-16 channel) c=============================~J 9 'r , 835886-0TTL-S I~~~~%~~ ~l[liRlil&@r~j}jl --8.211' I' 11 Q9 Q2. 'ZN,~ ,.,5087 E:I E~ "PIIII g.b 47"'- 'Ol~ ~5 4.7K + £Z1. >--1 + ".Qi( --8.2V BOARD PART NO. DESCRIPTION Ii: .3 QIl 2N :SO.i: Q4'N.';O'i'il Contains 14 circuits by the omission 835953·001 1:.3 IZ.IZ R9 4:l.ll.. of lhose components enclosed in the dotted .lines. E4-~ Contains 16 circuits by the use of th~ components enclosed in the -- Ell 4.1K >---1 m11l J..+ RIO 3-31{ 835953·002 ~PIIlZ. 47-<2... 1211 leG ~ 47 -::-MFD +".01( -e.zv dotted lines. !! QI.3 Q6 2"'" ZN5087 ela E 13 PlA3 >--i' 1 47.. 1-50 87 E7 gZ447P-£J~ RZJ So"": 47.iL 1081- RZZ 3-3K eZ3 4.7K. =t IC4 -=-~l{) r---- -I PIAA I EIS>--, I I I I I I + <0-0 V QI: z",y; IL J E~ll - I ____ BULLETIN NO. 3639-1 - N_O'TE: -IT---I-'11r-c -zo-"""ov -S.h -8.2\/' ql8 Q2~ 2N508? 2"5087 E25 PZAI R54 PI AS :>:>---c-,.. .0IMFO PZAI R7S 47.11- 1i!7.3 RS3 1<75 5.b1< 47n.. 4.7K -I- £2"1 R1~ :l.3Y.. PIAG > Gl7 47n.. 1<77 .OIMFD 4.1k C2..30 ''!. -::-MFO .0IMfO - +".0'1 -8.1V P2fJfO > c.'l., •01 "'FD Q20 2N5087 leG,O fEZ7 P2A'L y' I -::-! T 4.1 MFD. ,5SV ~E:I >-----1I---!I-+"-ov +- e'2.4· I 47C +".oy ALl. TRPI-JS!$7"Of!!.S A.reE: 2N6087. y 4.7 "IF£>. 30V 1 -: - 1 T +T ~ ~E5?' L--8.ZV C22. 4.7MFD .35V P2A8 47..n.. P/52 PIBI. PIS:' ~59 4.il( E28 P'B<\PIBS PIB€> -I- J est. .5.31( PIB7 1°4- PIB8 PIS9 47 -::-MFO PIBIO >-- +."-01/ P'ZSI. -8.2'>' ,---_-8.I:V Q22 q30 2\.\5057 2"1S087 Ee9 ~--""A~F2113 P2SZ P283 PZ84 ?l8S P2/!,(, PZA~ P287 PUiS 1<90 41n.. Rgs eD P289 PUIO e89 4.1K S •.,K + J £88 3·3v.. e1s I 4'7 .".MFO ._---- ----- J;!44 3.3K +r...O\/' -----, -8 ..U QUe, ZNS087 . , . . - - - _ -8.2" I r-----------------, I . I I I I I I 1i:91. -1I.tll I Q31 : ZNS087 ZN5087 ~ I £3\ I I £15>- I 3·3K I PlIlIO I R9 -j I I : I I J. I I -= +MV : S!£Ec~L;:::~ -- ~~~r:~~~reamplifier Board, Schematic and Wiring Diagram (28 channel, 32 channel) : : : 11 . ~%:\~V.@~~~f C==:===============::J:J :)~\iWll!T7lu) j~\ I~I 835953-0TT L-S !I}Jli{(Iill@(l~1Y' E\ ONE INCH - 14 TRACK, WITH EDGE A & B, REPRODUCE LEAD INTERCONNECTIONS Emitter Follower Channel No. 1 Emitter Follower Board, Item 4, Inputs Position A Positio~ E26 Board, Item 4, Outputs B . Position A Position B Preamplifier Board, Item 5, Inputs Position A Position B E6 E7 E27 El E.8 [9 3 E5 E6 E5 5 E32 E33 E9 7 Ell E12 E13 9 E38 E39 E3 11 E17 E18 E7 13 E44 E45 El1 B E23 E24 E15 2 E26 E27 E3 4 E5 E6 E7 6 E32 E33 Ell 8 Ell E12 El 10 E38 E39 E5 12 E17 E18 E9 14 E4;4 E45 E13 A E23 E24 EIO Ell El2 £13 EI4 [IS EJ3 Of4~, (; E4 ~ E15 BULLETIN NO, 3639-1. A POSITION : - - _ C - - i - - - =...... r HI ..--II-t-----IN PUT SIDE ~---+-- @ @ oE27 0(27 W3';E26 0 nl 0 £28(";E2b ES EbO';a oE33 Ell ' E 12 O'~ OE39 EI g tri ':£4~ + '\ l!~ + L.RJ -J- -++(CJ )+ I \LPOSITION A 0 H,C> £4 OE33 (:£32- 0 Ell EI20 GO EIO oD'3 "(38 Ell'} EI~ E~ [43 0 EB,j'ri ..nS:~40 _@ I- E.37 ')E 38 £17,) 3 OE45 EI~P EF E;, 0 nl D GE32 Fb7 OUTPUT SIDE. ® oE4:; (;E44 E23,ni E2.4 0 ~+{fTI}-+i' _..J ---Ultu· COMIII'ONII!.N7'SID& = TRPE "'t"iI:4VEi AI R4 RS Ii D :z .. COIofPONENT$1Dt!' ~ 83.59.5.3 INSGIIa" WJ....:s FlCOlII 01'f'0SI7W SIIJE AS i PORTABLE MODEL ONLY n i BULLETIN NO. 3639-1 .. HERD HI RI P.ZEZ o o.....§}--+a litES l3 ZI ZS "- AZEi!9 A'lEa 7 17 2 AZEZ6. ~ JO AZ£!tt. ,-{i"<§}--!-I/ A'lE:.1I '4 ,-.""9--1- IS 112£35 18 19 Azel4 r-At.e.38 Z3 27 zz AZE!? 26 AU41 r--Al'£ZO r- At £44 f--. ".23 -.30- - --@ ---AtE'? ... =-~~~~~~~-~ COMPONENT $IOS "",r ~4£S.-+;;::::::::;---:l+-;=", . /14£1 ""' ...._to ...., .... ........., ..... '''10 • 5E.'J oIJsC"/o '17" 117E:Z• .47£10 \i-- •.41E' ..lL..._ A2 ..7Clt/SIDE A3 E,7CH.$.J0£ LABORATORY MODEL ONL V Figure 9. One Inch, 28/32 Track Reproduce Interconnections : 836000-3 TTL BULLETIN NO. 3638-1 REGULATED AC TO DC POWER SUPPLY GENJiRAL This bulletin contains complete information on the optional ac to dc power supply unit Contained are characteristics, operating procedures, theory of operation, maintenance and adjustment procedures, parts list, and diagrams. This power supply unit contains the capability of producing, with good regulation, +28 Vdc, from a 110 or 220 Vac source of 47-63 Hz. * The supply being completely solid state in design is composed of one removeable circuit board and one module (heat sink). Proper fusing, reset capabilities, POWER indicator lamp and ON/OFF POWER switch are all conveniently located on the front panel of the unit. The unit may be installed in any convenient location but is normally placed beneath the recorder/reproducer tape transport. A five conductor cable, employing the proper connectors, is provided for installation between the power supply and the transport +28 Vdc is ran separately from the power supply to the transport for the blower fan. A power cord is provided for connection between a convenience outlet and the power supply unit. Refer to the I NSTAlLATION au LLETI N for information concerning the connection and installation of this unit. CHARACTER ISTICS Input Voltage . 110 Vac or 220 Vac at 47-63 Hz* Input Current 0-10 amps rms Temperature · 5°C to 50°C Output Voltage • 28 V dc ± .1 V dc Output Current · 0-20 amps continuous OPERATING PROCEDURES 8. CONTROLS - The following table 1 lists those operator controls employed with the power supply unit. For adjustment procedures refer to the maintenance section of this bulletin. ~ TABLE 1. CONTROLS AND ADJUSTMENTS CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS LOCATION AND FUNCTION ON/OFF POWER switch (S'/) Located on the front- panel of the unit it controls the application of ·primary power to the entire power supply. (Up is ON down is OFF) C(:===========================:====~I 1 * Mod kit (835496) available for operation from 47-400 Hz. BULLETIN NO. 3638-1 TABLE 1. CONTROLS AND ADJUSTMENTS (CONT') CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS LOCATION AND FUNCTION Reset Switch (S2) Located on the front panel of the unit it provides for reestablishing the output voltage after the overload protector has detected an overload condition and the regulator ceases to develop an output. • b. FUSING - The following table 2 lists those fuses employed by their circuit designation, rating and function. All fuses are mounted on the front of the unit and are easily accessable for checking and changing. CAUTION . Never replace a fuse with one of a higher rating unless continued operation of the equipment is more important than probable damage. If a fuse burns out immediately after replacement do not replace it a second time until the fault is located and has been corrected. TABLE 2. POWER SUPPLY FUSE fUNCTIONS FUSE F1 RATING (amp) FUNCTION PART NO. ABC-lOA (110 V input) Primary Power 859774-008 ABC-5A (220 V input) F2 859774-005 ABC-20A +28 volt 859774-011 THEORY OF OPERATION GENERAL - The entire unit consists of an ON/OFF POWER switch Sl, cooling fan, power transformer, bridge rectifier, one regulator module (A2) and one regulator board (A 1). Refer to figures 1 and 2 for schematic and wiring diagrams. Proper fusing is employed at the input and output oftlie power transformer. Upon rectification by a full wave bridge a filter network is employed. Power input to the unit is obtained through J3 and output through J2. +28 Vdc is ran separately to the transport for powering only the transport blower fan. . 8. b. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION - The primary power is applied through Fl and Sl to the primary winding of power transformer T 1 and to lamp DS 1. The output of the secondary ·winding is rectified by a full-wave rectifier, on regulator module A2, consisting of diodes A2CR 1 thru A2CR4. The dc output of the rectifier is filtered by capacitors C 1 and C2 and applied, through fuse F2, to the regulator circuit on regulator board A 1 and to the reset switch. The voltage regulator circuits on A 1 consist of differential amplifiers A 101 and A 102, regulator A 103 and series regulator A 104. The differential amplifier will provide an output at the collector of A 1Q2 6%\\\J\\~%%\Th ij~~«[&&(~~LYJ ================::::J:J Cl 2 j BULLETiN NO. 3638-1 that is representative of the diHerence between the voltages applied to the bases of transistors A 102 and A1Q1. The voltage at the base of A102 is set by A1R6 and A1CRl connected across the regulated output. Another voltage divider, consisting of resistors A 1 R9, A 1 R 10 and A 1 R 11, is connected across the regulated output. The voltage at the base of transistor A 10 1 is set by potentiometer A 1 R 10. When the power supply is operating normally, the voltage at the bases of differential amplifier A 101 and A 102 will be equrJl. Should the output of the regulator vary, a portion of the voltage change will appear at the base of AlA 1. The voltage at the base of transistor A 102 varies slightly with the output change but not to the extent as the base of transistor A 1Q 1, due to CR 1. The difference in voltage at the two bases is amplified and directly coupled from the collector of A 102 to the base of series driver A 103. The emitter of A 103 regulates series regulator A 104 and thus regulates the amount of conduction by each of the series-parallel regulators, A201 through A206, on the regulator module, A2. This brings the regulated output back to its proper level. When a high load or short condition is sensed the output of the regulator goes to zero due to the short circuit protection feature. During this period the bases of differential amplifier A 101 and A 102 return to 0 Vdc. When the reset switch, 52, is depressed, regulator board pin H is connected to pin J, discharging capacitor, C 1. When 52 is released p in A is again connected to pin J applying a positive pu lse to the base of A 102. The base of A101 goes positive due to the time delay of A lC2. This action establishes the normal operation of the regulator, producing the proper the proper output voltage. MAINTENANCE a. EOUIPMENT REQUIRED Tektronix 503 Oscilloscope or Equiv. Fluke 2800-A Digital Voltmeter or Equiv. b. ADJUSTMENTS - These procedures are to be followed for adjustment of the +28 Vdc supply output. Prior to adjustment, the supply output may be checked at the power and control connector panel, at the right side of the recorder/reproducer. Step 1. Ensure the front panel ring is removed and the chassis and front panel are slid out of the unit cabinet. Ensure the proper fuses are in place, the proper ac and de cables are connected, and T1 is wired properly for the proper input voltage (See figures 1 and 2). Step 2. Position the ON/OFF POWER switch at the front of the unit, to the ON (up) position. Step 3. . Connect a-digital voltmeter between A lTP3 (hi) and A lTP2 (on printed circuit board at rear of power supply). Step 4. c. Adjust A 1 R10 (on printed circuit board) for a +28 Vdc ±.1 Vdc reading on the voltmeter. TEST Step 1. With all power off visually inspect the power supply (caninet removed), printed circuit board, and module for loose connections or mountings, dented misshaped, missing, or broken compo- C:=====:="============::~==='=:===========:~=J 3 BULLETIN NO. 3638-1 nents, foreign material, and signs of overheating. Step 2. Check continuity as follows: HI La J2-A J2C READING 1K ohms or greater t Step 3. Apply POWER, and in sequence ensure the presence of the following approximate readings at the indicated points. Step 4. HI La READING T1 pin 8 T1 pin 9 34 Vac ±2 Vac + side of Cl - side of Cl 44 Vdc ±2 Vdc A1TP2 A1TP3 +28 Vdc A1TP1 A1TP3 +21 Vdc A1TP5 A1TP3 +21 Vdc A1TP4 A1TP3 -17 Vdc A1TP6 . A 1TP3 -16 Vdc Connect oscilloscope between A lTP3 (hi) and A 1TP2 (Io) and ensure ac ripple is less than 100 mVp-p. PARTS LIST Power Supply 28 Vdc 835564 Unit #2 - Power Supply *B1 C1 C2 DSl C3 C4 CRl MPl MP2 Q1 822087 859774-011 691975-035 J2 836077-004 T1 XFl 510225 J3 854725 XF2 812299 812299 03 04 852738 853533 851271 R7 R8 198200-122 198200-122 R9 198200-272 853531 Rl R2 691112-220 198200-103 329151-006 198200-103 854220 (for 03) R3 R4 198200-221 Rl0 Rn R12 855913 847825 (for 04 R5 TP1 thru 835887-007 28 V Regulator Board A 1 Cl C2 Sl S2 ** F 1 835564 F2 858820-001 J1 691975-035 02 847013 898235 851139-008 851139-016 R6 851264 270445 835563 691112-102 844164 198200-272 198200-470 TP6 852738 • Uses 854549-001 if 47 ·400 Hz Mod Kit 835496 Is used . •• 110 V input uses a 10 amp fuse, part no. 859774·008 ~_ V jOR'Jt USes q 5 emp fuse, E~n !.Jp· 859774-005 .. __ .,_________ ::J 4 . c: :: ==- J BULLETIN NO. 3638-1 PARTS LIST (CONT') 28 V Regulator Module A2 835560 CRl thru 835558 853507 825575 MP2 01 thru 06 Rl 897583 835558 thru R6 859759 CR4 El thru E12 MP1 47-440 Hz Input Mod kit 835496 Batac B1 r 854538-001 854549·001 5 r--------- --- -------------1 II I RI I I .IJL JW Ai!. I I <>1 40'-51 I I 6.5" .... 0 I Ai!. I I I I I I I I I I I I I J 3-1 Jr~ -, ~(------------------- I- I I I I I I "- ...... I I I BI I I I I I I FA" + crl F~ I "- ..... .... 1 ~3,.so0t1F .sov + I I I I I I I ! I I I I I 4----I I r I I POWf-A ZOR C2. 23,SOOt./F .soV I I I I I I rl;~ I' -W-;;:-;' r O/ ':..~U,:/~.V:~c. r----;--=--=--=--=-=~=_€L_ ~ I - - - -----'I ----r - - - ~ -~ cR3 LC -001 //~ ,0£ Ai 835S'h3 , \ ,0: J ~~/ B-SSSS7-o07 ) 01,)1 ~-----JZ-I!. ,-----J,-C .. .t Z.7D 44S . ...'" ..... ,. ...... .!..!.J.. .!. '" u ..~ .,., ~ ~ m 4-,4":)-001 'WJRE. AS SHOWN IN DoT"T£D I-INJE:S. oPLAAr/oH usE 10AMP 8S"!')77-4--oo9. OPERATION USE 5}.MP 13SS774--o0S. ... ~# tj DSI 81Z.L99 ~ . WfA,£ tOGA. ® @ . 51 8 ...... 087 Figure 2. Power Supply Wiring Diagram ( 9 BULLETIN NO. 3637-1 DC TO DC CONVERTER GENERAL J This bulletin contains complete information on the de to de converter assembly, A6. Contained are characteristics, operating procedures, theory of operation, maintenance and adjustment procedures, parts list, and diagrams. The primary function of this assembly is to convert the +24 Vdc or +28 Vdc (two ranges) input to the recorder/reproducer into regulated outputs of ±12 Vdc and +5 Vdc. The entire assembly consists ofa transformer, filter and bridge rectifier networks, and two printed circuit boards; regulator board and driver board. The assembly, especially the printed circuit boards, are aceessable by opening the left side door of the recorder/reproducer. CHARACTERISTICS +24 Vdc range ±2 Vdc +28 Vdc range ±2 Vdc both at 8 amps max. Input . . . . Output 12 Vdc. 12±.1 Vdc at 4 amp max. 5 Vdc . 5±.25 Vdc at 3 amp max. OPERATING PROCEDURES CONTROLS - The only operator co~trol is the inp.ut voltage range switch at the lower portion of the assembly, accessable by opening the left side door of the recorder/reproducer. With +28 Vdc input to the recorder/reproducer this switch should be set to the 28 volt position and with +24 Vdc input it should be set to the 24 volt position. For adjustment procedures, refer to the maintenance section of this bulletin. a. CAUTION When switching input voltage ranges always remove power. b. FUSING - The only fuse encorporated with this assembly is F 1, located below the input voltage range switch at the lower portion of the assembly. F 1, an AGX-8A (part no. 510279-004), fuses the input voltage to the entire assembly. Note, a spare fuse is found in the spare fuse holder at the top of the assembly. THEORY OF OPERATION a. GENERAL - The entire de to de converter assembly, A6, consists of the regulator board A2 (835682), driver board A 1 (835684i, range switch S 1, output transformer T 1, bridge rectifier assemblies. CR 1 and CR2, and filter networks of L 1 through L3 and C1 through C3. Briefly the converter functions :: : BULLETIN NO. 3637-1 by changing the input dc voltage to ac and applying it through a step-down transformer and driver circuits to rectifiers and filters, producing an output of ±12 Vdc and +5 Vdc. CI RCUIT DESCRIPTION - The input dc voltage is applied through TB 1-1 (hi) and fuse F 1 to b. regulator board A2, at P1-C and D. This voltage is applied to a multivibrator circuit consisting of A2Q1 and A202, and associated circuitry. The multivibrator output, a square wave with its symmetry adjustable by potentiometer A2R6, is applied through emitter followers A203 and A204 to a push-pull amplifier, A205 and A206. This circuit amplifies the square wave to present an output from the regulator board, P1-A and B, of approximately 27V POp. This square wave output is applied to the driver board, A 1, through P1-K and L, to step-down transformer A 1T1. The outputs at the secondary windings of A 1T1 are applied to push-pull amplifiers A 101 and A 102, and A 103 and A 104. The amplified output of the driver board, at P1-E and F, is applied to the primary ofT1. One secondary ofT1 is rectified and filtered to provide +12 Vdc at W1 and -12 Vdc at W3. The other secondary is rectified, filtered, and divided to provide +5 Vdc at the + si de of C3. The regulator capability of the converter is provided by reference amplifier A208 and associated circuitry. The reference amplifier, A208, will provide an output at the collector that is representative of the change in the output of the bridge, CR 1, or the dc output of the converter. The change is sensed by resistors R 13, R 16 and R 17 which develop the voltage at the base of A2Q8. R 16, output voltage adjust, is used to vary the voltage applied to the base of A208, thus varying the output from the converter. Should the output of the regulator vary due to load, A208 and associated circuitry senses the variation and amplifies the difference. The amplified difference is applied to the base of A2Q7, regulator driver, and either aids or hinders its conduction. The output of A2Q7 determines the amount of conduction by 4105 and A 106, controlling the amount of voltage drop across these transistors. This effectively controls 'the voltage to the primary of T 1 and the output of the converter. MAINTENANCE a. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED Tektronix 503 Oscilloscope or Equiv. Fluke 8100-A Digital Voltmeter or Equiv. b. ADJUSTM ENT Step 1. Ensure all power is off. Open the left side door of the recorder/reproducer and locate the dc to dc converter assembly. Step 2. Place the regulator board on its extender, ensure the range switch is positioned properly according to the input Voltage, and apply POWER. Step 3. Monitor, with an oscilloscope, the collectors of transistors A201 and A202, and adjust balance potentiometer R6 for the best possible square wave (least ripple). Step 4. Connect a dc voltmeter to W1 (hi) and W2 (10) (terminals W 1, 2, and 3 are located at the top of the assembly across from the spare fuse and are arranged in descending order, W3 at the top). Adjust output voltage adj, R 16, for a reading of 12 Vdc ±.1 Vdc. c================~ 2 BULLETIN NO. 3637-' Step 5. Connect a de voltmeter to W2 (hi) and W3 (10), reading negative voltage, and ensure'3 reading of -12 Vdc ±.1 Vde. Step 6. Connect a de voltmeter to W2 (10) and the + side of C3, and ensure a reading of +5 Vde ±.25 Vde. C. J TEST Step 1. With all power off visually inspect the de to dc converter assembly and each associated printed circui~ board for loose connections or mountings, dented, misshaped, missing or brolten components, foreign material, and signs of overheating. Step 2. Tag and remove all output connections from Wl, W2, W3, and C3(+); and check continuity as follows: READING LO HI 1 K ohm or greater TB1-2 TB1-' 1 K ohm or greater W2 Wl 3 K ohm or greater W3 W2 10 K ohm or greater W2 + side of C3 Step 3. Replace the output connections to W1, W2, W3, and C3(+}; and place the regulator board, A2 (pin 835682), on its extender. Apply POWER and, in sequence, ensure the presence of the foll.owing approximate readings at the indicated points. HI READING LO TP3 TPl input voltage of approx imately +24 Vde or +28 Vdc. TP2 TPl 6.25 Vdc Step 4. Remove POWER and place the driver board, A 1 (pIn 835684}, on its extender. Step 5. Apply POWER and ensure the following approximate readings. HI LO READING TP7 TP5 48 V Pop square wave TP8 TP5 48 V pop square wave TPl TP5 28 V p-p square wave TP4 TP5 3 V pop irregular waveform with possible spikes to 28 V. TP6 TP5 Nearly 0 Vde under continuousload TP2 TP5 28 V POp square wave TP3 TP5 28 V p-p squa~e wave :oJ 3 Ch.l 9·73 BULLETIN NO. 3637·1 Step 6. Monitor the output voltages as foli:'''''s and ensure ripple does not exceed 40 mVp-p for the 12 V outputs and 20 mVp·p for tr-? :: '/ output. Refer to step 4, under b. adjustments, and figure 1 for locations of W1, W2 . \',3: 3nd + side of C3. LO OUTPUT W1 W2 +12 Vdc W2 W3 -12 Vdc + side of C3 W2 +5 Vdc HI PA.RT5 LIST Basic C1 thru C3 CRl CR2 F1 J1 691975-017 854547 510007-002 510279-004 835887-007 AsS€~ :\ly A6 J2 L1 83::B37-007 270175 thru L4 Rl 51 691112-181 691664 835680 Tl TB1 Wl thru W3 XFl 270449 835055-001 859834-017 835004 Driver Board A6A 1 835684 Cl MP1 01 thru 06 847013 835593 (for Ql-6) 867618 Rl R2 R3 R4 844157 897583 897583 6911 i 3-220 Regulator Board A6A2 Cl C2 C3 C4 C5 CR1 CR2 CR3 CR4 MPl MP2 MP3 01 thru 896798 04 896294 05 896478 06 896478 07 691686-027 08 853531 Rl 844510 R2 844510 R3 853531 854220 (for 05, 6) R4 R5 847825 (for 07) R6 854441·004 R7 (for TPl-3) R8 854539 851280 851280 853533 854539 691112-102 198200·222 198200-102 198200-332 198200-223 854535-008 198200-223 198200-332 c====================:::=.~:~ Ch.l 9-73 T1 TPl thru TP8 270447 855913 835682 R9 RlO Rll R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 R17 R18 R19 TPl thru TP3 198200-102 691113-470 198200-222 198200-222 198200-392 198200-103 198200·102 854535-006 198200-152 691113-221 198200-222 855913 4 CC========~:::::=========='==:=:::====~-J v, .. w OP JI+vl ',UM wIIIINw- So-IP l 8"5887-00 7 MOUfiTIN<"- PI.;Ur.. IN POSITION SID ... of "" .. .J.e 'l'IoM /' I® © 00000 00 O®®~~ S/t0WN FoR fOSI--r ION ./ ~0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ® /' /" /" /' /' ------ - --- --- ®I~ '[ -, '" ~ .J ~ -, .., W Ij 8nlfl) .... ·oJ'7 Wl. 1 8S.,.'Jf· 'A/!£ 1'10 l1'3 -004 FuSE. )lOL-£)Ep' r r m -I Z Z o Figure 1. DC to DC Converter Wiring Diagram IA-Z.- ------ I 8 3S'" 8Z- o +l.8V -rP3 dl-C )I)~~ "0-7 )J.l.=JLJ .-_-=Jc.o.-' I o rPz. CAl ,,,el.3 1\3 I IX r61-~ >-4--------o~ TBI-i. 11$ 3.JI( liS- , clIl. UK 1\9 II'. C.3; ,,,""4- I TBI-I 1\43·31\ .o2UF I I I L_ /110 47.1\. Z.W >----.+------------------------, _k-=-__-=-_. rAiI 8'35 ~S4'-I----+----.~I I AI TI -£ I I I I I I A' TI L __. .• JJ\. 3W -= I'tI JOOJl.. lIZ. W --- ----' --- ---- --- --- = ,.,....- BULLETI N NO. 3637-1 - - - --- --- --- --- - - --- --- --o +U!V ,P3 --------t-------+.--------.--RI o IK ,Pi!. /'<'<' C, .08'" I RIS ,'?J4- .02.UF III" 500 J\. f lA- ZN4/Z4 CII4IN e1.3 Cl + l.ZUF lOY Rf7 f.SK d,-Ii't 4+1211 -,}+5V - - - - - - - - - . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --<=>-....... I I ·n7lS I I '§),p t 13)15 I I I o ./..11. 3W I III 100.A. Ill. W '--.~ . . <. .:--~i - - - --' ---' -~.~ -1 Figure 2. DC to DC Converter Schematic BULLETIN NO. 3633-1 EDGE A/B RECORD/REPRODUCE • GENERAL This recorderlreproducer, with the edge AlB record/reproduce option, has the capability of recording and reproducing both voice commentary and time code signals, simultaneously. Actual recording and reproducing of the voice commentary is independent of which operate mode (Record or Reproduce) the machine is in. Time code signals are handled much the same as data signals. RECORD must be activated to record time code signals. Each individual component of the edge A/B record/reproduce feature for this machine is an option. A full complement of components would consist of the following five principle assemblies: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Edge AlB Record Board Reproduce Board (used for reproducing voice and time code signals) Microehone Head Set Remote Speakerl Amplifier Enclosure CHARACTERISTICS a. EDGE A/B RECORD BOARD 1. Bias Bias Input level . Bias Frequency 2. 1Vp-p min. , 8.4 MHz -, Voice Circuitry Voice fnput Level (from microphone) Voice Input Impedance . . Voice Frequency Range , . Voice Output Level (to head) Voice Circuits Power Requirements. C"====:======================~3- .... , 10mVrms min. • 47K Ohm 300 Hz to 3kHz 50 rna p-p bias with 3 rna p-p voice +12Vdc±.lVdc at 70 ma --12Vdc±.lVdc at 60 rna 1 r:==:==========Ch==, 6-7==3::::::::JI ~I~i~~ BULLETIN NO. 3633-1 CHARACTERISTICS (cont'd) 3. Time Code Circuitry Time Code Input Level 100 mVrms min. with a range of .1 to 1 Vrms Time Code Input Impedance Time Code Frequency Range 20K max. IRIG B Signals-l00 Hz to10kHz 50 ma p-p bias with 5.5 ma p-p time code Time Code Output Level (to head) b. VOICE REPRODUCE BOARD Input Signal Level (from Head) Input I mpedance (to Head). . Ouput Signal Level . . . . . Output I mpedance (to Speak-Amp Encl.) Frequency Response Power Requirement c. SPEAKER/AMPLIFIER ENCLOSURE Loudspeaker Power Output Headphone Power Output (Phone Plug inserted in J2) Power Requirements Temperature Range. d. 1 mVrms min. 150 Ohm 1 Vrms 2.5 K Ohm Max. 300 Hz to 3 kHz +12 Vdc ± .5Vdc . -12 Vdc ±.5Vdc Approximately 2 Watts min. across ·45 Ohm load Approximately 0.05 Watts min. across 2 K Ohm load power. 28Vdc @ 250 ma Max. Continuous. O°F. to 130°F. MICROPHONE Element Type Amplifier Voltage Gain Frequency Response Battery . . . . . Ceramic o to 15 db 300 Hz to 3 kHz 7 Volt OPERATING PROCEDURES a. OPERATOR CONTROLS AND ADJUSTMENTS 1. RECORD - The following table lists the controls and adjustments associated with the microClone and record board of this feature. For adjustment procedures refer to the maintenance section of this bulletin. cc===:=========::=:=========~~ 2 cc:=====~=======================~ BULLETIN NO. 3633-1 TABLE 1. RECORD BOARD AND MICROPHONE CONTROLS CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT . LOCATION AND FUNCTION On/Off Pushbutton Located on side of microphone, this control applies the voice signal and bias signal to the board (annotate feature). Volume Located at top rear of microphone, this control determines the output signal level from the microphone. A/B Track Selection Switch (S1) Located on the side of the edge A/B board, this switch selects either track A voice and track B time code or track A time code and track B voice. Voice Bias Adj (R2) Located on the lower front of the edge A/B board, this adjustment controls the input bias level to the voice record circuitry. Voice B!as Tune (C5) Located on the side of the edge AlB board, this control provides adjustment for maximum power transfer between bias driver (voice circuitry) and the load (head). Time Code Bias Adj (R22) Located on the upper front of the edge A/B board, this adjustment controls the input bias level to the time code record circuitry. Time Code Bias Tune (C22) Located on the side of the edge AlB board, this control provides adjustment for maximum power transfer between bias driver and load (head). Time Code Rec Adj (R22) Locate on the upper front of the edge AlB board, this controls provides adjustment of the record current (time code signals) applied to the head. 2. REPRODUCE - The following table lists those controls associated with the voice reproduce board and speaker/amplifier. ~ TABLE 2. REPRODUCE BOARD AND SPEAKER-AMP CONTROLS CONTROL Volume (RS) Volume'tRl) FUNCTION Located directly on voice reproduce board, this control determines the output signal level from the board. Volume control Located on Speaker/Amp enclosure, , this control determines the v.olume of the reproduced signal at the Speaker/Amplifier input . .. BULLETIN NO. 3633-1 b. VOICE/TIME CODE OPERATING PROCEDURES 1. RECORD Step 1. Ensure the edge AlB record board is positioned properly in the record chassis. Refer to the proper record chassis wiring diagram and/or bulletin. Step 2. The , microphone plug is inserted into one of the following jacks, dependent on the listed situations. (1) Standard portable models only- plug into the IN VOICE jack on the record connector panel. (2) Standard laboratory models only- plug into the VOICE A/B jack on the record connector panel (rear of record chassis). (3) Standard portable or laboratory models with a speaker/amplifier enclosure- plug into the I N VOICE jack on the speaker/amplifier enclosure. To record time code signals or other compatible signals, connect the time code source (normally a BNC connector) to one of the following connectors, dependent on the listed situations. (1) Standard portable models only- connect to J 16, labeled' N EDG E track, on the record connector panel. (2) Standard laboratory models only- connect to J15 on the record connector panel. Step 3. Place the A/B Track Selection switch (S 1), located on the side of the edge A/B record board, in the desired position (edge track B not normally available on one half inch heads). VOICE A indicates voice will be recorded on track A and time code, if applicable, on track B. VOICE B indicates voice on B and time code on A. Step 4. Place the recorder/reproducer into the desired operate mode at the correct speed. When recording time code signals the RECORD pushbutton must be depressed. Step 5. Set the microphone volume/gain control (located on the microphone) to 6 initially. This should produce approximately 100 mVrms at VOICE REC LEV testpoint, TP1; if not, readjust to obtain this level. With the microphone approximately 8 inches from the mouth, depress the pushbutton and speak into microphone at a normal level. This level may need resetting as determined on reproducing or to compensate for a weak battery. Step 6. The voice record level on the voice record circuitry is set at the factory and requires no operator adjustment. When recording time code signals ensure a 100 mVrms reading at the TIME CODE REC LEV testpoint, TP2, located on the front of the board. Adjust TIME CODE REC ADJ, R17, if necessary to obtain 100 mVrms. =========.=-=.=-=.====~ 4 cc======================= BULLETIN NO. 3633-1 2. REPRODUCE-Reproducing voice and/or time code signals is detailed in the following paragraphs, dependent on the situation. (a) STANDARD PORTABl.E MODELS-Track selection for reproducing is obtained by the placement of the voice reproduce board in the reproduce chassis. With the board plugged into EDG E A, J 15, Track A is employed. With the board plugged into EDGE B, J16, Track B is employed. Note that a one-half inch J tape system normally does not have a Track B. 80th J 15 and J 16 are phone jacks. If a BNC output is required a phone jack to BNC adapter is supplied in the accessory kit. This adapter is to be used only in reproducing. If both tracks A and B are to reproduce simultaneously an optional voice reproduce board must be employed. Check jumper placement, as desired, in Table 3. Step 1.- If the speaker-amplifier enclosure is supplied, ensure the voice power cable is inserted into the VOICE POWER jack on the power connector panel. Step 2. Insert the speaker-amplifier (or head set) phone plug into the proper phone jack. Use J15 if voice is recorded on edge track A or J16 if voice is recorded on edge track B. If time code signals were recorded on edge track A the reproduced signal would be available at phone jack J15. Iftime code signals were recorded on edge track 8 the reproduced signal would be available at phone jack, J16. All of the previously listed connections in step 2 are made on the Reproduce Connector Panel. Step 3. Place the machine in the desired operate mode at the same speed at which voice or time code signals were recorded. Step 4. Adjust the reproduce board VOLUME and, if applicable, the speaker-amplifier VOLUME, for an adequate playback level. (b) STANDARD LABORATORY MODELS-Track selection is obtained by the placement of the voice reproduce board in the reproduce chassis. With the board plugged into J15 (third slot from endsingle or double chassis) track A is employed. With the board plugged into.J16 (second slot from the endsingle chassis) or J 15 (third slot from the second chassis end-double chassis) track B is employed. Step 1. Ensure the speaker-amplifier voice power cable is connected to the VOICE POWER jack on the reproduce connector panel. Step 2. Ensure that: (1) The time code output, if applicable, is connected to external equipment as desired. (2) The voice output is connected to the speaker-amplifier. Step 3. If the headset is to be used, connect it to the phone jack on the front speaker-amplifier. Step 4. Place the machine in the desired operate mode, at the same speed voice or time code was was recorded at. Step 5. Adjust the reproduce board VOLUME and speaker-amplifier VOLUME for an adequate playback level. BULLETIN NO. 363~·1 c. MICROPHONE BATTERY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE-To replace the battery of the M+2U. microphone complete the following steps: Step 1. Place microphone face down on a clean surface, possibly on a bench cloth to prevent scratches to case. Step 2. • Step 3. Slowly remove the back of the microphone case, making sure the circuit board, with the volume control, remains in the front section of the case. Step 4. Carefully pull the battery from the battery holder, while holding down on the circuit board. Step 5. Place a new Malloi)' TR-175 7 volt battery, or equivalent, into the battery holder, observing correct polarity. Step 6. Carefully reverse the disassembly steps. Be sure the cable wires loop around the battery when the back is placed in position. Carefully remove the four screws securing the back. THEORY OF OPERATION The entire edge A/B option consists of the microphone, edge A/B record board, voice reproduce board, and speaker/amplifier enclosure. The following theory of operation covers all available options for this feature. The microphone assembly consists of a ceramic element, a two stage amplifier, a volume control and ~nd on/off pushbutton annotate switch. This assembly may be used to record voice on edge A or B, and possible on a data track. The edge A/B record board consists of two separate record circuits, voice and time code. Each circuit consists of a bias driver, signal driver, and adding circuit. The following functional description concerns the voice record circuitry. With the pushbutton on the microphone depressed, the voice signal from the microphone, is fed to the edge AlB record board. Also as this pushbutton is depressed, relay K1 is activated providing +12 Vdc to the bias board and ±12Vdc to the voice record circuits. This feature (annotate) enables voice annotation of pre-recorded tapes. With the bias board activated during this voice annotate period, a bias signal is fed into the voice record circuits at Pl-21. This bias signal is applied through VOICE BIAS ADJ, R2, to emitter follower 01. 01 provides current gain for push-pull amplifier 02 and 03, via transformer T1. Coupling transformer T2 is used for impedance matching between the voice record circuits and the head. The voice signal (during the annotate period) enters the edge AlB record board through P1-15. The voice signal amplifier consists of 04 and 05 with an ac Voltage, proportional to the record current, provided at TPf. The current into the head is determined by the input voltage at P1-15, which is adjustable by the volume control on the microphone. The ae voltage at TP1, suggested for optimum voice recording, should be adjusted for approximately 100 mVrms. This voltage is also available at P1-20 for use with external monitoring equipment. The voice adding circuit, used to combine the bias signal current and voice signal current, consists of L 1, C4, C5, L2, and C7. L1 and C4 are series resonant at the bias frequency. This filter-circuit is utilizied to leduce harmonics, of the bias frequency, passing the head. Parallel resonant filter, C7 and L2, is used to t>revent bias from entering the voice signal amplifier stage. BULLETIN NQ. 3633-1 THEORY OF OPERATION (cont'd) L2 also provides a low impedance path to the head for the voice signal current. VOICE BIAS TUNE, C5, is used to tune the secondary of transformer T2 to the particular edge track being used. This adjustment provides for maximum power transfer between the voice record circuits and the head. Diode CR2 rectifies the bia's signal providing a dc indicating voltage used to adjust CS. The following explanation pertains to the time code record circuitry. The bias driver and signal adding circuits of the time code record section function identically to the bias and adding circuits of the voice record circuitry, previously explained. Note that the RECORD mode must be activated to ensure a bias signal to the time code bias driver circuit. The time code signal record circuits function much the same as the voice signal record circuits with the addition of the TIME CODE REC ADJ, R22. The signal driver is comprised of a two stage amplifier,. Q9 and Q 10, with the current to the head determined by R22, at the input of the amplifier. The ac voltage, proportional to the head current, at TP1, suggested for optimum time code signal recording, should be adjusted, by R22, for 100 mVrms. This voltage is also available at Pl-2 for use with external monitoring equipment. The outputs of both the voice record circuits and the time code record circuits are routed through the A/B TRACK SELECTION SWITCH, Sl, to the head.S1 provides either voice recording on track A and ttme code on track B, or time code on track A and voice on track B. On reproducing the signal passes from the reproduce head through the pre-amplifier and into the voice reproduce board located in the reproduce chassis. The signal is amplified by Aland passes through RB, output level control (VOLUME). The amplified reproduced signal enters the speaker/amplifier (when supplied) through P-2 and is applied to R 1, VOLUME control. R 1 controls the level of the signal being fed into the power amplifier board. On the amplifier board R 1, R2, and R3 provide the necessary DC bias for Q1. The signal is amplified by Q 1 and applied to the base of Q2 where it is amplified again and applied to the push-pull amplifier Q3 and Q4. RS and R6 provide a negative feedback circuit which determines the overall gain of the amplifier. The power amplifier applies the amplified voice signal through the normally closed contacts of J2 to the 10uspeaker.H the head set phone plug is inserted into J2 the signal to the louspeaker is interrupted and applied to the head set. A resistor in parellel with the head set provides the proper impedance match to the amplifier. MAINTENANCE When maintenance becor:nes necessary the following procedures will assist in locating the malfunction. Failure to obtain the proper test indication is a clue to a particular malfunction. These procedures make no attempt to be a complete troubleshooting guide. AU adjustments contained herein pertain to normal machine operation. Although these adjustments are performed at the factory the need for their re-adjustment may be evident for correct machine performance. a.EQUIPMENT REQUIRED - The following equipmentis required for those maintenance procedures' set forth in this section. In the event of deeply involved maintenance or repair, more advanced equipment may be employed. ( BULLETIN NO. 3633-1 MAINTENANCE (cont'd) Simpson Model 260 YOM or equivalent HP Model 200 CD Signal Generator or equivalent HP Model 400 E VTVM or equivalent HP Model 411 RF Millivoltmeter or equivalent Tektronic 503 Oscilloscope or equivalent b. EDGE AlB RECORD BOARD TEST PROCEDURES Step 1. With the edge AlB record board removed from the recorder/reproducer, and its shield re-moved, visually inspect it for loose connections or mountings, dented, misshaped, or broken.components, foreign material, and signs of overheating. Step 2. Mount the edge AlB record board on the extender board and insert the microphone plug into the phone jack on the record connector panel. Step 3. _Depress POWER, STOP, and the microphone pushbutton, and ensure the presence of the following readings and conditions. +12 Vdc at pin X2 of relay K 1 -12 Vdc at pin A2 of relay K1 Ground at TP5 Approx. 1Vp-p bias signal at 8.4 MHz at R 1, with TP5 grounded Step 4. Short the + side of C8 and C16 to TP5, ground. Step 5. Monitor the signals individually at VOICE BIAS TUNE MONITOR, TP3, and TIME CODE BIAS TUNE MONITOR, TP4, with a YOM. Step 6. Adjust VOICE BIAS TUNE C5 (TP3) and TIME CODE BIAS TUNE C22 (TP4) individually for maximum dc voltages. Step 7. Adjust VOICE BIAS ADJ R2 and TIME CODE BIAS ADJ, R 17, for 2 Vrms at TP3 (R2) and TP4 (R17). Readjustment may be necessary upon observation of reproduced signal. Bias should be adjusted for maximum level of reproduced signal. Step 8. Remove the short between the + side of C8 and TP5, and connect the signal generator to these two points. Step 9. Adjust signal generator for 10 mVrms at 1 kHz. Step 10. Connect the VTVM between VOICE REC LEV TP1 (hi) and GND TP5 (10). Step 11. Ensure a reading of approximately 100 mVrrns. Step 12. Remove the signal generator connections and replace the short between the + side of C8 and TP5. Step 13. Remove the short between the + side of C 16 and TP5 and connect the signal generator to these two points. Step 14. Adjust signal generator for 100 rnVrms at 1 kHz. §I\K\~WIlJ~~~ ~ail~~~~~1}W) c:: =: ,. ------':-:-::--=:J 8 CC=:::=========::==::::===="====·===::1:1 BULLETIN NO. 3633-1 MAINTENANCE {cont'd} Step 15. Connect a VTVM between TIME CODE REC LEV, TP2 (hi) and GND, TP5 (10). Step 16. Ensure a reading of approximately 100 mVrms. Adjust TIME CODE REC LEV ADJ, R22, to obtain this reading. Step 17. Increase the signal generator output level to approximately 1 Vrms and ensure the capability of obtaining 100 mVrms at TP2, by adjustment of R22. Step 18. Set R22 for 100 mVrms at nearest the anticipated time code input level. c. VOICE REPRODUCE BOARD TEST PROCEDURE Step 1. With voice reproduce board removed from the recorder/reproducer, visually inspect it for loose connections or mountings, dented, misshaped, missing, or broken components, foreign material and signs of overheating. Step 2. Apply povver after the following connections are made. a. Connect +12 Vdc lead to R5. b. Connect -12 Vdc lead to R6. c. Connect signal generator output to R 1 (hi) and board ground. d. Connect a 1.8 K Ohm resistor across the swinger of R8 and ground, output of board. e. Connect Hi of vtvm to swinger of R8 and Lo to ground. f. Connect oscilloscope across output (1.8K resistor). Step 3. Adjust the signal generator output to 1 mVrms at 250 Hz. Step 4. Adjust volume control R8 between upper and lower limits. The output should be undistorted and range frOm 0 volts {R8 full clockwise) to about 1 Vrms (R8 full counterclockwise). d. SPEAKER/AMPLIFIERENCLOSURE TEST PROCEDURES Step 1. Visually inspect the chassis and amplifier board for loose connections or mountings, dented, misshaped, missing, or broken components, foreign material and signs of overheating. Step 2. Ensure the following ohmic measurements between the indicated points, being sure to observe correct polarity~ BULLETIN NO. 3633-1 MAINTENANCE (cont'd) Step 3. Ensure connection of power cable to chassis and apply power (+28 Vdc) through J5A and P3A. Step 4. Insert head set phone into J2. Step 5. Connect signal generator to P2 (Hi and Lo), and adjust fora 1 Vrms 1 kHz signal. Step 6. By adjusting R 1, an undistorted signal of 10 Vrms should be obtained. PARTS LIST 854950 856635 Dual Headset Microphone A4A 1 Voice Amplifier Board 855078 A4 Speak-Amp Enc!. 854521 F1 XF1 J1 J2 LS1 R1 R2 Cl C2 C3 C4 CRl 01 821618 812299 853631 855129 855339 843680 691113-680 691391-038 851139-015 691391-038 851139-015 93240 853037 02 Q3 04 Rt R2 R3 853532 853533 853532 853530-336 853530-335 853530-246 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 896613 853530-101 853530-212 896196 844323 898314 A20A 16 Voice Reproduce Board 856772 510020·043 . 510020-031 510020-127 510020-059 510020-023 855121 691391-002 691686-015 691686-011 691391-012 197212-004 859843 R1 R2,R4 R3 R5,R6 R7 R8 Cl C2 C3 C4,C5 C6 Al A19A 16 Edge AlB Record Board 835661 ... C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 859959-001 859959-001 197212-027 197212-050 850862 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 859959-001 854528-075 859959-002 691391-017 691391-004 Cl1 C12 C13 C14 C15 859959-001 691391-030 859959-001 859959-001 197212-027 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 859959-002 691391-017 691391-004 691686-030 854528-075 BULLETIN NO. 3633-1 A 19A 16 Edge AlB Record Board 835661 C21 C22 C23 'C24 C25 C26 C27 CRl thru CR4 K1 L1 . L2 L3 L4 197212-050 850862 859959-011 mayor may not be present 859960-001 859959-001 844510 855130-002 853587-029 853587-028 853587-029 853587-028 Pl 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 010 R1 R2 R3 R4 853518 510018 510076 510076 859971 859970 510018 510076 510076 859971 859970 198200-101 854535-008 198200-470 198200-152 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 Rl0 Rl1 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 R17 R18 R19 198200-100 198200-472 198200··103 198200-222 198200-473 198200-272 198200-680 198200-152 198200-470 198200-470 198200-681 198200-101 854535-008 198200-470 198200-152 R20 R21 R22 R23 R24 R25 R26 R27 R28 R29 *R30 Sl Tl thru T4 198200-100 198200-472 854535-011 198200-103 198200-681 198200-220 198200-152 198200-101 198200-103 198200-222 See Table 3 510277 510015-001 *Used oflly on 1/2 inch heads. TABLE 3. EDGE AlB RECORD BOARD CONFIGURATIONS PART NO. RESISTOR R30 JUMPER CONFIGURATION 835661-001 Not Used A to A, B to B, C to C Voice and Time Code, 1 inch 835661-002 1 K ohm, 870037 A to A, B to B, C to C Voice and Time Code, 1/2 inch 835661-003 Not used Not Used Voice only, 1 inch 835661-004 1 K ohm, 870037 Not Used . Voice only, 1/2 inch NOTE If voice recording only is desired the jumpers (Table 3) should always be removed to prevent accidental erasure of voice by the time code circuitry during RECORD mode. If time code recording is cfesired either with or without voice, the jumper should always be present. ======================:33 c:r 11 ="::===--============::=JI ~I~~~ C:::I . BULLETIN NO. 3633-1 FROM IRE~E REPRODUCE HEAD AZOAl7JI5-KJ TRACK A A2Q417~6-1O TRACKB A2OAIN!5-9 C2 .oat-- I R. ?? 11 it" "i;~~uI DUAL HEADSET R2 C6 47 I Cl F~ <:.PI-1Sl.". PEAKER -AMPLIFIER OR REMOTE CHASSIS , BOARD 4.712OV OR A2OAI7J16 - 9 ENCLOS""' I I HEADSET OUT f!4 t 47 l'!6 -12V~-6V - -600 1 IN ..LC5 !C 22 "r=~:" - :p;V ~- RS 10K tLC4 f] r 11 - OR ________________ =.;.OAf7.N6-17 A2 ACOAI?JI6-/B -- ,!2e:DC, fl-;; A2 (:WMS-18 TRACKA OR -AZ0AI7:'-5-17 ---- - I TRACKS ---- A.J5A T82-2 P3A RI 93.1K C3 047 I R4 10K +_ I -=- ~~ em r -__~~'~~45~______~__+~' R2 9O.9K RG 4.75K 01 R7 22 04 2N2905 2N~904 B RS 1.2K AMPLIFIER BOARD P3H REPROOUCE CONNECTOR PANEL 17>_2_-4..-+-_ _ __ _______ ____________ ~3H. Figure 1. Reproduce Board and Speak/Amp, Schematic Diagram C=:=C====_:====================:J='~ 12 C[=:============================-:=:====:=::~:J 870887-1M BIAS IN + AI lloy ,oo~ c.W NOTE' ALL VALUES ARE IN OHMS OR MICROFARADS UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. lot AZ z.K VOICE 1. BIAS A3 ADJ. C.I jMiCROPHON~ I +12v I MIKE I "'7~ ':' .o'()F 11+ ps K ~--~~--~----~. I . 10 .... ell' 'N~I'" 4----f.l.:l.5.+---+------------r r...-_ _.q _ __~ P¥~H ce' jl- .", TALK 51 RECORD CONNECTOR PANEL AI.' JI-2 PI-TIP )>'A"'15JI.=5~....,JI5"'-'-I."<5< _I--e-_-'-'''-''T'P"'-'--=8'''OO~Y~:)AI5JI5 I .... PI-RING I PI-15 JI5-5( (PI-5 AI5J15 "'!.- I PI-6 ADJ. IN 1 JI5-;J .12V "'8 +7~ RECORD MODE Pl.1 L 54''-'---ti 1- BIAS ACTIVATED J15-6 SPEAKER- AMPLIFIER. OR REMOTE CHASSIS '----'E=N=C~L0~U_..:.R.:..:E,----, An z." TIME .cODE <:.1" H---{§}''-' :- s .OJuI' lo- B C.R3 IIZI (]--------+----~.-~---------~ IN 91+ Pf-;J +.7K c Pl·6 i TIME CODE RECADJ. BULLETIN f'lO. 3633-1 ~-TP3 A7 10K cs S-3SPF .". VOICE BIAS TUNE Cl ,sPF I-~ .... 7uk -1.aV TP1 /113 o -+1~ e/~ e~ /lID P1-20 TO VOICE VU METER luT' 111447~ Z_7K PI-14 A .". r----O:--I-----~ ce II ./IJP 119 -+7K e~ I 1· .. .oolUF I-= tSK Rle ell F 51'" 0/1JF es AlB TRACK SELECTION $'6 uF P1-9B ____________~------------------.----+------------~PI-/8 eM· INS/4- 1-3 ez, 101110. soPP IIza IIZS 10K Z.ZK TP4 + I~V .IRS oro ~sc.. DURING ANNOTATE cz, .o/u': ""c. e ezz !J-3SPF .c.~"" .". 1..+ TIME CODE BIAS TUNE &&0 "?s PF .... 'Uk <:.1... o TO RECORD HEAD P1-10 B P1-17A _IZV CIS Col" I .IUF IME CODe ECADJ. r.·OS6UF o 3 /ll.l.>o-'''-'---4 zoK j. ·TP2 7"--1----------------.10---------------4) P1-2 TO TIMING VU METER /lil-S .O/UF zzIIZ6 '.S-I< ______E_D_G_E_A/B RECORD BOARD r + CI7 S"<,UT' _J Figure 2. Edge AlB Record Board and Microphone, Schematic ~~~ ==========::;8;;708;;;8;;:;7-1;:;:;JM'~' ~~ Diagram 13 C! 835661-0TTS BULLETIN NO. 3642·1 PHOTO END·OF·TAPE SENSE • GENERAL The optional PHOTO END·OF-TAPE SENSE feature is provided to accomplish automatic stop for this recorder/reproducer, without the use of metallic markers or other devices. This tape sense feature is in addition to the standard tape sense feature (marker strips) utilizing the sense post. The entire option consists of a sense lamp and a sense detector for each tape reel. Refer to figure 1, below. The sense lamp and detector are positioned such that a full or partly full reel of tape does not allow the lamp emitted light to pass to the associated sense detector. As the tape becomes unwound from the reel to a determined amount (approx. 60 to 100 ft. of 1.5 mil tape left) the light passes to the sense detector and activates it. The sense detector when activated energizes the same tape sense circuitry (logic board) that the standard tape sense feature uses, and all tape movement is stopped. SENSE . DETECTOR~ D.. , '~ .-SENSE LAMP ~--------______~~~ Figure 1. « == : :: = Photo End-Of-Tape Sense, Functional Block Diagram :.:::::J 1 BULLETIN NO. 3642-1 OPERATING PROCEDURES a. CONTROLS - The only operator control present is the EaT switch, on the Power and Control Connector Panel (right side of the Recorder!Reproducer). This switch, labeled IN and OUT, energizes or deenergizes the sense circuitry on the Logic Board, (utilized also for the sense post method of tape sense). The sense lamp~ are lit continuously, independent of the EaT switch . . b. CHECKOUT - The following checkout procedures are provided for determining the operational status of the photo end-of-tape sense feature. If satisfactory results are not obtained, refer to the test and adjustments in the maintenance portion of this bulletin. Step 1. Step 2. Step 3. . Step 4. Step 5. Step 6. . Ensure tape is threaded properly and the EaT switch is set to the IN position. Apply power and ensure that both sense lamps (lower right side of RecordevReproducer) are lit and no obstructions (except tape on reels) are present between the sense lamps and sense detectors. Depress STOP, FORWARD, and FAST, in that sequence. The Recorder/Reproducer should automatically revert to STOP mode prior to the inner reel becoming completely empty of tape. There should be approximately 60 to 100 feet, (approximately 1/8 inch tape wrap) of tape left on the inner reel. Depress REVERSE and FAST. The Recorder;IReproducer should automatically revert to STOP mode prior·to the outer reel becoming completely empty of tape. There should be approximately 60 to 100 feet (approximately 1/8 inch tape wrap) of tape left on the outer reel. ,~AINTENANCE Should the photo end-of-tape sense feature fail to operate properly, the test and adjustment procedures should be followed. The following areas are of major concern with respect to proper operation of this feature. (1) Logic board sense circuitry, including the sensitivity adjustment potentiometer. (2) Sense lamps, sense detectors, and their alignment. a. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED Simpson 260 VOM or equivalent b. TEST AND ADJUSTMENT Step 1. Step 2. Step 3. Gain access to the Logic Board, right rear of RecordevReproducer, by removing the top and rear access panels. Place the Logic Board on its extender. Ensure tape is threaded properly, apply POWER, and depress STOP and FORWARD. Cover the sense detectors with masking tape, or other material, to prevent any light from activating them. Ensure the EaT switch is set to the IN position. Connect various resistors, ranging in value from 22 K ohm to 27 K ohm, between logic board pin J8-7 and system ground. Ensure STOP mode is activated with the application of one of these values. Ensure with a VOM, the presence of 12 to 14 Vdc at J8-7 when the Recordert Reproducer reverts to STOP mode. This ensures the logic board sensitivity adjustment is , I; BULLETIN NO. 3642-1 approximately set to a satisfactory level for either forward or reverse. Slight adjustment of sensitivity adjust, R9, may be required to bring the sense circuitry firing level within the above resistance ranges, providing the 12 to 14 Vdc. This resistance range, when met should also be appropriate for the sense post feature of tape sense . • Step 4. Complete the following to determine if the sense lamps are aligned properly. If the conditions and voltage measurements below are not obtained, refer to step 5, lamp alignment. a. Remove the material convering the sense detectors and move tape in forward until approximately 60 to 100 feet (approximately 1/8 inch of tape wrap) of tape is left on the inner reel. At this point move tape at the slowest speed and ensure that approximately one-half of the light beam is shaded (at the detector) by the tape on the reel. With this approximate condition present ensure, with a VOM, 12 to 14 Vdc between logic board pin J8-7 and ground. b. Remove POWER and physically move tape until the inner reel is nearly empty (three to four layers). Ensure the reading at J8-7 has changed to less than 5 Vdc. c. Complete the preceding a and b for the outer reel (reverse tape movement) using logic board pin J8-6. Step 5. If satisfactory results are not obtained in step 4, slight adjustment of the sense lamps and possibly detectors, will be required to produce the proper voltages with each of the two conditions. Adjustment of the lamp is accomplished by moving the lamp mounting bracket, possibly bending the lamp mounting bracket, and/or rotating the lamp holder. While adjusting the lamp beam, first strive to provide the less than 5 Vdc at J8-7 (inner) and J8-6 (outer) with nearly empty reels. After this has been accomplished ensure approximately 60 to 100 feet (approximately 1/8 inch of tape wrap) of tape on each reel produces 12 to 14 Vdc at J8-7 (inner reel) and J8-6 (outer reel). Slight adjustment of the sensitivity control on the logic board may help achieve improved final results. Step 6. In extreme cases, or when replacing lamps or detectors, complete the following: a. Remove the reels and replace with completely empty reels. b. Tape the tension arms off their stops with masking tape or other material. c. Apply POWER and depress STOP and FORWARD. d. Adjust the lamps and detectors as required to produce less than 5 Vdc at J8-7 (inner reel) and J8-6 (outer reel). e. With masking tape, place an obstruction on each reel hub simulating 1/8 inch tape wrap. f. Check and possibly adjust for the one-half shading effect producing the 12 to 14 Vdc at J8-7 (inner reel) and J8-6 (outer reel, with REVERSE mode activated). Step 7. Upon completion of alignment and adjustment, complete the previous operating checkout procedures to ensure proper operation. 3 BULLETIN NO. 3642-1,',. PARTS LIST Photo End-of-Tape Sense Kit Sense Detector Assembly (1) A29 Sense Lamp (2) DS3 and DS4 Sense Lamp Socket Assembly (2) XDS3 and XDS4 835586 835571 855027 843728 '--'h.---4>-- DS3 r-------;:=+=t-=> J8-7 (logic Board) ~ SENSE DETECT R A29 1---0----'- A6W2 (GND) . +5Vdc from E3-3 GND from W2 DS4 '-_~_-Q:;"-_ J8-6 (Logic Board)· Figure 2. Photo End-Of-Tape Sense, Schematic Diagram 4 BULLETIN NO; 3656-1. FM CALIBRATOR GENERAL This bulletin contains information pertaining to the optional SANGAMO FM CALIBRATOR unit. Information contained consists of general (with specifications), operating-use data, theory of operation, maintenance, parts list, and diagrams. Figure 1. FM Calibrator Unit The SANGAMO FM CALIBRATOR unit is used to conveniently check and/or calibrate any I RIG FM record/reproduce system. Capabilities of this unit include, (1) individual FM record channel calibration, (2) individual FM reproduce channel calibration, and (3) overall FM record/reproduce channel check. All AC and DC errors are displayed directly on a front panel meter. Operating features of the unit include five selectable FM bands"(at any tape speed), nine deviation settings, record-reproduce-test selection, impedance selection, and power on-off selection; all easily operated by front panel switches. Mounting is conveniently provided by insertion into any two adjacent reproduce board slots. This mounting feature also provides power acquisition and automatic speed selection from the reproduce chassis (as with a standard reproduce board), as selected at the recorder/reproducer control panel. Connections from the calibrator unit to the FM record or reproduce boards are possible via patch-cords. The calibrator unit is adaptable to a" SANGAMO SABRE record/reproduce systems, as well as the 3500 series (adapter required for 3500 series). Calibration of any IRIG FM record/reproduce system may be performed with this unit, providing a SANGAMO system is available for mounting, power acquisition, and speed s~lection. 1 BULLETIN NO. 3656-1 SPECIFICATIONS Band Selection Frequencies. Refer to Table 1 Center Frequency Deviation Selection 9 switch selected positions in 10% increments. ±30% is full scale dev. for bands X and II, ±40% for others. Accuracy. ±0.2 of full scale deviation, in the applicable band. Meter Error. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . Front panel zero center ±3% for full scale. I nput Impedance . Selectable - LO - 75 ohms HI - over 100 K ohms DC Reference Voltages 9 equally spaced values from +1.414 (±0.5 mv) to -1.414 (±0.5 mv), selectable via deviation switch. Temperature Range. . . DC Power Requ irements . +12 Vdc at 250 ma and -12 Vdc at 30 ma, supplied by any SANGAMO SAB R E system or 3500 series system. Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approximate size of two adjacent reproduce boards. OPERATING-USE DATA a. INSTALLATION - For proper operation the FM Calibrator unit must be inserted into any two adjacent reproduce board slots, not separated by a partition. If two empty slots are not available, remove one or two FM reproduce boards, as necessary. The removed boards may be calibrated in another slot. With SABRE series recorders the calibrator adapts directly. With 3500 series recorders an adapter (part no. 836390) is required between the calibrator and the reproduce chassis jacks. This adapter transposes the recorder's speed lines to properly interface to the calibrator unit. :: :: :: -: ) TABLE.1. FREQUENCY PER SPEED, BAND, AND DEVIATION SPEED/BAND* 60·15/16 ips Speed Range SPEED (ips) BAND FREQUENCY (kHz) 120· '·718 ips Spe8d SPEED (ips) 60 1/2 (W.B.I) 120 1/4 liNTER) 1/8 (LOW', X 30 15 w 7·1/2 II I 1/2 (W.S.I) 1/4 (INTER) 118 (LOW') 1·7/8 15/16 • 111W,IUII i (VIlB.I) 1/2 (INTER) 1/41LOW) 1/8 , 60 X II (W,B.11l I (W.fl.1l 1/2 (INTER) 1/4 (LOW) 1/8 X X II I 1/2 (W,B.1l 114 (!NTER) 1/8 (LOW') II (W.B.II) I (W,B.I) 1/2 (INTER) 1/<1 (LOW) 1/8 30 X X II I 1/2 (W.B.I) 1/4 (INTER) lIB (LOW') II (W.B.II) I (W.B.I) 112 (INTER) 1/4 (LOW) 1/8 15 X II 3·3/4 BAND X X II I Rang~ I 1/2 (W.S.I) 1/4 (INTER) 1/8 (LOW') X 7·1/2 II (W.ll.lI) I (W,B.I) 1/2 (INTER) 1/4 (LOW) 1/8 X X II I 112 (W.S.I! 1/4 (INTER) 118 (LOW') II iW.a.lI! I (W.S.I) 1/2 (INTER) 1/4 (LOW) 1/8 3·3/4 X X II I 1/2 (W.B.I) 1/4 (INTER) 1/8 (LOW') II (W.S.II) I iW.B.1) 1/2 (INTER) 114 (LOWI 1/8 1·718 , -40 -30 -20 -10 DEVIATION (%) 0 +10 no 540 840 630 960 259.2 129.6 64.8 302.4 151.2 75.6 32.4 37.8 360 270 129.6 64.8 32.4 16.2 420 315 151.2 75.6 37,8 18.9 480 360 172.8 86.4 540 405 194.4 97.2 48.6 24.3 600 450 216 108 54 180 135 64,8 32.4 16.2 8.1 210 157.5 75.6 37.8 18.9 240 180 86,4 43.2 21.6 10.8 270 202.5 97.2 48.6 24.3 12.15 300 225 I 90 67,5 32.4 16.2 8.1 4.05 105 78.75 37.8 18.9 120 90 43.2 21.6 10.8 5.4 135 101.25 60 45 9.45 9.45 4.725 33.75 16.2 8.1 4.05 2.025 52.5 39.375 18.9 9.45 4.725 2.362 22.5 26.25 16.875 8.1 4.05 2.025 1.012 11.25 8.437 4.05 2.025 1.012 .505 1080 1200 720 810 345.6 172.8 86.4 43.2 388.8 194.4 97.2 48.6 900 432 216 108 43.2 21.6 45 21.6 10.8 5.4 I 27 990 +20 +30 1440 1BOO 1110 12fJ(i 561.6 280.8 140.4 604.8 302.4 151,2 1080 415.2 237.6 118.8 59.4 518.4 . 259.2 129.6 64,8 660 495 237.6 118.8 59.4 29.7 720 540 259.2 129.6 64.8 32.4 I i I 360 270 129.6 fJ4.S 108 54 59.4 27 13.5 29,7 14.85 32.4 390 292.5 1<10.4 70.2 35,1 16.2 17.55 24.3 12.15 6.075 150 112.5 54 27 13.5 6.75 165 123.75 59.4 29.7 14,85 7.425 180 135 64.8 32.4 16.2 8.1 195 146.25 70.2 35.1 17.55 8.775 67.5 50.625 24.3 12.15 6.075 3.037 75 56.25 27 13.5 5.75 3.375 82.5 61.875 90 67.5 32.4 16.2 8.1 4.05 375 41.25 30.937 14.85 7.425 3.712 1.855 I 48.6 19.M! 9.45 4,725 2.362 1.18 33.75 25.::11;! 10.8 5.4 2.7 1.349 12:15 6.075 3.037 1.518 13.125 9.843 4,725 2.362 1.18 .59 15 11.249 5.4 2.7 1.349 .674 16.875 12.655 6.075 3.037 1.518 .758 I I 28,126 13.5 6.75 3.375 1.687 18.75 14.062 6.75 3.375 1,687 .843 20.7 14.85 7.425 3.712 20.625 15.468 7.425 3.712 1.855 .927 I +40 wao O:2tjE2:(L 7 780 585 280.8 140.4 70.2 35.1 330 247.5 118.8 2.7 30 22.5 1/8 band effective only on low band recorders with 60·15/16 ips speed range. 54 1320 I 840 630 302.4 151.2 75.6 37.8 I 420 315 151.2 75.6 37.8 18.9 210 157.5 j 16.2 8.1 4.05 2.024 "8.75 35.5ll2 17.55 8.775 4.387 2.193 75.n 37.8 18.9 0.45_ 105 78.75 ! 37.8 I ! 18.9 9.45 4.725 52.5 39,:rn:i 18.9 9.45 4.725 2.361 225 16.874 8.1 4.05 2.024 1.011 24.375 18.28 8.775 4.387 2.193 1.095 26.25 19.686 9.45 4.725 2,361 1.18 45 :.n.75 I 97.5 73.125 35.1 17.55 8.775 4.387 ! co C r z z o w 0) L"1 u") , BULLETIN NO. 3656-1 b. CONTROLS, INDICATORS, and CONNECTIONS DC IN (TP1) - Accepts the DC output of the FM reproduce board under test. This voltage is compared to the DC reference of the calibrator unit. BAND Selector 8w (81) Selects the proper carrier frequency for the bandwidth desired (see table 1). I FM CALIBRATOR 118 0 BAND ~ METER (M1) - Reads the error in the output of the boards under test. Error is _ calibrated in percent of A,eak-to-peak deviation. _~> .. 3. ~ 2 ------l. .~~. 6 ~~ n 0 x DC OUT R EC-REP-TEST Sw (S3) _. Selects calibrator operating 0 mod e s 0 f R E COR D 1 _____ CALIBRATE, REPRODUCE REC db~ . CALIBRATE or calibrator TREESPT~ internal test. CARRIER OUT (TP3) OUT @ 4 Applies a reference carrier freqCARRIER uency to the FM reproduce IN ~. board under test. 0 I I . ~O ~~ :r~q~T:;'~~~~~~~p~~ I ~. the~h~~=:r7e~ FM record board under , 1/ 2 tl HI 3 . REF 0 ON d"kl Q: DEVIATION Sw (S2) - Selects the percentage of frequency deviation from the carrier frequency in 10% increments (+40% to -40%). Also changes the DC calibrating voltage through a range of +1.414 Vdc to -1.414 Vdc (9 steps). I I l<: ~ DC OUT (TP2) - Applies a DC voltage to the FM record board under test. This DC voltage is representative of the comparison of the calibrator carrier frequency and the FM record board carrier frequency. . ;::J L.:t...O-FF ~ /10.-0. . . .10\ __---13-f~@:~ 40 40 PERCENT DEVIATION I test. ~ 8w (S4) - Changes the DC IN input impedance. LO is 75 ohms and HI is lOOk ohms. @ I R E F ( T P 5 ) - U s e d t o provide a DC voltage input to an FM record board during record/ reproduce system test. POWER Sw (S5) - Controls the application of ±12 Vdc (from the reproduce chassis) to the calibrator unit. GND (TP5) - Ground testpoint of calibrator unit. Figure 2. Calibrator Front Panel BULLETIN NO. 3656-1 c. USING CALIBRATOR UNIT - Use of the calibrator unit requires cable connections from the calibrator unit to the applicable FM record or reproduce boards. The FM Calibrator Accessory Kit (part no. 836400) includes all necessary cables as listed below. (2) Patch-cords, BNC to Pin (1 red - 1 black) (2) Patch-cords, Pin to Pin (both red) The maintenance section of this bulletin provides calibrator unit test and adjustment to aid in determining proper operation prior to use. NOTE A 5 minute warm-up period (with power on) is recommended for stablization of some operating characteristics. . 1. FM RECORD BOARD CALIBRATION - (refer to figure 3) Step 1. Ensuring all POWER is off, connect a patch-cord from the input BNC of the record board to the DC OUT jack of the calibrator. Step 2. Connect a patch cord from the CARRIER testpoint of the record board to the CARRIER IN jack of the calibrator. Also, connect a patch-cord between grounds on the calibrator and record board. Step 3. Select, on the calibrator, the correct band setting (determined by band of record board, refer to table 1), zero deviation setting, and R EC-R EP-TEST switch to the R EC position. Select highest speed or speed desired. Step 4. Apply recorder power, and depress STOP and RECORD (tape movement not required). Ensure the calibrator POWER switch is set to the ON position. REC CALIS DC IN --. DC OUT r INPUT REC REP~ TEST CAR OUT CAR IN I.... CARRIER REF Figure 3. Record Board Calibration Scheme Step 5. Ensure the calibrator meter reads zero. If not, adjust the ZERO or CENTERING control of the record board, to brin~ meter to zero. Step 6. Place deviation switch to the maximum +% deviation (+300;{' for X and II bands, +40% for all others). Adjust, if necessary, the input gain control of the record board for zero on the meter. Step 7. Check at -% deviation, and adjust for compromise as necessary. Step 8. Check at all other speeds and deviations, as desired. 2. FM REPRODUCE BOARD CALIBRATION - (refer to figure 4) - This procedure details calibration of FM reproduce boards having an input testpoint. For those boards not having an input testpoint, refer to paragraph 4 concerning reproduce calibration via tape. 5 BULLETIN NO. 3656-1, Step 1. Ensuring all power is off, connect a patch-cord from the reproduce board input testpoint to the CAR R! E ROUT jack of the calibrator. Step 2. J REPRO CALIB ....... DC IN OUTPUT DC OUT REC REP +--0 Connect a patch-cord from the reproduce board output testpoint to the DC IN jack of the calibrator. Also, connect a patch-cord between grounds on the reproduce board and calibrator. TEST CAR OUT INPUT CAR IN REF Figure 4. Reproduce Board Calibration Scheme Step 3. Select, on the calibrator, the correct band (determined by band of reproduce board, refer to table 1), zero deviation setting. REC-REP-TEST switch to the REP position, and the r switch to the desired setting. Select the highest speed or speed desired. Step 4. Apply recorder power (tape movement not normally required) and place the switch disable switch to the ON position (no squelch action). Systems having servo squelch and not having a squelch disable switch, normally require tape movement. Step 5. Ensure meter reads zero. If not, adjust zero control of reproduce board to bring meter to zero. Step 6. Place deviation switch to maximum +% position (+30% for:, bands X and II, +40% for all other bands). Adjust, if necessary, the output gain control of the reproduce board for zero on the meter. Step 7. Check at -% deviation, and adjust for compromise, as desired. Step 8. Check at all other speeds and deviations, as desired. 3. OVERALL FM RECORD/REPRODUCE CHECK· (refer to figure 5) - Proper tape threading and tape movement are required for this check via tape. With tape bypassed, ensure the squelch disable switch is set to ON. Bypass method not applicable when squelch is present without disable switch. Step 1. With all power off, connect a patch-cord from the input BNC of the record board to the /!.£F ~a-jack of the calibrator. REC CAlIB REPRO Step 2. Step 3. Connect a patch-cord from the reproduce board output testpoint to the DC IN jack of the calibrator. Set the REC-REP-TEST ~witch to the R EP position and the BAN D switch to the correct setting (determined by the band of the record and reproduce boards, refer to table 1). DC IN INPUT ~ A OUTPUT DC OUT REC REP "---0 TEST CAR OUT CARRIER I -- CAR IN REF .. INPUT I REMOVE fOR SYSTEM I TEST THRU TAPE _ _---1 L-.._ _ _ _ Figure 5. Record/Reproduce System Test Scheme C===C=============:=======::=:::=:===:=J~ 6 cc===========:====================:==:::====~~ BULLETIN NO. 3656-1 I Step 4. Select the desired tape speed and apply power. Depress STOP, RECORD, and FORWAR D, recording and reproducing. For bypass method connect a patch-cord from the record board CAR RI ER testpoint to the reproduce board input testpoint (tape movement not required). Step 5. The error will be displayed directly on the calibrator meter. NOTE This method provides adequate checking of the FM recordlreproduce system. It is not recommended to make any correctional adjustment during this check, as the record and reproduce errors are combined. 4. FM REPRODUCE BOARD CALIBRATION-VIA TAPE - Proper tape threading and tape movement are required for this calibration. Step 1. Connect a patch-cord from the input BNC of the record board (record channel associated with the reproduce board under test) to the DC OUT jack of the calibrator. Step 2. Connect a patch-cord from the record board CARRIER testpoint to the CARRIER IN jack of the calibrator. Step 3. ~onnect Step 4. Select the proper band (refer to table 1) and the proper % deviation. Set tape speed as desired and the REC-REP-TEST switch to the REP position. Step 5. Apply power and depress STOP, RECORD, and FORWARD, recording and reproducing. Step 6. Ensure meter reads zero. If not, adjust zero control of reproduce board to bring meter to zero. Step 7. Place deviation switch to maximum +% position (+300A> for bands X and II, +40% for all other bands). Adjust, if necessary, the output gain control of the reproduce board for zero on the meter. Step 8. Check at -% deviation, and adjust for compromise, as desired. Step 9. Chefk at all other speeds and deviations, as desired. Step 10. Note, by switching the REC-REP-TEST switch to the REC position, the record errors are read. a patch-cord from the BNC output of the reproduce board to the DC IN jack of the calibrator. J THEORY OF OPERATION The FM calibrator unit is composed of two printed circuit boards (A and B),a meter assembly (M1), and a front panel assembly with switches and testpoints. The B board contains a regulated +5 Vdc power supply and the reference oscillator circuitry. The A board contains the DC reference voltage circuits, DC voltage comparison circuits, reference carrier frequency circuits, and the frequency comparison circuits. au LLETI N NO. 3656-1 SPEED LINES FROM REPRODUCE CHASSIS +12VoC FROM REPRODUCE CHASSIS r - - c - - - - - - - - - I I I 1!r I REGULATED +5VDC POWER SUPPLY I I I L ±12VD C FROM REPROD UCE CHASS IS ·CARRIE 'tIN" TP4 -' r I I I I I CRYSTAL OSC TO ALL ±12VDC .. CIRCUITS ON "A" BOARD I FREQUENCY CIRCUITS =:: } J tL I I PART OF BAND I I I I I I I SWITCH I"CARRIER OUT" SHAPER PHASE DETECTOR 1----~..1iPI ~ _ _ _... ~ DC AMP J • -..... ..... AMP I I DIFF AMP I ~ TEST t ,~ I I I 'I' " PART OF DEVIATION SWITCH I ,,. , I I I REFERENCE VOLTAGE SUPPLY , + ~F t PART OF BAND SWITCH AMP , "GND" PH! INc?? ~~C03~ PI-3 /Ni!71 rp4 ~S4- ~~,~n.~-+'-+-j CA.r.II:.IER. 0 9 iN. IN9.4 CAIlIt/eft ()v"" TP] TPI ~ /)C IN @--"---UCOR.O l ----€) ----------~--------~@ TPc pc ovT 53 ,~.----------~~~wv--- !?c3 5'CA T£sr t TP 399 PATCH CORD ASSY: PIN TO PIN; MFR 53021 836400 ACCESSORY KIT: FM CALIBRATOR: 3600/4900 SERIES; MFR 53021 836411-001 HARDWARE KIT - 14 TRACK RECORD: 4900 SERIES; MFR 53021 836411-002 HARDWARE KIT - 28/32 TRACK RECORD: 4900 SERIES; MFR 53021 836411-004 HARI:lWARE KIT - 28/32 TRACK REPRODUCE: 4900 SERIES; MFR 53021 836423-001 SWITCH, ROTARY: 4 DESKS; CONT'S 1/4 AMP, 115 VAC; MFR 53021 836423-003 SWITCH, ROTARY: 2 DESKS; CONT'S 1/4 AMP, 115 VAC; MFR 53021 836424 PUMP-VACUUM: 4900 SERIES; MFR 24123 PART NO. 0333 836454 BOARD ASSY: CALIBRATION/MONITOR; 3600/4900 SERIES; MFR 53021 836457 SPLICE BLANKING KIT: 3600SERIES; MFR 53021 836533 FMSENSITY KIT: 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021 841121 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 2.2UF 10%, 20V; POLARIZED; MFR 53021 843680 RESISTOR, VAR: LOGRITHMIC TAPER; 2000 OHMS 10%; OAW; MFR 01121 843721 CONNECTOR, PLUG: 5 CONT PINS MOLDED IN BAKELITE; MFR 02660, NO. 126-217 843724 RECEPTACLE: 5 CONT MIN HEX; MFR 07999, NO. 126-218 843728 LAMPHOLDER, SINGLE: TAPE CONTROL INDICATOR; MFR 72619, NO. 7538 843729 LAMP CARTRIDGE: INCAND, RED; MFR 72619, NO. 39-14-1471 843730 LAMP CARTRIDGE: INCAND, GREEN; MFR 72619, NO. 39-14-1472 843733 CONNECTOR, PLUG: 34 PIN; MFR 95238, NO. SM34-20PGD 843734 CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE: 34 PIN; MFR 95238, CAT. NO. SM34-20S8D 843788 RELAY: MAGNETIC LATCHING; 24 VDCW, DPDT; MFR 77342 843829 REISlTOR, FIXED: COMP; 390 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 843837 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 3000UUF 5%,300 VDCW; MFR 53021 843934 SOCKET, CRYSTAL: MFR 91506, PART NO. BOOO-DG-3 843996 CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE: 34 PIN REM; MFR 81312 NO MRAC34S·J6 843997 CONNECTOR, PLUG: C/O HOOD, 34 REMOVABLE CONTACTS; MFR 81312, NO. MRAC 34P JTDH-491 844013 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 4.7 OHMS ±5%, 1/4 W; MFR 53021 844114 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 62UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-15-620F 844115 CAPAClTOR, FIXED: MICA; 220UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-15-221 844118 CAPAClTOR,FIXED: MICA; 2500UUF 1%, 500VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-19-252F 844119 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 511l0UUF 1%, 300VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-19-512F 844152 RESiStOR, FrXED: COMP; 10'OHMS 5%, O.5W; MFR 53021 844155 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 47 OHMS 5%, 1!2W; MFR 53021 -20- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 844156 RESiSTOR, FIXED: COMP; 68 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844160 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 180 OHMS 5%, 1/2 W; MFR 53021 844161 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 220 OHllilS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844162 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 270 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844163 RESISTOR, FI XED: COMP; 330 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844164 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 470 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844165 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 560 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844166 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 680 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844167 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1000 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844169 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 15000HMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844170 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1800 OHMS 5%, 1/2W;MFR 53021 844171 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 2200 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844173 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 3300 OHMS 5%, 1I2W; MFR 53021 844174 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 4700 OHMS 5%, 1!2W; MFR 53021 844178 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 8200 OHMS 5%.1/2W; MFR 53021 844179 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 10,000 OHMS 5%, O.SW; MFR 53021 844183 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 22,000 OHMS 5%, 1I2W; MFR 53021 844192 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 0.22 MEG;5%, O.5W; MFR 53021 844193 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 0.33 MEG, 5%, 0.5W; MFR 53021 844244 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 4700 UUF 5%, 600 VDCW; MFR 53021 844269 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; O.05UF 5%, 100VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE 10P-2-503J 844323 RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; INSULATED; 1.5 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844325 RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; I NSULATEO; 1.5 OHMS 5%, 1!2W; MFR 53021 844331 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 3.0 OHMS 5%, l/2W; MFR 53021 844510 SEMICONDUCTOR, PIODE: SILICON; MFR 06668, TYPE lN914 844548 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 820UUF, 5%, 300 VDCW; MFR 53021 844549 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 5600UUF 5%,300 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-20-562 844666 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 470UUF 5%,300 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-15-471 844675 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 33 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 53021 844695 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 620UUF 1%,300 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-15-621 844699 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 2800UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021 844762 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: MAX ZENER 9.45 V; MFR 04713, TYPE 1N938 844769 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 270UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 72136, TYPE DM-19-271F 844848 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 22UF 10%,15VDCW; MFR 53021 844981 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 70UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021 ·21- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 844993 RESISTOR, VAR: 50 OHM, ±5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294 NO. 3305P-1-500 844994 RESISTOR, VAR: 100 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294 NO. 3305P-l-l0l 844995 RESISTOR, VAR: 500 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294, NO. 33079-1-501 845038 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 0.47UF 10%, 35VDCW; MFR 53021 845046 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 200 UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021 845141 RESISTOR, VAR: 10,000 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294, NO. 3307P-l-l03 845193 FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 2 AMP, 250 V; MFR 71400, NO AGC-2 845257 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 400UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 00853 845258 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 12UUF 5%, 500VDCW; MFR 00853 845329 RESISTOR, VAR: 200 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294, NO. 3507P-1-201 845443 RESISTOR, VAR: 2000 OHMS 5%, 1/2W; MFR 80294, NO. 3305P-1-202 846160 RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 75 OHMS, 5W; MFR 53021 846164 SEMICONDUCTOR, UNIJUNCTION-TRANSISTOR: SILICON; PNPN; MFR 53021 846500 SEMICONDUCTOR, TRANSISTOR: SILICON; MFR 53021 846502 CONNECTOR, PLUG: MALE, 66 REM PINS; MFR 81312 NO MRAC66P-JTD-H 846550 CONNECTOR, RCPT: W/O HOOD, 66 REMOVABLE CONTACTS; MFR 81312, NO. MRAC 66S-J6 846551 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 39UUF,l%, 300 VDCW; MFR 53021 846552 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 180UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021 846601 PIN SOCKET, MINIATURE: MFR 06776, PART NO. PS-402-44 846602 CONNECTOR, PIN: USE WITH SOCKET 846601; 0.311 IN. LG; MFR 53021 846615 JACK, JUNIOR PHONE: 64/84 IN. LG; MFR 90201, NO. LA-1 846744 OSCILLATOR: 400,000 KC; 30 VDC OPR; MFR 75378 846759 CONNECTOR, COAXIAL: TEE ADAPTER; MFR 96791 NO. UG-274/U 846776 RELAY, DC: 12 VDCW; DPDT, 210 OHMS 10%; MFR 77342 846901 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 1000UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021 847013 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TAN; 1.0UF 20%, 50 V; MFR 01295, NO. SCM 105FP050CA 847039 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.15UF 5%, 100 VDCW; MFR 72136, NO 1 DP-3-154J 847065 RESISTOR, FIXED: 10 OHMS 1%, 1/8W; MFR 53021 847246 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 840UUF 1%, 300VDCW; MFR 53021 847529 FILTER: GRAY FELT 1/81N THK,O.75 DIA; MFR 53021 847532 MOTOR, ELECTRIC: 115VAC, 3000RPM; MFR 62119, NO. 82AEG 847548 CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE: FEMALE, 66 REM PINS; MFR 81312 NO. MRAC66SJTDH 847549 CONNECTOR, PLUG: MALE, 66 REM PINS; MFR 81312 NO MRAC66PJ6 847723 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; ZENER IS 10. V 5% MFR 01295, TYPE lN758A . 848159· 848160 PLUG, SUB MINATURE: RED; MFR 02929, NO. 39F846 PLUG, SUB MINIATURE: BLACK; MFR 02929, NO. 39F847 -22- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTI.ON 850287 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: GERMANIUM; TYPE 1N277; MFR 53021 850288 TRANSISTOR: NPN; SILICON; MFR 01295, TYPE 2N2222 850289 TRANSISTOR: PNP; GERMANIUM; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N1309 850290 TRANSISTOR: SILICON; PNP; MFR 01295, TYPE 2N2907 850305 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; ZENER; TYPE 1N752A; MFR 53021 850357 RESISTOR, VAR: CARBON; 2500 OHMS 10%; MFR 53021 850445 RELAY, PLUG·IN: 3 POT; 12 VDC, 10 AMPS; MFR 77342, TYPE KRP14DG 850503 SOCKET: 11 SOLDER TERM LUGS; METAL BASE; MFR 07999, NO. 78RS11 850642 INDUCTOR, FIXED: CHOKE; 470MH; MFR 72259, PART NO. RFC-M-470 850643 RECEPTACLE, PLUG: 9 PIN, MALE; MFR 07999 NO. 126-221 850644 RECEPTACLE, CONN: 9 PIN, FEMALE; MFR 07999 NO. 126-220 850858 INDUCTOR: 150MH 5%; MFR 72259, PART NO. RFC-M-150 850860 INDUCTOR, FIXED: CHOKE; 1000 MH; 5%; MFR 72259 PART NO. RFC·M-l000 850862 CAPACITOR, VAR: 9-35UUF RANGE; MFR 15450, TYPE 538-011'()9.0-35PF 850873 TRANSFORMER: MFR 53021 851018 PLUG,COAXIAL: SINGLE CONT; MFR 02660, PART NO. FXR-99600 851020 CONNECTOR, PLUG: ELEC; MFR 02660, PART NO. FXR-99750 851084 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; ZENER, 12 VDC 5%, TYPE lN759A; MFR 53021 851139-001 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 125UF, 3 VDCW; MFR 00853, TYPE 556 851139-003 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 435UF, 3 VDCW; MFR 00853, TYPE 556 851139'()04 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 110UF,6 VDCW; MFR 00853, TYPE 556 851139-007 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 75UF, 15 VDCW; MFR 00853, TYPE 556 851139-008 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 23UF, 35 VDCW; MFR 00853, TYPE 556 8511·39-0<)9 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 40 UF, 65 VDCW; MFR 00853 851139-010 CAPACITOR, FIXED; ELCTLT; 55UF; 2OVDCW; MFR 00853 851139-012 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 5UF;100 VDCW; MFR 00853 851139-014 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTLT; 275 UF; 10VDCW; MFR 00853 851139-015 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELCTL T; 95UF; 35 VDCW; MFR 00853 851139-016 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELECTLT; 80UF, 65VDCW; MFR 00853 851264 SWITCH, TOGGLE: DPDT, MC; MFR 04009, PART NO. 81057-N 851265 LAMPHOLDER: BAYONET TYPE; MFR 72619, CAT. NO. 8578-111 851271 TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN, POWER; MFR 02735, PART NO. 40250' 851280 TRANSISTOR: TYPE 2N2102; MFR 02735 851288 RESISTOR, FIXED: 10 OHMS 5%, 3 W; MFR 44655, NO. 4361 852273 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: DIFF. COMP; 8 TE'RMS;MFR 01295, TYPE SN52710 852475-008 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 3.3 VDC, 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE 1N746A . -23- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 852475-014 DIODE, ZENER: 400 MW; 4.3 V 5%; MFR 99942,1YPE lN749A 852475-016 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 4.7 VDC; 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE lN750A 852475-018 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 5.1 V, 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE 1N751A 1 852475-020 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 5.6 VDC 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE lN752A 852475-022 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 6.2 VDC 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE 1N753A 852475-024 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 6.8VDC 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE 1N754A 852475-028 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 8.2 VDC 5%; MFR 99942, TYPE lN756A 852525 METER, VU: 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021 852532-073 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 5620 OHMS 1%,114 W;MFR 07716 TYPE MEA, T-O 852738 TR.o,NSISTOR: SILICON; PNP; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N3906 852801-002 TERMINAL SO: PHEN; 2 TERM; MFR 71785 NO 2-140Y 852801-006 TERMINAL SO: PHEN; 6 TERM; MFR 71785 NO &140Y 853037 TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N3904 853038 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT, MICRO: MFR 04713, PART NO. MC718G 853473 MOTOR: 0.043 HP/11 ,000 RPM, 27V 1.85 AMPS, MFR 05624, NO. BYLM92802-4 853474 MOTOR ASSY: MFR 53021 853502 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; RECTIFIER; MFR 04713, TYPE lN3209 853507 TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN; POWER; MFR 02735, PART NO. 40251 853512 TRANSISTOR: SI LICON; NPN; MFR 04713, PART NO. MPS834 853513 TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N3713 853515-002 RELAY,4 PDT: COIL 12 VDC, 160 OHMS; MFR 77342, PART NO. KHP17Dl1 853515-003 RELAY, 4PDT: COIL 24 VDC, 650 OHMS; MFR 77342, PART NO. KHP17Dl1 853516 SOCKET, RELAY: 14 PINS; MFR 77342, PART NO. 9KH2 853518 CONNECTOR, PLUG: 23 CONT; MFR 91662, PART NO. 00-7023-023-000-001 853525 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: MLOPNL AMPL; MFR 04713, PART NO. MC1430G 853527 RESISTOR, VAR: CARBON; 100 K OHMS 20".4>, 0.25 W; MFR 80294, NO. 215L-l-l04 853528 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: MLOPNL AMPL; MFR 04713, PART NO. MC1531G 853529 RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 200 OHMS 10%, 0.25W; MFR 80294, PART NO. 200L-1-201 853530-051 RESISTOR, FIXED: FI LM; 100 OHMS, 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701 853530-087 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 237 OHMS 1%,1I4W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 853530-089 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 249 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 853530-101 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 3320HMS 1%,1I4W;MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 853530-108 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 3132 OHMS 1%,114 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 853530-118 . RESiSTOR, FIXED: FILM; 499 OHMS 1%, 1/4 IN; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 853530-130 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 665 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C -24- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 85353()"131 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 681 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 01116, TYPE CEATZ 85353()"143 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 909 OHMS 1%. 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353()"141 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 1000 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()..155 RESISTOR. FIXED: FILM; 1210 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 01116, TYPE CEATZ 85353()"164 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 1500 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353Q..112 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 1820 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353()"116 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 2000 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353()"186 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 2550 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353()"193 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 3010 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C .85353()"196 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 3240 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"204 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 3920 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353()"205 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 4020 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"208 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 4320 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"211 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 4640 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"212 RESISTOR. FIXED: FILM; 4750 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353()"214 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 4990 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"219 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 5620 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"232 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 7680 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"234 RESISTOR, FIXED: FI LM; 8060 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353Q..236 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 8450 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 01116, TYPE'CEATZ 85353()"243 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 10,000 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101. TYPE MF5C 85353()"246 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 10,100 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFA 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"251 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 12.1 K OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"254 RESISTOR;FIXED: FILM; 13,000 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"260 RESISTOR. FIXED: FILM; 15,000 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 853530-263 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 16,200 OHMS 1%,1/4W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353()"281 RESISTOR, FIXED: FI LM; 24,900 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353()"284 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 26,100 OHMS 1%. 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353()"292 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 32,400 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"293 RESISTOR, FIXED:.FILM; 33,200 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353()"301 RESISTOR. FIXED: FILM; 40.2 K OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701 TYPE MF5C 85353()"321 RESIS:rOR, FIXED: FILM; 64,900 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C ·85353()"330 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 80.6 K OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 85353()"335 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 90,900 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C 85353()"336 RESfSTOR, FIXED: FILM; 93,100 OHMS 1%,1/4 W; MFR 19101, TYPE MF5C -25- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 853530-342 RESiSTOR, FIXED: FILM; 107,000 OHMS 1%, 1/4 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 853530-350 RESISTOR, FIXED: FILM; 130,000 OHMS 1%,114 W; MFR 19701, TYPE MF5C 853531 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE; MFR 04713, TYPE 1N823 863532 TRANSISTOR: SILICON; PrJP; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N2905 853533 TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N2219 853536 SWITCH, ROTARY: PHENOLIC INSULATED: ONE SEC, 2 POLE, 6 POS; MFR 76854 853538 SWITCH ASSY:PUSHBUTTON; MFR 82389 853539 SWITCH ASSY: PUSHBUTTON; MFR 82389 853567 PLAYBACK, CHASSIS: AL. FRAME ASSY, MFR 53021 853568 RECORD, CHASSIS: AL FRAME ASSY, MFR 53021 853578 REGULATOR, MODULE: 117 VOLT POWER SUPPLY; MFR 53021 853584 TRANSFORMER, TUNING: MFR 00853, PART NO. EV-141-5001-5 853587-001 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 410MH; Q OF 66 MIN; 180 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE470 853587-002 INDUCTOR. FIXED: 41 MH; Q OF 46 MIN; 420 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE47 853587-003 INDUCTOR. FIXED: 220 MH, 5%, Q OF 57; 280 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE220 853587-004 INDUCTOR. FIXED: 330 MH, 5%, 0 OF 50; 240 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE 330 853587-005 INDUCTOR. FIXED: 22 MH, 10%, Q MIN. 47 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE22 853587-009 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 1500 MH, 10%, Q MIN. 51; MFR 72259, NO. WEE 1500 853587-010 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 6800 MH, 10%, Q MIN. 45; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE6800 853587-011 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 21K, MH, to%, Q MIN. 32; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE 27000 853587-013 INDUCTOR, fiXED: 100,000 MH 10%, Q MIN. 20; MFR 72259, NO. WEE100000 853587-014 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 4700 MH 10%, Q MIN. 48, 68 MA; MFR 72259 NO. WEE4700 853587-015 INDUCTOR: 22,oOOUH, 10%, 219 OHMS RES.: MFR 72259 NO. WEE 22,000 853587-016 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 33 MH 5%, Q MIN. 43; 520 MA; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE33 853587-017 INDUCTOR,. fiXED: 150 UH, 5%, Q MIN. 63; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE150 853587-018 INDUCTOR. FIXED: 210 UH, 5%, Q MIN. 52; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE270 853587-019 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 560 UH, 5%, Q MIN. 64; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE560 853587-020 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 1000 UH, 5%, Q MIN. 62; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE1000 853587-021 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 2200 UH, 10%, Q MIN. 50; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE2200 853587-023 INDUCTOR, fIXED: 3300 UH, 10%, Q MIN. 52; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE3300 853587-024 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 680 UH, 10%, Q; MIN. 71; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE680 853587-025 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 1200 UH, 10%, Q MIN. 52; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE1200 853587-026 fNDUCTOR, FIXED: 2100UH, 10%, Q MIN. 51; MFR 72259, PART NQ. WEE 2700 853587-027 INDUCTOR. FIXED: 12K,UH, 10%, Q MIN. 36; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE12000 853587-028 INDUCTOR,FIXED: 4.7 UH, 5%, Q MtN.40; MFR 12259 PART NO. WEE4.7 -26- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 853587·029 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 10 UH, 5%,0 MiN. 46; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE10 853587·030 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 2.2UH 10%; 0 MIN. 42; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE2.2 853587-031 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 47K, UH, 10%,0 MIN. 25; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE47K 853587·032 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 820 UH, 5%, 0 MIN. 67; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE820 853587-034 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 3900 UH, 10%, Q MIN. 48; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE3900 853587-035 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 15K, UH, 10%, Q MIN. 38; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE15K 853587-037 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 68 UH, 5%,0 MIN. 40; MFR 72259 PART NO. WEE68 853587-039 INDUCTOR, 5600UH, 10%, 104 OHMS RES.; MFR 72259 NO. WEE 5600 853587-040 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 8200UH, 10%,Q.MIN. 38; MFR 72259, PART NO. WEE 8200 853590-002 RECEPTACLE, PROBE: RED; MFR 00779, PART NO. 3-582118-2 853590-004 RECEPTACLE, PROBE: YELLOW; MFR 00779, PART NO. 3·582118-4 853590-006 RECEPTACLE, PROBE: BLUE; MFR 00779, PART NO. 3-582118-6 853590-010 RECEPTACLE, PROBE: BLACK; MFR 00779, PART NO. 3-582118·10 853591·023 RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 300 OHMS 5%, 6.5W; MFR 44655 853592 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 33 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 75042 853593 RESISTOR, VAR: 10,000 OHMS 5%,1 W; MFR 02660, PART NO. 2900W-l-l03 853597 POWER CABLE: CIO BELDEN CABLE, TWO CONN; MFR 53021 853603-001 RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 50 OHMS 5%,15 W; MFR 11502 853604 PLAYBACK CONN BOARD: MFR 53021 853606 1/2 INCH TAPE KIT: CIO PINCH ROLLER ASSY; PERTINENT HDW; MFR 53021 853607 1 INCH TAPE KIT: CIO ROLLER ASSY; PERTINENT HDW; MFR 53021 853611 TAPE KIT: C/O SPECIAL EXT. BDSAND GREASE TUBE; MFR 53021 853612 PREAMP BOARD: MFR 53021 853615-004 TERMINAL BOARD: 4 TERM; MFR 75382, PART NO. 411-4-P 852615-007 TERMINAL BLOCK: 7 TERM., MFR 75382 PART NO. 411-7·P 853615-008 TERMINAL BLOCK: 8 TERM., MFR75382 PART NO. 411-8·P 853623 RELAY: SPST NORMALLY OPEN, 24 VDC; MFR 71342, PART NO. MB 3D 853624 REEL DRIVE BOARD: MFR 53021 853627-001 CAPACITOR, TRIMMER: 5-25UUF; MFR 72982, PART NO. 557·013COPO 39R 853628 PREAMP CONN BOARD: MFR 53021 853631 JACK, 3 CONNECTOR: MFR 82389, PART NO. 12B 853635 PLUG, PHONE, 3 CONDUCTOR: MFR 82389, PART NO. 267 853636 FM CONVERTER BOARD: MFR 53021 853643 RELAY: MFR 71482, PART NO. MRMX-l039 853644 PREAMP BOARD: POWER SUPPLY; MFR. 53021 853646 FUSEHOLDER: BAKELITE; MFR 75915, NO. 387001 -27· SANGAMO PART NO. NAME ANO DESCRIPTION 853647 EXTENDER BOARD: RECORD; MFR 53021 853649 FUSE, CARTRIDE: AGX, 3 AMP, 125 V OR LESS; MFR 71400 853650 EXTENDER BOARD: PLAYBACK; MFR 53021 853657 RELAY, DPDT: 24 VDC, 10 AMP; MFR 77342 853658-001 DIRECT RECORD BOARD: WIO HANDLE; MFR 53021 853662 DIRECT PLAYBACK BOARD: MFR 53021 853665 CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE: FEM; SLDR PINS; MFR 71468, PART NO. RWK-S4-31S 853670-002 CONNECTOR BOARD: MFR 53021 853672 SWITCH, TOGGLE: SPST, MFR 04009, PARl" NO. 7501 853674-002 TERMINAL BOARD: 14 CONT; MFR 91662, PART NO. 60 8200 0623 853677-007 TERMINAL BOARD: 7 TERM, MFR 71785, PART NO. 353-14-07-001 853677-010 TERMINAL BOARD: 10 TERM, MFR 71785, PART NO. 353-14-10-001 853681 CAPACITOR, FIXED: PPR OIL; 10UF 5%, 100VDCW; MFR 96733, NO. 12R53Jl106 853682-001 BIAS OSCILLATOR BOARD: WIO HANDLE; MFR 53021 853685-001 CAPACITOR ASSY: 854528-075 CAP. SLDR MTD TO MEL PL; MFR 53021 853685-002 CAPACITOR ASSY: 854528-150 CAP. SLDR MTD TO MEL PL; MFR 53021 853685-003 CAPACiTOR ASSY: 854528-300 CAP. SLDR MTD TO MEL PL; MFR 53021 853685-004 CAPACITOR ASSY: 19881&-600 CAP. SLDR MTD TO MEL PL; MFR 53021 853685-005 CAPACITOR ASSY: 276241-120 CPA. SLDR MTD TO MEL PL; MFR 53021 853690-001 VOICE BOARD ASSY: MFR 53021 853694 CONTROL AMPL BOARD: MFR 53021 853696 BOARD ASSY: REGULATOR; MFR 53021 853700 DC TO DC INVERTER BOARD: MFR 53021 854304 RECORD CONNECTOR80ARD: GLASS MEL; MFR 53021 854305 PLAYBACK CONNECTOR BOARD: GLASS MEL; MFR 53021 854306 POWER AND CONTROL CONNECTOR PANEL: GLASS MEL; MFR 53021 854362-001 BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL AND LAMP: UPPER; MFR 53021 854362-002 BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL AND LAMP: LOWER; MFR 53021 854362-003 BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL AND LAMP: LOOP ADAPTER; MFR 53021 854502 CRYSTAL UNIT: 252,000 CPS 1%; MFR 75378 854505 CONNECTOR, MALE: 4 CONT; MFR 71468, PART NO. WK-S4-325 854508-001 SOLENOID: 66 OHMS, 24 VDCW; MFR 53021 854509 SWITCH, ROTARY; 6 POSITION, NON SHORTING; MFR 81073, PART NO. 5001-6 854510 SWITCH, ROTARY; 6 POSITION; MFR 53021 854512-001 CONTACT, ELECTRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6082000513 854512-002 CONTACT, ELE~TRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6~82000533 ·28- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 854513-001 CONTACT, ELECTRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6082000253 854513-002 CONTACT, ELECTRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6082000623 854514 CONTACT, ELECTRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6082000313 854515 CONTACT, ELECTRICAL: MFR 91662, NO. 6082002623 854517-001 CRYSTAL UNIT: 2.40 MHZ 005%, MFR 75378 854519 CAPASTAN POWER AMPL BOARD: MFR 53021 854527-004 RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 500 OHMS 10%, 1/4 W; MFR 80294, PART NO. 27H,501 854528-005 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 5UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 00853 854528-018 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 18UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 00853 854528-027 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 27 UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 00853 854528-032 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 32UUF, 1%, 500 VDCW; MFR 00853 854528-033 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 33UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFA 00853 854528-036 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 36UUF ±1%, 500 VDCW; MFA 00853 854528-050 CAPACITOA, FIXED: MICA; 50UUF ±1%, 500 VDCW; MFR 00853 854528-062 CAPACITOA, FIXED: MICA; 62UUF 1%.500 VDCW; MFA 00853 854528-070 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 70UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFA 00853 854528-075 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 75UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFA 00853 854528-091 CAPACITOR. FIXED: MICA; 91UUF 1%.500 VDCW; MFA 00853 854528-100 CAPACITOR, FiXeD: MICA; 100UUF 1%.500 VDCW; MFA 00853 854528-120 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 120UUF 1%, 500VDC; MFR 00853 854528,130 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 130UUF 1%.500 VDC; MFR 00853 854528-150 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 150UUF 1%. 5OOVDCW; MFR 00853 854528-190 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 190UUF 1%.500 VDCW; MFR 00853 854528-230 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 230UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFA 00853 854528-250 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 250UUF 1%, 500VDCW; MFR 00853 854528-270 CAPACITOR, FIXE.D: MICA; 270UUF1%, 500 VDCW; MFR 00853 854533 TRANSISTOR, MEDIUM POWER: PNP; MFR 04713, PAAT NO. MJ3701 854535-003 RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 50 OHMS 1 W; MFR 02660. PART NO. 2600P·500· 854535-005 RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 200 OHMS 1 W; MFA 02660, PART NO. 2600P·201 854535-006 RESISTOR, VAA: WW; 500 OHMS, 1 W; MFA 02660, PART NO. 2600P·501 854535-007 RESISTOR, VAR : WW; 1000 OHMS, 1 W; MFA 02660, PART NO. 2600p·102 854535-008 RES!STOR, VAR: WW; 2000 OHMS, 1 W; MFR 02660, PART NO. 2600p·2002 854535-009 RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 5000 OHMS, 1 W; MFR 02660, PAR.T NO. 2600P·502 854535--010 RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 10,000 OHMS, 1 W; MFR 02660, PART NO. 2600P·103 854535-011 RESISTOR, VAR: WW; 20,000 OHMS, 1 W; MFA 80294, PART NO. 3007p·1·203 854538-001 INVERTER, DC TO AC: SOLID STATE; 28 VOLTS; MFR 82877 -29- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 854539 TRANSISTOR: SILICON; NPN; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N4124 854540 TRANSISTOR: SILICON; PNP; MFR 04713, PART NO. 2N4126 854541 THERMOSTAT, FIXED TEMPERATURE: MFR 82647, PART NO. KLIXON 06786 8~544 C/:: TO DC CONY. ASSY: MFR 53021 854547 :FIER, DIODE STACK: MFR 04713 854548 $", iCONDUCTOR, DIODE: ZENER; 5.5 V; MFR 12954, PART NO. lN2214 854549-001 FAN: 28 VAC; MFR 82877, PART NO. AO-19994 854550-003 HOOD, CONNECTOR ASSY: 11 PIN, MFR 97954, PART NO. SM1-11H-l RSL 854550-005 HOOD, CONNECTOR ASSY: 20 PIN, MFR 97954, PART NO. SMl-20H-l RSL 854550-007 HOOD, CONNECTOR ASSY: 29 PIN, MFR 97954, PART NO. SMl-29H-l RSL 854551-003 RESISTOR, VAR: 100,000 OHMS 20%, MFR 80294, PART NO. 3368P-1-104 854555-010 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.01 UF 1%, MFR 84171, PART NO. 1MD-l-103-F 854555-014 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.02UF 1%, MFR 84171, PART NO. 1-MD-1-203-F 854555-022 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; .039UF 1%, MFR 84171, PART NO. l-MD-1-393-F 854555-023 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.04UF 1%, MfR 84171, PART NO.1-MD-1-403-F 854555-026 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.05UF 1%,100 VDCW; MFR 84171 NO. IMD-2-503-F 854555-114 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; O.OlUF 5%, 100VDCW; MFR 84171 ND.1MD-l-l03-J 854555-116 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.015UF 5%, 100 VDCW; MFR 72136 NO. lMD-1-153-J 854555-127 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.04UF 5%, 100 VOCW; MFR 84171, NO. IMD-1-403-J 854555-130 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.05UF 5%, 100 VDCW; MFR 72136 NO. lMD-2-503-J 854570 EXTENDER BOARD: SPEED CONT; MFR 53021 854578 POWER SUPPLY: BASIC; MFR 53021 854579-002 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 22UH 5%, Q OF 65 MFR 72259, PART NO. RFC-M-22 854582 PLAYBACK CHASSIS KIT: INSTL HDW; MFR 53021 854583 PLUG, MALE; SHORTING; A THRU W; MFR 53021 854585 FM PLAYBACK BOARD; 2 SPEED; MFR 53021 854588 LEAD HARNESS ASSY; INPUT, PLAYBACK CHASSIS; MFR 53021 854589 LEAD HARNESS ASSY: OUTPUT, PLAYBACK CHASSIS; MFR 53021 854590 LEAD HARNESS ASSY: POWER AND CONTROL; PLAYBACK CHASSIS; MFR 53021 854595 LEAD HARNESS ASSY: INPUT, RECORD CHASSIS; MFR 53021 854596 LEAD HARNESS ASSY: OUTPUT, RECORD CHASSIS; MFR 53021 854598 LEAD HARNESS ASSY: POWER AND CONTROL; RECORD CHASSIS; MFR 53021 854703 BUS BAR: 0.125 THK; 2.25 LG, 4 TERM HOLES &32 THO; MFR 53021 854725 PLUG, FLUSH MTG: 125 V, 15 AMPS; MFR 02660,PART NO. 160-5 854734 TERMINAL BOARD, 7 CONNECTOR: MFR 75382 854922 STANDOFF: CKT 80; MLD NYL; MFR 53021 -30- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 854950 HEAD SET, MAGNETIC: DUAL PHONES, 2,000 OHMS; MFR 22711, PART NO. 610-2 855027 LAMP: 2.5 V; 0.350 AMPS; MFR 71744, PART NO. CM2(}1 855058 RACK MTG KIT: FOR POWER SUPPLY MOUNTING; MFR 53021 855060 RACK MTG KIT: AUX. ELEC.; MFR 53021 855078 VOICE AMPLIFIER BOARD: MFR 53021 855107 SWITCH, ROCKER: SIX SOLDER TERMS,; MFR 22753, PART NO. RSWC322 855121 RESISTOR, VAR: 10,000 OHMS; LINEAR TAPER; MFR 71590, MODEL 9 855128 EXTENDER BOARD: FLEX; MFR 53021 855129 JACK, 3 CONNECTOR: MFR 82389, NO. 13A 8551 30-002 RELAY: DPDT; 12 V; COIL RES. 218 OHMS 10%, MFR 77342, TYPE HP11 D6V 855130-004 RELAY, ARMT: DPDT; 28VNOM; COIL RES 1400 OHMS 10% MFR 77342, TYPE HP4007 855144 POWER SUPPLY: 115/230 VAC; 47-63 HZ; MFR 53021 855150 KIT, SENSING: C/O 2 RELAYS; MFR 53021 855301 EXTENDER BOARD ASSY: FLEXIBLE; MFR 53021 855339 LOUDSPEAKER: VOICE COIL IMP. 45 OHMS 10%, 3.5W; MFR 74199 MODEL 5A1Z45 855341 PLUG, PHONE, 2 CONDUCTOR: MFR 82389, PART NO. 250 855342 CONTROL ASSY: REMOTE CONTROL; MFR 53021 855344 SIGNAL, CABLE: INTERCONNECTING VOICE CABLE; MFR 53021 855432-001 SWITCH, TOGGLE: DPDT; MC; MFR 09353 MODEL NO. 7201 855432-006 SWITCH, TOGGLE: DPDT; MC; MFR 09353 MODEL NO. 7211 855432-008 SWITCH, TOGGLE: DPDT; MC; MFR 09353 MODEL NO. 7201 855449 AC POWER CORD: RATED15AMP, 125 V; MFR 82076 TYPE 14/3SPT 855451 CORD, POWER: RATED 15A, 125 V, TYPE 14/3 SPT; MFR 82076, NO. 409 855504-XXX EQUALIZER BOARD: BASIC; SUFFIX -001 THRU -009; MFR 53021 855523 TRANSISTOR: SILICON; PNP; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N3740 855536 EXTENDER BOARD: PLAYBACK; MFR 53021 85554(}001 SWITCH, SLIDE: 4 PDT; MFR 71590 855542 KIT, FM RE-RECORD: MFR 53021 8555455-XXX FM RECORD BOARD: SUFFIX 001 THRU 008 FOR FREQ.; MFR 53021 855546 RELAY, DPDT: COIL, 24 VDC 10%; MFR 73949, TYPE 905-2C-24VDC 855547 SWITCH, ROTARY: 1 SECT., 6 POLE, 2 POS.; MFR 76854 NO. 399433K 855563 RELAY, SOCKET: 14 TERMS, MLD INTO BAKELITE BASE; MFR 77342, NO. 9KHl 855580 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT, DEVICE: OPER AMPL; MFR 07263, PART NO. U5B770939X 855608 REFERENCE COUNTER BOARD: MOD 2; MFR 53021 855610 CAPSTAN A BOARD: MOD 2; MFR 53021 -31- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 855612 CAPSTAN B BOARD: MOD 2; MFR 53021 855613 CAPSTAN B BOARD: MOD 2; CPSN SYN ONLY; MFR 53021 855672 CAPSTAN ASSY: PULL-OUT; MFR 53021 85g673 CAPSTAN ASSY: STUFFING; MFR 53021 855674 MOTOR, CAPSTAN: RATED 24 VDC, RATED SPEED 3650 RPM; MFR 04191, NO. U9M4 855694 COMPONENT BOARD; MFR 53021 855695 COMPONENT BOARD; MFR 53021 855696 BOARD ASSY: MFR 53021 855706 POWER SUPPLY ASSY; REG; MFR 53021 855707 STUFFING SERVO AMPL ASSY: MFR 53021 8557.08 PULL-OUT SERVO AMPL ASSY: MFR 53021 855709 DIODE LIMITER ASSY: MFR 53021 855710 SWiTCH, ROTARY: ONE SECT, 6 POLE, 2 POSN, MFR 76854, PART NO. 399433K 855772 CONNECTOR: PLUG JACK, BRASS; MFR 71279, PART NO. 3301 855809 BIAS OSCILLATOR BOARD: MFR 53021 855810 TRANSISTOR: SIUCON; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N4416 855811·001 INDUCTOR, VAR: UH 4.70; 855812-002 JACK, TESTPOINT: RED; MFR 98291, PART NO. SKT-0804 855812-004 JACK, TESTPOINT: YELLOW; MFR 98291, PART NO. SKT-0804 855812-005 JACK. TESTPOINT: GREEN; MFR 98291, PART NO. SKT-0804 855812-010 JACK, TESTPOINT: BLACK; MFR 98291, PART NO. SKT·0804 855872 BLOCK, PHOTO-CELL: AL; W/LAMP; MFR 53021 855874 ~HOTO-CELL 855889 MOTOR, TORQUE: 8 AMP, 81 W; MFR 11384 NO. TT-2925 855894 RECEPTACLE, MODIFIED: 23 PINS; MFR 53021 855902 HEAD ASSY; liN. RECORD; W/LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021 855908 LOGIC BOARD: MFR 53021 855977 RECEPTACLE, BNC: MFR 74868, PART NO. 31-221 855981-001 SOCKET, PIN: BRASS; MFR 06776 NO. 0001144 855981-002 SOCKET,PIN: BRASS; MFR 06776 NO. 0001145 855985 PIN SOCKET: MFR 06776, PART NO. 0001146 856221 CONNECTOR, 23 PIN RECEPTACLE: MFR 91662, PART NO. 00-7024-023-163-002 856222 RECEPTACLE: 23 CONT; MFR 91662, PART NO. 00-7024·023-139-002 856223-001 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTA;22UF 20%,20 VDCW; MFR 80183, NO. 196D226XOO2 856224-011 RESISTOR, VAR: TAPES RES .. 1000 OHMS 20%, 1/4 W; MFR 90201 856256 LAMP: 28V, 0.04 AMPS, 30W; MFR 08806 PART NO. 387 a 75; MFR 72259, PART NO. V1H-4.70 ASSY: MFR 53021 -32- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 856265-001 BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL: UPPER; MFR 53021 856265-002 BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL; LOWER; MFR 53021 856265-003 BLOCK ASSY, PHOTOCELL: LOOP ADAPTER; MFR 53021 856292 MOD KIT: FOR LOOP ADAPTER; MFR 53021 856385-XXX peM READ EQUALIZER BOARD: SUFFIX -001 THRU -008; MFR 53021 856387-001 JACK, TESTPOINT: BLACK; MFR 98291 856387-005 JACK, TESTPOINT: RED; MFR 98291 856387-007 JACK, TESTPOINT: YELLOW; MFR 98291 856397 HEAD ASSY: 1 IN .. PLAYBACK;W/LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021 856424 REEL DRIVE BOARD ASSY: MFR 53021 856427 MOTOR AND HUB ASSY: MFR 53021 856494 BLOCK, CONNECTOR: HOLD CONT; MATL PHEN; MFR 00779 PART NO. 200345-2 856495 BLOCK, CONNECTOR: MATL PHEN; MFR 00779 NO. 200346-2 856530 VIBRATION MOD KIT: MFR 53021 856618-001 FM RECORD BOARD: BASIC; WID HANDLE; OPT 855545-001 THRU 008; MFR 53021 856634 MICROPHONE: W/5 FT. CORD; MFR 74384, MODEL NO. M + 2U 856635 MICROPHONE ASSY: MFR 53021 856718 PIN, COAXICON = SUB-MINIATURE, SHORT; MFR 00779 NO. 51563-2 856772 VOICE PLAYBACK BOARD: MFR 53021 856835-001 KIT, RACK MTG: FM DENSITY CHANGE; MFR 53021 856856 BLOCK ASSY, LAMP:MFR 53021 856916 SENSOR: MFR 07263, PART NO. FPA210 856918 SPLICE DETECTOR BOARD: MFR 53021 856920 RELAY MTG BOARD: 1/2 IN.; 3500 SERIES; MFR 53021 856921 RELAY MTG BOARD ASSY: 1 IN. TAPE; MFR 53021 856923 RELAY MTG AUXILIARY BOARD ASSY: MFR 53021 856997 SWITCH ROTARY: 2 POLES 1 SEC, 9 POSITION; MFR 76854, PART NO. 274686-Al 857023-001 HOUR METER ASSY: MFR 53021 857027 COUNTER: MECHANICAL; 5 DRUM, 10 COUNT; MFR 33203 NO. D4335 857033 DIRECT RECORD BOARD: MFR 53021 857055 SWITCH, ROTARY: TWO SECT, 2 POLE, 7 POSN; MFR 76854 TYPE F 857065 BUS, BAR: BRASS; 9 TERMINAL HOLES; MFR 53021 857084 LEAD HARNESS: RC; INTERCOI\!; MFR 53021 857085 REMOTE CONTROL KIT: MFR 53021 857087 PREAMP REG. BOARD: MFR 53021 857098 COUNTER: FOOTAGE CNTR; 4 DIGIT; MECH CPLD; MFR 53021 -33- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 857122 HEAD: 1 IN. RECORD; 16 CHANNEL; MFR 26549 NO. 502300 857123 HEAD: 1 IN PLAYBACK; MFR 26549 PART NO. 502400 857124 HEAD: 1 IN. RECORD; 8 CHANNEL; MFR 26549 NO. 501300 8~7125 . TAPE HEAD: PLAYBACK; 1/2 IN:; 2 MHZ; 3600/4900 SERIES; MFR 26549 NO. 501400 857144 KIT, 1 IN. TAPE: ROLLER ASSY'S TO CONVERT 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021 857145 KIT,l/2IN. TAPE: ROLLER ASSY'S FOR 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021 857211 REMOTE VOICE CHASSIS: MFR 53021 857215 MULTIBAND FM REPRODUCE BOARD: MFR 53021 857222 REMOTE CONT & VOICE CHASSIS: MFR 53021 857241 SENSING POST ASSY: TWO SST CONTS, & LEADS W/IN SST POST; MFR 53021 857260 REMOTE SHORTING PLUG: MFR 53021 857266 RECORD HEAD ASSY: 1 INC, W/LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021 857267 RECORD HEAD ASSY: 1/2 INCH, W/LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021 857268 RECORD HEAD ASSY: 1 INCH, W{LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021 857269 RECORD HEAD ASSY: 1/2 INCH, W/LEAD HARNESS; MFR 53021 857276 CONNECTOR, PANEL: RECORD; GL MEL; MFR 53021 857317 JUMPER BOARD: PLAYBACK; MFR 53021 857343 CONNECTOR, BOARD: PLAYBACK; MFR 53021 857363 MOTOR & CAPSTAN ASSY: 28 VDC,2.8A, MFR 16858 MODEL 200A-1-5000G 857377 HOLDER, TIMER: MFR 89597 NO. 857453 HEAD: 1 IN PLAYBACK, 14 TRACK W/TERM BDS; MFR 53021 857461 TAPE HEAD -1/2 IN: 7 TRACK, RECORD; 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021 857476 MOTOR, TORQUE 857478 CONNECTOR, PANEL ASSY: 4900 SERIES; MFR 53021 857487 HEAD: 1 IN. RECORD, 14 TRACK; MFR 53021 857488 TAPE HEAD - 1 IN: 14 TRACK, RECORD; 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021 857491 HEAD: 1/2 IN PLAYBACK, 7 TRACKW/TERM BDS; MFR 53021 857492 TAPE HEAD .1/2IN: 7 TRACK, PLAYBACK; 3600 SERIES; MFR 53021 85882~OOl FAN: 115 VAC, 85882M02 FILTER ASSY: MFR 82877, PART NO. 15449 859389 SOCKET, COAXICON: MFR 00779, PART NO. 51564-2 859457-002 POWER CORD: 4900 SERIES; MFR 81774 PART NO. 4949 85952~001 NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: POSITIVE NAND GATE; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7400N 85952M02 NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: POSITIVE NAND GATE; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7401N 85952~003 NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: POSITIVE NOR GATE; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7402N 85952~006 NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: POSITIVE = 8 AMP, 81 5~60 920~6 W; MFR 86197, NO. DH-4530-A-1 CPS, 1PH MFR 82877, PART NO. M747115VAC N~ND ~ATE; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7430N SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 859520-018 NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: FLIP-FLOP; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7472N 859520-019 NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: FLIP-FLOP; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7473N 859520-020 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: DUAL D-TYPE EDGE-TRIGGERED FLIP-FLOP; MFR 01295 NO. SN7474N 859520-028 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: DIV-BY-TWELVE CNTR; MFR 01295 PART NO. SN7492N 859520-029 NETWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: 4-BIT BINARY COUNTER; MFR 01295, TYPE SN7493N 859520-034 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: HEX INVERTER; MFR 01295 TYPE SN7404N 859520-038 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: QUADR 2-INPUT POS AND GATE; TYPE SN7408N; MFR 01295 859520-042 NElWORK, SEMICONDUCTOR: TTL MONOSTABLE; MFR 01295, TYPE SN74121N 859520-047 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: B-BIT DATA SEL/MULTIPLEXER; NO. SN74151N MFR 01295 859520-048 INTEGRATED CKT: SYN DECADE UP/DOWN CNTR; MFR 01295 NO. SN74192N 859520-053 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: &BIT BINARY MULTIPLIER; TYPE SN7497N MFR 01295 859520-056 INTEGRATED CI RCUIT: DUAL SCHMITT TRIGGER; TYPE SN7413N; MFR 01295 859759 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: MFR 05277 TYPE 1Nl192 859763-001 PLUG CONN: BRASS, RED INSUL WIRE SIZE 22-18; MFR 00779 NO. 42599-2 859763-009 PLUG CONN: BRASS, BLUE INSUL WIRE SIZE 1&14; MFR 00779 NO. 60365-2 859763-015 PLUG CONN: BRASS, TRANS INSUL WIRE 22-18; MFR 00779 NO. 61060-1 859774-005 FUSE: CER TUBE; 250V, 5 AMPS; MFR 71400 TYPE ABC 859774-008 FUSE. CERAMIC TUBE: 250 V, 10 AMPS; MFR 71400 TYPE ABC 859774-011 FUSE, CERAMIC TUBE: 250 V, 20 AMPS; MFR 71400 TYPE ABC 859775-003 CAPACITOR. FIXED: TANTALUM; 0.22UF 20%, 35 VDCW; MFR 56289 TYPE 1960 859775-005 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 0,47UF 20%, 35 WVDC; MFR 56289 TYPE 1960 859775-007 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 1.0UF 20%, 35 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-009 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 2.2UF 20%, 20 VOCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-010 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 3.3UF 20%, 15 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-011 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM;4.7UF 20%,10 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-012 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 6.8UF 20%,6 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-013 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 6.8UF 20%, 35 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-014 . CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 10UF 20%,25 VDCW; MFR56289, TYPE 1960 859775-017 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 22UF 20%. 15 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-021 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 47UF 20%,6 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-026 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; l00uF 20%, 20 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-027 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 150UF 20%, 6 VDCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-029 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 220UF 20%, 10 VWOC; MfR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-031 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 4.7UF 20%, 35 VDC; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 859775-032 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 33UF 20%, 25 VOCW; MFR 56289, TYPE 1960 -35- SAt.lGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 859843 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT: OPR. AMPL; MFR 04713, TYPE MC1430P 859959-001 CAPACITOR, FIXED: CER; 0.01 UF -20, + 80%, 25V; MFR 56289, NO. C069B250Fl03Z 859959-002 CAPACITOR, FIXED: CER; 0.1 UF -20 + 80%, 10V; MFR 56289, NO. C052Bl00Gl04Z 859960-001 CAPACITOR, FIXED: CER; 0.001 UF MIN % l000V; MFR 56289, NO. C023Bl02El02P 859970 TRANSISTOR: NPN, SILICON; MFR 04713 TYPE 2N5089 859971 TRANSISTOR, PNP: SILICON; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N5087 864752-002 TERMINAL BOARD: 2 TERM, 5-40 TERM SCREW; MIL TYPE 37TB2 864752-004 TERMINAL BOARD: 4 TERM, 5-40 TERM SCREW; MIL TYPE 37TB4 864795-060 RESISTOR, FI XED: FI LM; 7870 OHMS 1%, 1/8 W; MFR 53021 864971-003 RES!STOR, FIXED: WW; 0.39 OHMS 10%, 3W; MFR 53021 864971-014 RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 30 OHMS 5%,3 W; MFR 53021 864971-018 RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 75 OHMS 5%, 3W; MFR 53021 864971-034 RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 2.2 OHMS 5%,3 W; MFR 53021 864972-014 RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 30 OHMS 5%, 6.5 W; MFR 53021 865206-005 TERMINAL BOARD: 5 TERM, 6-32 TERM SCREW; MIL TYPE 41TB-5 865257 MOTOR, PUMP: 3000 RPM; 115 V, 50/60 CY, 1 PH; MFR 62119; MODE L AB1C032 865610-008 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 50UH 1%, MFR 00853, NO. ET-l06-1280-2 865610-009 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 72UH 1%, MFR 00853, NO. ET-l06-13OO-2 865610-010 INDUCTOR, FIXED: 100UH 1%, MFR 00853, NO.ET-l06-1330-2 867618 TRANSISTOR: NPN, SILICON; MFR 04713, TYPE 2N3715 867638 SWITCH, SUB-MINIATURE: MFR 81073 867647 CONNECTOR, PLUG: 2 CONT., MALE; MFR 81312 NO. JF-2P 867648 CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE: 2 CONT .. FEMALE; MFR 81312 NO. JF-2S 867682 SOLENOID: 24 VDC COIL; MFR 29238, PART NO. 38C24DC-AY 867685 PHOTO-CELL: MFR 21370 NO. SS·23 867686 RESISTOR, FIXED: WW; 2 OHMS 5%,21 W; MFR 53021 870037 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1000 OHMS 5%, 2: W; MFR 01121, PART NO. HB1025 877885 TERMINAL POST ASSY: 4 TERM.; MFR 53021 878687 TERMINAL POST ASSY: 3 TERM.; MFR 53021 896196 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 22 OHMS 5%,114 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF220J 896197 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 150 OHMS, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF151J 896198 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 12000 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF123J 896269 RESISTOR, VAR: 5000 OHMS 10%. MFR 91637,SERIES 295 896282 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 6200 OHMS 5%, 114 W; MFR 01121 896293 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANTALUM; 270 UF 20%,6 V; MFR 01295, NO. SCM277HP006C4 896294 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANT; 2.2UF 20%, 20V;MFR 01295, #SCM225FP020C4 SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 896297 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANT; 33UF 20%, 20 V; MFR 01295, #SCM336GP020C4 896298 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANT; 1.0UF 20%, 35 V; MFR 01295, #SCM105FP035C4 896299 CAPACITOR, FIXED: TANT; 4.7UF 20%, 35 V; MFR 01295, #SCM475BP035C4 896458 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; MFR 01295, TYPE 1N4385 896464 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 5600 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF562J 896465 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 68 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF680J 896466 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1800 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF182J 896467 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 8200 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121 896468 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 820 OHMS 5%,114 W; MFR 53021 896470 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 180 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121 896474 RESISTOR, VAR: 500 OHMS 10%, MFR 91637, PART NO. A-10-W-5OQ..L 896475 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 100UUF 5%,300 VDCW; MFR 53021 896476 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 50UUF 5%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021 896477 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.04 UF 5%, 100 VDCW; MFR 72136, NO. 1DP-1-403J 896478 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.02UF 5%, 100 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 1DP-1-203J 896479 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.005UF 5%, 100 V; MFR 72136, TYPE lDP·1-502J 896492 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.03UF 5%,100 V; MFR 72136, TYPE lDP-1-303J 896601 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 47 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF470J 896602 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 100 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF101J 896603 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 220 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF221J 896604 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 330 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF331J 896605 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 470 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 0112.1, TYPE RC07GF471J 896606 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 680 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF681J 896607 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1000 OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF102J 896608 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1500 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF152J 896609 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 2200 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF222J 896610 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 3300 OHMS 5%,114 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF332J 896611 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 4700 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF472J 896612 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 6800 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF682J 896613 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 10K OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF103J 896614 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP;-15K OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF153J 896615 RESISTOR, FJXED: COMP; 22K OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF223J 896616 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 33K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF333J 896617 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 47K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF473J 896519 RESISTOR, FIXED:- COMP; 100K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF104J -37- SANGAMO PART NO. NAME AND DESCRIPTION 896620. RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 150K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GFl54J 896621 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 220K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF224J 896622 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 330K OHMS 5%,1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF334J 896623 RESI.,,)TOR, FIXED: COMP;470K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF474J 896625 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 1.0 MEGOHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121 896626 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 2700 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF272J 896627 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 27K OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF273J 896628 RESISTOR, FIXEO: COMP; 560 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121, TYPE RC07GF561J 896629 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 3900 OHMS 5%,114 W; MFR 0.1121, TYPE RCo.7GF392J 896633 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: MFR 73293, TYPE lN625 896642 RESISTOR, FIXED: 250 OHMS 5%, 2 W; MFR 63743, PART NO. 20S250 896655 CONNECTOR, JACK: RED; MFR 53021 896656 CONNECTOR. JACK: BLACK; MFR 530.21 896658 CONNECTOR, JACK: GREEN; MFR 53021 896709 FUSE: 2.5 AMP, 125 V; MFR 71400, PART NO. MOL 2.5 896717 CAPACITOR. FIXED: MICA; 10UUF 10%,50.0 VDCW; MFR 53021 896740. TRANSISTOR, NPN, GERMANIUM; MFR 01295, TYP.E 2N1304 896742 TRANSISTOR: PNP, GERMANIUM; MFR 01295, TYPE 2N1305 896798 CAPACITOR. FIXED: MYLAR; o..o.01UF 5%, 600 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 6DP-1-102 896835 STANDOFF: BRASS TERM. MFR 71279, PART NO. CAMBION 140-1785-02-00-00 896870. CAPACITOR. FIXED: MICA; 680UUF 5%, 300 VDCW; MFR 53021 897384 VALVE-50L: 24 VDC, 3 WAY, PUMP PORT 1/4-18NPT; MFR 96487 NO. 54P31o.3B-32 897386 GAUGE, VACUUM: 0-30.; MFR 61349 NO. 516V 897581 RESISTOR, FIXED: 10.0 OHMS, 20 W; MFR 63743, PART NO. 205100 897583 RESISTOR. FIXEO: WW; 0..1 OHMS 10%,3 W; MFR 63743, PART NO. 3X 897596 SEMICONDUCTOR, DIODE: SILICON; MFR 05277,TYPE lN1199 897604 CAPACITOR. FIXED: 40ooUF, 40 VDC; MFR 530.21 897605 CAPACITOR. FIXED: 25o.OUF, 12 VDCW; MFR 53021 897633 CONNECTOR, PLUG, 15 MALE CONT, MFR 02660, NO. 126-204 897634 CONNECTOR. RECEPTACLE: 15 FEMALE CONT; MFR 02660, NO. 126-20.5 897772 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 820 OHMS 5%,0.5 W; MFR 01121. PART NO. EB8215 8980.53 COUNTER, MECH: 01 RECT DR, 4 FIG. RESET; MFR 18911, NO. 4X11 LAC 8980.76 RV-VACUUM: SPRING LOADED; 3/8 NPTHEX HEAD; MFR 24t23 N();AA840 898234 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLSR; 0.01UF5%, 1o.OV; MFR 72136, TYPE 10P-l-l03J 898235 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0..1 UF 5%~100 VDCW; MFR 72136 898241 LAMP, JNCAND: MINTR INT. LTG; MFR 08806, NO. 680 °_38- SANGAMO PART NO; NAME AND DESCRIPTION 898314 RESISTOR, FI XE D: COMP; 1200 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 53021 898315 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 10 OHMS 5%,114 W; MFR 53021 898323 TERMINAL STRIP: 2 TERMINALS; MFR 75382, PART NO. 599-2-GMF 898330 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 27UUF 5%,300VOCW; MFR 53021 898331 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELECTLT; 2UF, -10%, +100%, 50 V; MFR 02567, TYPE APD 898333 CAPACITOR, FIXED: ELECTLT; 4UF, -10"A., +100%, 50 V; MFR 02567, TYPE APD 898335 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 500UUF 5%, 300 V; MFR 53021 898339 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 250UUF 5%, SOO VDCW; MFR 53021 898406 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 1oo0UUF 5%, 500 VDCW; MFR 53021 898743 LAMP: 28 VOLTS; 0.04 AMPS MFR 72619, CAT; NO_ 327 898807 SWITCH, MICRO: 5 AMPS, 250 VAC; MFR 91929, TYPE 15M1 899055 TRANSISTOR: NPN; GERMANIUM; MFR 01295, TYPE 2N697 899112 RESISTOR, FIXED: COMP; 39,000 OHMS 5%, 1/4 W; MFR 01121 899161 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA, 2700UUF 5%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021 899171 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 200UUF 1%,300 VDCW; MFR 53021. 899172 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 2000UUF 1%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021 899250 TERMINAL BOARD: BLACK PHEN., H TERM.; MFR 75382 PART NO. 599-4-GMF 899258 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; O.08UF 5%, 100 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 1DP-2-803 899443 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 1525 UUF 1.%,500 VDCW; MFR 53021 899464 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; O.OOO2UF 5%, 600 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 6DP-1-202J 899465 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; O.OO4UF 5%, 600 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 6DP-1-402J 899466 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.008UF5%, 600 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 6DP-2-802J 899467 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MYLAR; 0.015UF 5%,100 V; MFR 72136, TYPE 1DP-1-153J 899509 MOTOR, DC: 27V, 1.2 AMP, 9800 RPM; MFR 05624 NO. BYLM 92902-12 899548 CAPACITOR, FIXED: MICA; 600UUF 5%,300 VDCW; MFR 00853 899554 MOTOR ASSY: 27 VDC, 1.2 AMP, 9800 RPM;·MFR 53021 899957 CAPACITOR, FIX-ED: MICA; 150UUF 5%, 500VDCW; MFR 53021 LIST OF MANUFACTURERS 00779 G . 853 121 295 01766 02567 02660 02735 02929 04009 04191 04221 04713 05276 05277 05397 05574 .05624 06668 06776 07263 07716 07999 08806 09022 09023 09353 11384 11502 12954 13511 15449 16858 18583 18911 19701 ft332 ~70 21520 22711 22753 23383 24123 26549 28480 29238 30892 33203 44655 53021 55026 56289 61349 62119 63743 71279 71400 71468 71482 71590 71744 71785 72136 72259 72619 AMP INC SANGAMO ELECTRIC CO., (CAP. DIV.1 ALLEN BRADLEY CO TEXAS INSTRUMENTS INC INTERNATIONAL CRYSTAL MFG CO INC INTERNATIONAL ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES INC AMPHENOL CORP RCA CORP NEWARK ELECTRONICS CORP ARROW-HART AND HEGEMAN ELECTRIC CO PHOTOCIRCUITS CORP AEMCO DIV OF MIDTEX INC MOTOROLA SEMICONDUCTOR PRODUCTS INC POMONA ELECTRONICS CO INC WESTINGHOUSE ELECTRIC CORP UNION CARBIDE CORP ELECTRONICS DIV VIKING INDUSTRIES INC BARBER & COLMAN CO TEXAS INSTRUMENTS INC ROBINSON NUGENT INC FAIRCHILD CAMERA AND INSTRUMENT CORP IRC DIVISION OF TAW INC AMPHENOL CORP GENERAL ELECTRIC CO CORNELL-DUBILIER ELEC CORP CORNELL·DUBILIER ELECTRIC CORP C AND K COMPONENTS INC INLAND MOTOR CORP IRC DIVISION OF TRW INC DICKSON ELECTRONICS CORP BUNKERRAMO CORP ACCURATE DIAL & NAMEPLATE INC SEQUENTIAL ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS INC CURTIS INSTRUMENTS INC DURANT MFG CO ELECTRA/MIDLAND CORP ELECTRO MATERIALS INC SOLAR SYSTEMS INC FANSTEEL METALLURGICAL CORP TELEX-ACOUSTIC PRODUCTS DIV TELEX CORP UID ELECTRONICS CORP DYNAMICS RESEARCH CORP GAST MFG CORP G J M INC HEWLETT·PACKARD CO HART·ADVANCE RELAY DIV HECON CORP ENMCO OHMITE MFG CO SANGAMO ELECTRIC CO SIMPSON ELECTRIC CO SPRAGUE ELECTRIC CO AMETEK INC/U.S. GUAGE DIV UNIVERSAL ELECTRIC CO WARD LEONARD ELECTRIC CO CAMBRIDGE THERMIONIC CORP BUSSMANN MFG DIV OF MCGRAW & EDISON CO ITT CANNON ELECTRIC INC CLARE CP AND CB GLOBE·UNION INC CENTRALAB DIV CHICAGO MINIATURE LAMP WORKS CINCH MFG CO & HOWARD B JONES DIV ELECTRO MOTIVE MFG CO., INC NYTRONICS INC DIALIGHT CORP HARRISBURG, PA PICKENS,SC MILWAUKEE, WI DALLAS,TX OKLAHOMA CITY, OK NASHVILLE, TN BROADVIEW,IL SOMERVILLE, NJ CHlCAGO,lL HARTFORD, CT GLEN COVE, NY MANKATO,MN PHOENIX,AZ POMONA,CA YOUNGWOOD, PA NEW YORK, NY CHATSWORTH, CA ROCKFORD, IL HOUSTON,TX NEW ALBANY,IN MOUNTAIN VIEW, CA BURLINGTON,IA DELAVAN,WI CLEVELAND,OH PROVIDENCE, RI SANFORD,NC NEWTON,MA ROCKFORD,VA BOONE,NC SCOTTSDALE, AZ LOS GATOS, CA GLENDALE, CA ELMSFORD,NY MT. KISCO, NY MilWAUKEE, WI MINERAL WELLS, TX SAN DIEGO, CA SKOKIE,IL CHICAGO,ll MINNEAPOLIS, MN HOLLYWOOD, FL. STONEHAM,MA BENTON HARBOR, MI GLENDALE, CA PALO ALTO, CA ELKHORN,WI NEW SHREWSBURY, NJ CHICAGO,IL SKOKIE,IL SPRINGFIELD,IL CHICAGO,ll NORTH ADAMS, MA SELLERSBURG, PA OWOSSO,MI MOUNT VERNON, NY CAMBRIDGE, MA ST. LOUIS,MO LOS ANGELES, CA CHICAGO,IL MILWAUKEE, WI CHICAGO,ll CHICAGO,IL WILLIMANTIC, CT BERKELEY HEIGHTS, NJ BROOKLYN, NY LIST OF MANUFACTURERS (CONT.) 72982 73138 73293 73949 74199 74384 74545 74868 75042 75378 75382 75915 76854 77342 79727 80183 80294 81073 81312 81774 82076 82389 82647 82877 84171 86197 86684 88140 89597 90201 91506 91637 91662 91929 93790 94696 94707 95238 95263 96487 96733 96791 97954 98291 99779 99942 ERIE, PA FULLERTON,CA TORRANCE, CA CHICAGO,IL CHICAGO,IL CEDAR RAPIDS, IA BRIDGEPORT, CT DANBURY, CT PHILADELPHIA, PA SANDWICH, II. MT VERNON, NY DES PLAINES, IL CRYSTAL LAKE, IL PRINCETON, IN PHILADELPHIA, PA NORTH ADAMS, MA RIVERSIDE, CA LA GRANGE, IL OAKVILLE, CT PAWTUCKET, NJ MARTINSBURG, WV CHICAGO,IL ATTLEBORO, MA WOODSTOCK, NY GREAT NECK, NY CLIFTON HEIGHTS, PA HARRISON, NJ LlNCOLN,IL HUNTINGDON VALLEY, PA INDIANAPOLIS, IN ATTLEBORO, MA COLUMBUS, NB WILLOW GROVE, PA FREEPORT,IL NEW BEDFORD, MA CHICAGO,IL PORTLAND, ME WOODSIDE, NY LONG ISLAND, NY KEAILWORTH, NJ SAN FERNANDO, CA JANESVILLE, WI BRONX, NY MAMARONECK, NY LANSDOWNE, PA EL MONTE,CA ERIE TECHNOLOGICAL PRODUCTS, INC BECKMAN INSTRUMENTS IN C HUGHES AIRCRAFT CO GUARDIAN ELECTRIC MFG CO QUAM-NICHOLS CO TURNER CO INC HUBBELL HARVEY INC AMPHENOL CORP RF OIV IRC DIV OF TRW INC CTS KN IGHTS INC; KULKA ELECTRIC CORP L1TTELFUSE INC OAK MFG CO AMERICAN MACHINE & FOUNDRY CO CONTINENTAL-WIRT ELECTRONICS CORP SPRAGUE PRODUCTS CO BOURNS INC GRAYHILLINC WINCHESTER ELECTRONICS INC CAROL WIRE AND CABLE CORP CAROL ELCTRONICS INC SWITCHCRAFT INC TEXAS INSTRUMENT INC ROTRONINC ARCO ELECTRONICS INC LITTON PRECISiON PROD INC RCA CORP ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS CUTLERHAMMER INC FREDERICKS CO MALLORY CAPAClTOR CO AUGATINC DALE ELECTRONICS INC ELCO CORP HONEYWELL INC CORNELLDUBIUER ELECTRONICS MAGNECRAFT ELECTRIC CO STORY MARINE RAI LWA Y CONTINENTAL CONNECTOR CORP LEE CRAFT MFG CO INC VALCOR ENGINEERING CORP SAN FERNANDO E LEC MFG CO BUNKERRAMO CORP US COMPONENTS INC SEALECTRO -CORP BARNES CORP GLOBEUNION INC -41-
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2018:02:24 19:39:12-08:00 Modify Date : 2018:02:24 19:58:19-08:00 Metadata Date : 2018:02:24 19:58:19-08:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:fab1cde8-929f-8a44-a36b-375d4e02e763 Instance ID : uuid:1ede5497-aaa4-864d-8be1-7f350b7e342c Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 316EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools